Skip to main content

Full text of "Catalogue number [of the Bulletin]"

See other formats


WELLESLEY  COLLEGE 
BULLETIN 


CALENDAR 

t920-I921 


WELLESLEY,  MASSACHUSETTS 
JANUARY,  ^921 


PUBLISHED  BY  THE  COLLEGE  IN  JANUARY,  MAY,  JUNE, 
NOVEMBER,  DECEMBER 

Entered  as  second-class  matter  December  20, 1911,  at  the  post-office,  Wellesley, 
Massachusetts,  under  Act  of  Congress  of  July  16, 1894. 

SERIES  10  '  NUMBER  1 


WELLESLEY    COLLEGE 
CALENDAR 


1920-1921 


CORRESPONDENCE 


All  inquiries  regarding  admission  should  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary 
to  the  Board  of  Admission. 

Applications  for  general  information  should  be  addressed  to  Miss 
Mary  Caswell.  As  Secretary  of  the  Appointment  Bureau,  Miss 
Caswell  is  also  prepared  to  furnish  full  and  confidential  information  in 
regard  to  the  qualifications,  character,  and  experience  of  former  stu- 
dents of  the  College  as  candidates  for  teaching  and  other  vocations. 
Former  students  of  the  College  who  wish  situations  have  the  aid  of  the 
Appointment  Bureau. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


AND 


cokrespondence     . 
Calendar  .... 
Board  of  Trustees 

Standing  Committees   . 
Officers    of    Instruction 
Government     . 

Standing  Committees   . 
Foundation  and  Purpose 
Admission  .... 

Definition  of  Requirements 

Examinations 

To  Advanced  Standing 

Of  Candidates  for  M.A.  Degree 

Of  Students  not  Candidates  for 

a  Degree 

Courses  of  Instruction: — 

Archaeology ,  Classical  . 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biblical  History     .... 

Botany 

Chemistry 

Economics 

Education 

English  Literature 

English  Composition     . 

English  Language .        .       .       . 

French 

Geology  and  Geography 

German 

Greek 

History 


2 

S 
6 
7 

9 

22 
23 

24 

26 

42 

47 
48 

49 

50 
SI 
55 
57 
59 
66 
68 
73 
76 
83 
85 
86 
90 
94 
99 
102 


Hygiene 108 


PAGE 

Italian 117 

Latin 119 

Mathematics 123 

Music 127 

Philosophy  and  Psychology         .  134 

Physics 139 

Reading  and  Speaking  .       .       .  141 

Spanish 143 

Zoology  and  Physiology      .       .  145 

Examinations  (College)  ...  149 
Degrees: — 

Requirements  for  B.A.  Degree    .  149 

Requirements  for  M.A.  Degree  .  152 

Expenses 152 

Residence iS5 

Health i5S 

Fellowships  and  Scholarships  .  156 

For  Graduates       ....  156 

For  Undergraduates     .       .       .  I59 

Founders  Hall       ....  165 

Libraries 165 

Gymnasium 166 

Art  Building  and  Collections  .  166 

Music  Equipment   .       .       .       .  167 
Laboratories  and   Scientific 

Collections     ....  168 

Forms  of  Bequest        .       .       .  172 

Degrees  Conferred  in  1920      .  173 

Certificates  in  Hygiene     .       .  175 

Honor  Scholarships      .       .       .  176 

Summary  of  Stltdents  .       .       .  178 

Officers  OF  Alumna  AssocLATioN  179 

Index 181 


1920 

1921 

1922 

3ui>e 

3anuaiT2 

3uiie 

^anuarie 

s 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F|S 

s 

M 

T 

W 

T 

F 

S 

s 

M 

T 

•w 

1 

F 

8 

s 

M 

T 

w 

T 

F 

s 

I 

s 

3 

I 

I 

3 

I 

2 

3 

4 

S 

6 

7 

' 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

2 

3 

4 

S 

6 

7 

8 

I 

t 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

8 

9 

10 

II 

12 

13 

M 

11 

13 

i: 

i^ 

'S 

16 

17 

9 

10 

II 

12 

13 

11 

IS 

10 

II 

12 

1; 

I. 

IS 

16 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

19 

20 

21 

22 

2- 

24 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

17 

i8|,9 

20 

21 

22 

23 

23 

24 

2S 

26 

27 

28 

1  =5 

2e 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

23 

30 

24 
31 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

24 
31 

2526 

27 

'T. 

30 

29 

30 

3' 

Buguet 

ifebiuais 

Bugiist 

ifebiuarB    || 

I 

3 

4 

5 

6 

J    3 

3 

4 

S 

I 

2 

3 

4    S 

6 

I 

2|  31  4 

8 

9 

10 

II 

I- 

14 

6 

7 

8    9 

10 

II 

12 

7 

i 

9 

10 

II  12 

13 

s 

6 

t 

910 

II 

1  "> 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

13 

M 

.m6 

17 

18 

19 

M 

IS 

16 

17 

18  19 

20 

12 

13 

14 

IS 

1617 

18 

22 

2l 

24 

2.'5 

26 

27 

28 

20 

21 

2223 

24 

2S 

26 

21 

23 

24 

25  26 

27 

19 

20 

21 

2324 

2S 

29 

30 

31 

27 

2a 

•• 

•• 

28 

29 

30 

31 

:::: 

26 

27 

28 

Septcmbev 

/mavcb 

September 

ilDaicb       II 

.. 

I 

2 

3 

4 

.. 

I 

2 

3 

4 

s 

.. 

,_ 

.. 

I 

2 

3 

I 

3 

3    4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

12 

4 

s 

( 

7 

£ 

9 

IC 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

12 

13 

14 

15 

'7 

18 

13 

M 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

II 

12 

13 

14 

IS 

16 

17 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17118 

■9 

20 

21 

22 

2.- 

24 

25 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

2S 

26 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24'2S 

27 

28 

29 

30 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

25 

26 

"'. 

28 

29 

30 

26 

27 

=S' 

'° 

=1:: 

©ctobei- 

Ilpvll 

©ctobec 

Bpril        III 

3 

4 

's*6 

7 

I 
8 

2 
9 

3 

4 

s 

6 

7 

8 

2 
9 

2 

4 

5 '6 

7 

8 

•• 

■4's"6"7    f' 

1^13 

14 

',■; 

16 

10 

II 

12 

IS 

16 

9 

10 

II 

121; 

14 

It 

9 

10 

Il|l2  13:14  15 

17 

18 

1920 

21 

22 

23 

17 

i£ 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

It 

17 

18 

21 

22 

16 

17 

18,19:20:21122 

24 

=5 

26J27 

28 

29 

30 

24 

2=; 

26 

28 

29 

30 

23 

24 

25 

2627 

28 

2S 

23 

24 

25[26,27|28i29 

ii 

..!.. 

.. 

- 

•• 

30 

31 

30 

..I..I..I.  1.. 

HAovembev 

/ma\] 

•B^oveiubei-  | 

/ma?        Ill 

I 

a    3 

4 

s 

6 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5    61  7 

I    21  3 

4 

5 

I 

3 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

9  10 

n 

12 

13 

8 

9 

10 

II 

12  13  14 

6 

7 

8    9^0 
1516^7 

II 

II 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

13 

M 

»5 

16  17 

18 

19 

20 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19  20  21 

13 

14 

18 

I? 

14 

IS 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

2324 

2^ 

26 

27 

22 

23 

24 

2,S 

26  27  28 

20 

21 

22  23  24 

2S 

2t 

21 

22 

23 

24 

2S 

26 

27 

b8 

29 

± 

:: 

^"° 

3* 

::  ::  :: 

27 

!!* 

29  30  . . 

28 

29 

'!=: 

S)cccnitier 

3une        1 

December    | 

3une        III 

I 

2 

3 

4 

I 

2 

3 

4 

..i.. 

I 

2|    3 

1^3 

s 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

s 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

II 

4 

s|  6 

7 

8 

9I10 

4    5    6 

7 

8    pjio 

»= 

13 

14 

•S 

16 

17 

18 

12 

«3 

14 

'S 

16 

17 

18 

12.13 

14 

IS 

16.17 

IH2I3 

14 

15  16  17 

J920 

=J 

■23 

24 

2S 

19 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

18 

1920 

21 

22 

23I24    l8!l9  20'2I 

22i23!24 

rri-! 

I^ 

]! 

31 

!^ 

2627 

28 

29 

30 

— 

25 

T. 

28 

29 

30J3I  2526,27282930,311 1 

CALENDAR 


Academic  Year  1920-1921 

Examinations September  20-23,  1920. 

Academic  year  begins Monday,  September  27. 

Holiday,  Thanksgiving  Day,  November  25. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.m.  Thursday,  December  16,  1920,  until  12.30 
p.  M.  Wednesday,  January  5,  1921. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  M.  Wednesday,  January  5. 
Second  Semester  begins         ....         Monday,  February  14. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Thursday,  March  24,  until  12.30  p.  m.  Tues- 
day, April  5. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  m.  Tuesday,  April  5. 

Commencement Monday,  June  20. 

Alumna  Day Tuesday,  June  21. 


Academic  Year  1921-1922 

Examinations September  19-22,  1921. 

Registration  closes  for  new  students  at  10  p.  m.  Monday,  September  19. 
Registration  closes  for  all  other  students  at  10  p.  m.  Friday,  September 

23- 
Halls  of  Residence  open  for  new  students  at  9  a.  m.  Monday,  September 

19. 
Halls  of  Residence  open  for  all  other  students  at  2  p.  m.  Thursday, 

September  22. 

Academic  year  begins Monday,  September  26. 

Holiday,  Thanksgiving  Day,  November  24. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  December  14,  1921,  until  12.30 

p.  M.  Wednesday,  January  4,  1922. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  January  4. 
Second  Semester  begins         ....  Monday,  February  13. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Friday,  March  24,  until  12.30  p.m.  Tuesday 

April  4. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  12.30  p.  m.  Tuesday,  April  4. 

Commencement Tuesday,  June  20. 

Alumna  Day Wednesday,  June  21. 


Trustees 


1920-21 


BOARD   OF  TRUSTEES 


EDWIN  FARNHAM   GREENE,  B.A Boston. 

President  of  the  Board. 


WILLIAM  HENRY  LINCOLN      . 

Vice  President. 


SARAH  LAWRENCE 


BrookUne. 


Boston. 


Secretary. 


Boston. 


LEWIS  KENNEDY  MORSE,  B.A.,  LL.B. 
Treasurer. 

WILLIAM  FAIRFIELD  WARREN,  S.T.D.,  LL.D.   .         BrookUna. 

LILIAN  HORSFORD   FARLOW Cambridge. 

EDWIN  HALE   ABBOT,  LL.B Cambridge. 

LOUISE  McCOY  NORTH,  M.A Madison,  N.J. 

ANDREW  FISKE,  Ph.D Boston. 

GEORGE  EDWIN  HORR,  D.D.,  LL.D.      .       .         Newton  Centre. 

GEORGE  HOWE  DAVENPORT Boston. 

WILLIAM  EDWARDS  HUNTINGTON,  S.T.D.,  LL.D., 

Newton  Centre. 

WILLIAM  BLODGET,  B.A Chestnut  Hill. 

CAROLINE  HAZARD,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D.      .       Peace  Dale,  R.I. 
GEORGE  HERBERT  PALMER,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  L.H.D.,  LL.D., 

Cambridge. 

EUGENE  V.  R.  THAYER,  B.A New  York  City. 

GALEN  L.  STONE     .... 
PAUL  HENRY  HANUS,  S.B.,  LL.D. 
CANDACE  CATHERINE  STIMSON, 
ALICE  UPTON  PEARMAIN,  M.A. 
BELLE  SHERWIN,  B.S.    . 
CHARLOTTE  HOWARD  CONANT,  B. 
ALFRED  LAWRENCE  AIKEN,  M.A. 
DAVID   LINN  EDSALL,  M.D.       . 
JESSIE   CLAIRE  McDONALD,  M.S. 
ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A. 


B.S, 


A. 


BrookUne. 

Cambridge. 

New  York  City. 

Boston. 

.  Willoughby,0. 

Natick. 

.  Worcester. 

Cambridge. 

Washington,  D.C. 

Litt.D.,  LL.D., 

{ex  officio)  Wellesley  College. 


1920-21  Trustees 


EXECUTIVE   COMMITTEE 


Edwin  Farnham  Greene,  Chairman. 
Andrew  Fiske.  Candace  Catherine  Stimson. 

George  Howe  Davenport.  Ellen  Fitz  Pendleton  {ex  officio). 

Galen  L.  Stone.  Lewis  Kennedy  Morse  {ex  officio). 


FINANCE   COMMITTEE 


William  Blodget,  Chairman. 
Edwin  Farnham  Greene.  Eugene  V.  R.  Thayer. 

Galen  L.  Stone.  Lewis  Kennedy  Morse  {ex  officio). 


COMMITTEE  ON  BUILDINGS 


George  Howe  Davenport,  Chairman. 
Sarah  Lawrence.  Ellen  Fitz  Pendleton. 

William  Blodget.  Edwin  Farnham  Greene. 

Alice  Upton  Pearmain.  Lewis  Kennedy  Morse. 


COMMITTEE  ON  GROUNDS 


Caroline  Hazard,  Chairman. 
Lilian  Horsford  Farlow.  Charlotte  Howard  Conant. 

Belle  Sherwin.  Ellen  Fitz  Pendleton. 

Galen  L.  Stone.  Lewis  Kennedy  Morse. 


LIBRARY   COUNCIL 


Trustee  Members 

George  Herbert  Palmer.  Ellen  Fitz  Pendleton  {ex  officio). 

Lilian  Horsford  Farlow.  Lewis  Kennedy  Morse. 

Faculty  Members 

Leah  Brown  Allen.  Margaret  Hastings  Jackson. 

Mabel  Elisabeth  Hodder.  Helen  Abbot  Merrill. 

Alice  Huntington  Bushee.  Ethel  Dane  Roberts  {ex  officio). 


1920-21  Faculty 

OFFICERS  OF   INSTRUCTION   AND 
GOVERNMENT^ 


ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 
President. 

SARAH  FRANCES  WHITING,  Sc.D., 

Professor  of  Physics  and  Astronomy,  Emeritus. 

MARY  ALICE  WILLCOX,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  Zoology,  Emeritus. 

ANGIE  CLARA  CHAPIN,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Greek  Language  and  Literature,  Emeritus. 

KATHARINE  LEE  BATES,'  M.A.,  Litt.D,, 
Professor  of  English  Literature. 

ALICE  VAN  VECHTEN  BROWN, 

Clara  Bertram  Kimball  Professor  of  Art. 

MARY  WHITON  CALKINS,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 
Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Psychology. 

ELLEN  LOUISA  BURRELL,  B.A., 

Professor  of  Pure  Mathematics,  Emeritus. 

HAMILTON  CRAWFORD  MACDOUGALL,  Mus.D., 
Professor  of  Music. 

ELIZABETH  KIMB.\LL  KEND.ALL,  M.A.,  LL.B., 
Professor  of  History,  Emeritus. 

ADELINE  BELLE  HAWES,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Latin  Language  and  Literature. 

MARGARETHE  MtJLLER, 

Professor  of  German  Language  and  Literature. 

SOPHIE  CHANTAL  HART,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

MARGARET  CLAY  FERGUSON,'  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Botany. 

ELIZA  HALL  KENDRICK,  Ph.D., 

Helen  Day  Gould  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 

'  The  officers  of  instruction  are  arranged  in  three  groups;   the  first  group  includes 
professors  and  associate  professors,  the  second  instructors,  and  the  third  other  officers. 
2  Absent  on  Sabbatical   leave. 


10  Faculty  1920-21 

ELIZABETH  FLORETTE  FISHER,  B.S., 
Professor  of  Geology  and  Geography. 

AMY  MORRIS  ROMANS,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Hygiene,  Emeritus. 

MARGARET  HASTINGS  JACKSON, 

Professor  of  Italian  and  Curator  of  the  Frances  Pearsons  Plimp- 
ton Library  of  Italian  Literature. 

MALVINA  BENNETT,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Reading  and  Speaking. 

ARTHUR  ORLO  NORTON,  M.A., 

Professor  of  the  History  and  Principles  of  Education. 

LOUISE  SHERWOOD  McDOWELL,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  Physics. 

LOUIS  PERDRIAU,^  Lie.  :fcs  L., 

Professor  of  French  Language  and  Literature. 

ANNA  JANE  McKEAG,  Ph.D.,  LL.D., 

Professor  of  the  History  and  Principles  of  Education. 

EVA  CHANDLER,  B.A., 

Professor  of  Mathematics,  Emeritus. 

MARY  SOPHIA  CASE,  B.A., 

Professor  of  Philosophy. 
VIDA  DUTTON  SCUDDER,3  M.A., 

Professor  of  English  Literature. 

KATHARINE  MAY  EDWARDS,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Greek  and  Comparative  Philology. 

CHARLOTTE  ALMIRA  BRAGG,  B.S., 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
MARGARET  POLLOCK  SHERWOOD,  Ph.D.,  L.H.D., 

Professor  of  English  Literature. 
ADELAIDE  IMOGENE  LOCKE,  B.A.,  S.T.B., 

Associate  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 
HELEN  ABBOT  MERRILL,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Mathematics. 
MARIAN  ELIZABETH  HUBBARD,  B.S., 

Professor  of  Zoology. 

*  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave. 
3  Absent  on  leave. 


1920-21  Faculty  11 

ALICE  WALTON,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Latin  and  Archaeology, 

ELEANOR  ACHESON  McCULLOCH  GAMBLE,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Psychology  and  Director  of  the  Psychological  Labo- 
ratory. 

ALICE  VINTON  WAITE,  M.A., 

Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature. 
Dean. 

CLARENCE  GRANT  HAMILTON,  M.A., 
Professor  of  Music. 

LAURA  EMMA  LOCKWOOD,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Language. 

MARTHA  HALE  SHACKFORD,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  English  Literature. 

CAROLINE  REBECCA  FLETCHER,  M.A., 
Associate  Professor  of  Latin. 

JULIA  SWIFT  ORVIS,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  History. 

NATALIE  WIPPLINGER,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  German. 

GRACE  EVANGELINE  DAVIS,"  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Physics. 

ROXANA  HAYWARD  VIVIAN,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Mathematics  and  Director  of  the  Department  of 
Hygiene. 
CHARLES  LOWELL  YOUNG,  B.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

EDNA  VIRGINIA  M0FFETT,3  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  History. 

CAROLINE  BURLING  THOMPSON,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  Zoology. 

MARTHA  PIKE  CONANT,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

AGNES  FRANCES  PERKINS,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

3  Absent  on  leave. 

*  Absent  on  leave  for  the  second  semester. 


12  Faculty  1920-21 

MABEL  ELISABETH  HODDER,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  History. 

LAETITIA  MORRIS  SNOW,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Botany. 

WILLIAM  SKARSTROM,  M.D., 

Professor  of  Hygiene. 
JOSEPHINE  HARDING  BATCHELDER,3  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

CLARA  ELIZA  SMITH,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

EUGENE  CLARENCE  HOWE,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Hygiene. 

AMY  KELLY,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Language  and  Composition. 

JOHN  CHARLES  DUNCAN,^  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  Astronomy  and  Director  of  the  Whitin  Observatory. 

JULIA  ELEANOR  MOODY,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Zoology. 

ALICE  IDA  PERRY  WOOD,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

MARY  CAMPBELL  BLISS,  M.A., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Botany. 

ALICE  HUNTINGTON  BUSHEE,  M.A., 
Associate  Professor  of  Spanish. 

EDWARD  ELY  CURTIS,  Ph.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  History. 

ELIZABETH  WHEELER  MANWARING,  B.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

HELEN  SOMERSBY  FRENCH,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 
MURIEL  ANNE  STREIBERT,  B.A.,  B.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 

ALFRED  DWIGHT  SHEFFIELD,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

MABEL  ANNIE  STONE,  M.A., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Botany. 
» Absent  on  leave. 


1920-21  Faculty  13 

LAURA  ALANDIS  HIBBARD,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

MARY  JEAN  LANIER,  B.S., 

Associate  Professor  of  Geology  and  Geography. 

OLIVE  DUTCHER,  M.A.,  B.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 

FRANCES  LOWATER,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics. 

EUNICE  CLARA  SMITH-G0ARD,3  M.A., 
Assistant  Professor  of  French. 

MABEL  MINERVA  YOUNG,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

ALICE  MARIA  OTTLEY,^  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Botany. 

MYRTILLA  AVERY,  B.L.S.,  M.A., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Art. 

JANE  ISABEL  NEWELL,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Economics  and  Sociology. 

HOWARD  EDWARD  PULLING,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Botany. 

ANNIE  KIMBALL  TUELL,  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  English  Literature  and  Composition. 

ANNA  BERTHA  MILLER,  Ph.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Latin. 

LENNIE  PHOEBE  COPELAND,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

MARY  FLORENCE   CURTIS,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

LOUISE  PETTIBONE  SMITH,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  BibUcal  History. 

SEAL  TH0MPS0N,3  M.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 

HORACE  BIDWELL  ENGLISH,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology. 

3  Absent  on  leave. 


14  Faculty  1920-21 

JUDITH  BLOW  WILLIAMS,  Ph.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  History. 

LUCY  WILSON,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics. 

HELEN  SARD  HUGHES,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 
BARNETTE  MILLER,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  History. 

ALICE  MIDDLETON  BORING,  Ph.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Zoology. 

FRANCES  LESTER  WARNER,  B.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

ELIZABETH  DONNAN,  B.A., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics  and  Sociology. 

FRANCES  FENTON  BERNARD,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Economics  and  Sociology. 

ELIZABETH  PARKER  HUNT,  Ph.B., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Reading  and  Speaking. 

MARY  AMERMAN  GRIGGS,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 

BLANCHE  CONORTON,  Agregee  d'histoire. 
Visiting  Professor  of  French. 

HELENE  BXMLERT  BULLOCK,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

EMILY  JOSEPHINE  HURD, 
Instructor  in  Pianoforte. 

ALBERT  THOMAS  FOSTER, 
Instructor  in  Violin. 

LEAH  BROWN  ALLEN,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Astronomy. 

BLANCHE  FRANCIS  BROCKLEBANK, 
Instructor  in  Pianoforte. 

EDITH  MARGARET  SMAILL, 

Instructor  in  Reading  and  Speaking. 

EDNA  BARRETT  MANSHIP, 
Instructor  in  Hygiene. 


1920-21  Faculty  15 

MARGARET  JOHNSON, 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 
MATHILDE  BOUTRON-DAMAZY,  B.  I:s  L., 

Instructor  in  French. 
HELEN  ISABEL  DAVIS,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Horticulture  and  Landscape  Gardening. 
BERTHA  KNICKERBOCKER  STRAIGHT.s  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Art. 
ELIZABETH  HALSEY,  Ph.B., 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 
ANGELA  PALOMO,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Spanish. 
MARY  SOPHIE  HAAGENSEN, 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 

MARGARET  TERRELL  PARKER,  B.S., 

Instructor  in  Geology  and  Geography. 

FLORA  ISABEL  MACKINNON,^  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Philosophy. 

DOROTHY  WARNER  DENNIS,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  French. 

ADA  MAY  COE,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Spanish. 

LILLIAN  ELOISE   BAKER,s  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Chemistry. 

FLORENCE  BEARD   BRACQ,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  French. 

JOSEPH  GOUDREAULT, 

Instructor  in  Vocal  Music. 

MARGARET  ALGER  HAYDEN,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Zoology. 

MARY  BOWEN  BRAINERD,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  English  Literature. 

MARTHE  PUGNY, 

Instructor  in  French. 

HELEN  BARTON,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Mathematics. 

5  Appointed  for  the  first  semester  only. 
*  Appointed  for  the  second  semester  only. 


16  Faculty  1920-21 

MARION  ELIZABETH  STARK,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Mathematics. 

RUTH  ELVIRA  CLARK,  Litt.D., 
Instructor  in  French. 

RAYMOND   CLARK  ROBINSON, 

Instructor  in  Musical  Theory. 

HARRY  EDWARD  BROWN,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  Hygiene. 

MARY  REES  MULLINER,  M.D., 

Instructor  in  Hygiene. 

BREWER  GODDARD  WHITMORE,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  History. 

GLADYS  PRISCILLA  HAINES,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  French. 

KATHARINE   CANBY  BALDERSTON,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  English  Literature. 

ELISABETH  WILKINS  THOMAS,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

MARGERY  CLAIRE   CARLSON,  M.S., 
Instructor  in  Botany. 

HELEN  STILLWELL  THOMAS,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Botany. 

HAZEL  BRILL  JACKSON,? 
Instructor  in  Modelling. 

MARIE  ELIZABETH  PONSOLLE,  Professorat  (langues), 
Instructor  in  French. 

LEILA  RUTH  ALBRIGHT,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Economics  and  Sociology. 

MARION  BANCKER,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Economics  and  Sociology. 

OLGA  SPENCER  HALSEY,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Economics  and  Sociology. 

BEATRICE  ALLARD  BROOKS,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  BibUcal  History. 

1  Appointed  for  the  winter  term  only. 


1920-21  Faculty  17 

MARGARET  BANCROFT,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  History. 

FRANCES  BRADSHAW  BLANSHARD,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

HARRIET  BOYD  HAWES,  M.A.,  L.H.D., 

Instructor  in  Art. 

FANNY  GARRISON,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Hygiene. 

RUTH  MARGERY  ADDOMS,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Botany. 

MIRIAM  LOUISE   MERRITT,  Mus.B. 
Assistant  in  Music. 

MARGARET   ESTHER   ELLIOTT,  B.S., 

Assistant  in  Zoology. 

ELLEN  ARMSTRONG,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Botany. 

HILDA  LYDIA  BEGEMAN,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Physics. 

ELVIE  LYONA  BISHOP,  M.A., 

Assistant  in  Physics. 

FRANCES  VANDERVOORT  TRIPP,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Geology  and  Geography. 

ANNA  PARKER   FESSENDEN,  M.S., 
Assistant  in  Botany. 

HARRIET  VOSE,  M.A., 
Assistant  in  Zoology. 

ELEANOR  DEWEY  MASON,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Zoology. 

ALBERT  PITTS  MORSE, 

Curator  of  Zoology  Museum  and  Lecturer  in  Entomology 

GLADYS  ADAMS  TURNBACH,  B.A., 

Art  Museum  Assistant  in  Charge. 

EDWARD  ERASTUS  BANCROFT,  M.A.,  M.D., 

Consulting  Physician. 

MABEL  AUSTIN  SOUTHARD,  M.D., 
Lecturer  on  Special  Hygiene. 


18  Faculty  1920-21 

ELIZA  JACOBUS  NEWKIRK,  M.A., 

Lecturer  in  History  of  Architecture. 

GORDON  BOIT  WELLMAN,  Th.D., 
Lecturer  in  Biblical  History. 

DONALD   SKEELE  TUCKER,  M.A., 
Lecturer  in  Economics. 

ETHEL  DANE  ROBERTS,  B.A.,  B.L.S., 
Librarian. 

ANTOINETTE  BRIGHAM  PUTNAM  METCALF,  M.A., 
Associate  and  Reference  Librarian. 

LILLA  WEED,  M.A., 

Associate  Librarian. 

HELEN  MOORE  LAWS,  B.A., 
Cataloguer. 

JULIA  CLEMMA  KNOWLTON,  Ph.B.,  B.L.S., 
Librarian  of  Mary  Hemenway  Hall. 


EDITH  SUSAN  WHITAKER,  M.A., 
Alice  Freeman  Palmer  Fellow. 


1920-21  Officers  of  Administration  19 


OFFICERS   OF   ADMINISTRATION 


ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 

PRESroENT. 

ALICE  VINTON  WAITE,  MA., 
Dean. 
Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature. 

EDITH  SOUTHER  TUFTS,  M.A., 
Dean  of  Residence. 

KATHARINE  PIATT  RAYMOND,  B.S.,  M.D., 

Resident  Physician. 

MARY  CASWELL, 

Secretary  to  the  President. 

MARY  FRAZER  SMITH,  B.A., 
College  Recorder. 

MARIE  LOmSE  STOCKWELL,  B.A., 

Assistant  Secretary  to  the  President. 

FRANCES  LOUISE  KNAPP,  B.A., 

Secretary  to  the  Board  of  Admission. 

MARIAN  GIBBS  MILNE,  B.A., 
Secretary  to  the  Dean. 

BERTHA  LYDIA  CASWELL, 

Purchasing  Agent. 

EVELYN  AMELIA  MUNROE,  B.A., 
Cashier. 

CHARLOTTE  SCOTT  WHITON, 
Purveyor. 

MARY  SNOW, 

Head  of  Washington  House. 
HELEN  WILLARD  LYMAN,  B.A., 

Head  of  the  Elms  and  Joslin  House. 

HARRIET  LESTER, 

Head  of  Shafer  Hall. 

MABEL  PRIEST  DANIEL,  B.A.. 
Head  of  Cazenove  Hall. 


20  Officers  of  Administration  1920-21 

EFFIE  JANE  BUELL, 

Head  of  Pomeroy  Hall. 

CHARLOTTE  HENDERSON  CHADDERDON, 
Head  of  Claflin  HaU. 

ELIZABETH  BURROUGHS  WHEELER, 
Head  of  Eliot  House. 

KATHARINE  HARRIS, 

Head  of  Little  House. 

FANNIE  PADDOCK  MILLER,^ 

Head  of  the  Elms  and  Joslin  House. 

ALICE  LILLIAN  McGREGOR, 
Head  of  Beebe  Hall. 

HARRIET  HATTON  MAYNARD, 
Head  of  Townsend  House. 

ALICE  VARNEY  WARD, 
Head  of  Tower  Court. 

MARTHA  FAY  CLARKE, 

Head  of  Leighton  House. 

MARY  HUBBARD  MORSE  RICHARDSON, 
Head  of  the  Homestead. 

JESSIE  ANN  ENGLES, 

Head  of  Crofton  House  and  Ridgeway  Refectory. 

JOSEFA  VICTORIA  RANTZIA  STALLKNECHT, 
Head  of  Lovewell  House. 

VIOLA  FLORENCE  SNYDER, 
Head  of  Noanett  House. 

ADALINE  FOOTE  HAWLEY,  B.A., 

Head  of  the  Birches. 
ELVIRA  GENEVIEVE  BRANDAU, 

Head  of  Wood  House. 

FRANCES  RAYNOR  MEAKER,^ 

Head  of  Webb  House. 
MARY  HALE  YOUNG,s  B.S., 

Head  of  Webb  House. 

3  Absent  on  leave. 

5  Appointed  for  the  first  semester  only. 

'  Appointed  for  the  second  semester  only. 


1920-21  Officers  of  Administration  21 

HELEN  SEYMOUR  CLIFTON, 
Head  of  Freeman  House. 

LUCY  DOW  CUSHING,  B.A., 
Head  of  Wilder  HaU. 

CHARLOTTE  MARY  HASSETT, 

Head  of  Clinton  and  Harris  Houses. 

BELLE  MORGAN  WARDWELL,  B.S., 
Head  of  Norumbega  House. 

CARRIE  IRISH, 

Head  of  Stone  Hall. 

ETHEL  ISABELLA  FOSTER, 
Head  of  Fiske  House. 

FLORENCE  IRENE  TUCKER,  B.A., 
Assistant  to  the  Purveyor. 

LEILA  BURT  NYE, 

Manager  of  Post  Office. 

AMY  HARDING  NYE, 

Manager  of  the  Information  Bureau. 


HENRY  HERBERT  AUSTIN,  B.S., 

Superintendent  of  the  College  Plant. 

FREDERICK  DUTTON  WOODS,  B.S., 

Superintendent  of  Grounds. 


22  Standing  Committees  1920-21 


STANDING   COMMITTEES 


Board  or  Admission. — Misses  Bragg,  Perkins,  Walton  (Chairman) 
Young;  the  Dean  ex  officio. 

Committee  on  Graduate  Instruction. — Misses  Hibbard,  Kendrick, 
McDowell,  McKeag  (Chairman),  Miller,  Mr.  Pulling;  the  Dean  ex  officio. 

Library  Committee. — Misses  Roberts  (Chairman),  Allen,  Bushee, 
Jackson,  Merrill;  Mrs.  Hodder;  the  President  and  Librarians  ex  oificio. 

Committee  on  Instruction. — Dean  Waite  (Chairman  ex  oificio), 
Misses  Hart,  Moody,  Shackford,  Clara  Smith,  Snow;  Mrs.  Hodder. 

Committee  on  Academic  Requests. — Dean  Waite  (Chairman  ex 
officio),  Misses  Grace  Davis,  Dutcher,  Edwards,  Fletcher,  French,  Newell. 

Committee  on  Constitutions. — Miss  Conant;  Messrs.  Curtis,  Shef- 
field (Chairman). 

Faculty  Members  in  Senate  oe  College  Government  Asso- 
ciation.— President  Pendleton,  ex  officio;  Misses  Kendrick,  Manwaring, 
Stone.  Tufts. 


1920-21  Foundation  and  Purpose  23 

WELLESLEY  COLLEGE 

Wellesley,  Massachusetts 


FOUNDATION  AND  PURPOSE 

Wellesley  College  was  established  for  the  purpose  of 
furnishing  to  young  women  who  desire  to  obtain  a  Uberal 
education  such  advantages  and  facihties  as  are  enjoyed  in 
institutions  of  the  highest  grade.  The  first  building  of  the 
College,  erected  and  equipped  under  the  supervision  and 
through  the  personal  means  of  the  founder,  was  opened  to 
students  in  1875,  with  the  announced  purpose  "of  giving  to 
young  women  opportunities  for  education  equivalent  to  those 
usually  provided  in  colleges  for  young  men."  Throughout 
bis  work  the  founder  aimed  to  put  into  visible  form  his  ideal 
of  the  higher  education  for  women,  ''the  supreme  develop- 
ment and  unfolding  of  every  power  and  faculty." 

By  the  charter,  granted  by  the  Commonwealth  of  Massa- 
chusetts, "the  corporation  of  Wellesley  College  is  authorized 
to  grant  such  honorary  testimonials,  and  confer  such  honors, 
degrees,  and  diplomas,  as  are  granted  or  conferred  by  any 
University,  College,  or  Seminary  of  learning  in  this  Com- 
monwealth; and  the  diplomas  so  granted  shall  entitle  the 
possessors  to  the  immunities  and  privileges  allowed  by  usage 
or  statute  to  the  possessors  of  like  diplomas  from  any  Uni- 
versity, College,  or  Seminary  of  learning  in  this  Common- 
wealth." 

In  accordance  with  the  spirit  of  the  founder,  the  College  is 
undenominational,  but  distinctively  Christian  in  its  influence, 
discipline,  and  instruction. 

The  members  of  the  College  meet  daily  for  morning  prayers 
in  the  beautiful  chapel  presented  in  1899  by  Miss  Elizabeth 
G.  Houghton  and  Mr.  Clement  S.  Houghton  as  a  memorial  to 
their  father.  Services  on  Sunday  are  conducted  in  this  chapel 
by  preachers  of  different  denominations.  At  all  these  services 
and  at  vespers  on  Sunday,  the  singing  is  led  by  a  trained  choir 
of  students  under  the  direction  of  the  professor  of  music. 

The  Wellesley  College  Christian  Association,  organized  to 
foster  religious  life  and  interest  in  social  reforms  and  in  home 
and  foreign  missions,  meets  weekly  for  prayer  and  religious 
instruction. 

The  department  of  Biblical  Hjstory  affords  the  systematic 
study  of  the  Bible  required  of  all  students. 


24  Admission  1920-21 


ADMISSION 

In  order  to  qualify  for  admission  to  Wellesley  College  an 
applicant  must  be  at  least  sixteen  years  of  age  and  must  present 
satisfactory  evidence  of  her  ability  to  make  good  use  of  the 
opportunities  offered  by  the  College.  This  evidence  must  in- 
clude satisfactory  testimonials  concerning  character,  health,  and 
scholarship. 

AppHcations  for  admission  should  be  made  upon  forms  which 
will  be  furnished  on  request.  An  appUcation  fee  of  $io  is 
required  of  all  applicants  and  no  registration  is  recorded  until 
this  fee  is  received.  (See  page  1 54.)  The  date  of  appUcation 
is  used  as  a  basis  in  assigning  rooms  in  college  houses.  Since 
the  number  of  students  to  be  admitted  is  limited  by  the  capacity 
of  class  rooms,  it  is  necessary  to  close  the  application  hst 
several  years  in  advance.  After  the  regular  list  for  a  given  year 
is  closed,  promising  students  may  be  registered  on  a  waiting 
list.  The  waiting  list  is  on  a  competitive  basis,  that  is,  the 
date  of  appUcation  wiU  not  be  considered  in  admitting  from 
this  list;  the  Board  of  Admission  will  select  the  candidates  who, 
in  their  judgment,  from  the  evidence  submitted,  are  the  best 
qualified  to  profit  by  a  course  of  study  at  Wellesley  CoUege. 


ADMISSION  TO   THE  FRESHMAN  CLASS 

The  normal  coUege  preparatory  course  of  four  years  with  four 
units  each  year,  allows  for  sixteen  units.  For  admission  to  the 
freshman  class,  a  candidate  must  fulfill  the  requirements  in 
fifteen  units  in  subjects  chosen  from  the  Ust  which  foUows. 
The  subjects  prescribed  for  all  students  are  indicated  by  the 
word  "required"  after  the  subject.  A  unit  represents  a  year's 
study  in  any  subject  constituting  approximately  a  quarter  of 
the  full  year's  work  or  120  sixty-minute  hours  'of  classroom 
work,  two  hours  of  laboratory  work  being  equivalent  to  one 
hour  of  classroom  work. 


1920-21  Admission  25 

subjects  accepted  for  admission 

English 3  units    Required  3  units 

Latin      4  units    Required  4  units 

Additional  foreign  Language  .    .  2-4  units    Required  2  units 

Greek 2-3  units 

French 2-4  units 

German 2-4  units 

Spanish 2-3  units 

Italian 2-3  units 

Mathematics 3-4  units 

Algebra 2  units  ^  t^       •     , 

Plane  Geometry i  unit   ) 

*Solid  Geometry >^  unit 

*Trigonometry }^  unit 

History 1-3  units    Required  i  unit 

fAncient        i  unit 

American i  unit 

English I  imit 

Mediaeval  and  Modern      .    .     i  unit 

Modem  European     ....     i  unit 
Science       1-2  units 

Biology I  unit 

Botany     .    .    .    .^ i  unit 

Chemistry i  unit 

Physics I  unit 

Physical  Geography  .    .    .    .     i  unit 

Zoology I  unit 

Harmony i  unit 

Good  students  who  are  candidates  for  admission  by  the  new 
plan  may  be  allowed  a  choice  of  one  of  the  two  elective  units 
from  subjects  not  listed  above,  with  the  consent  of  the  Board 
of  Admission,  provided  the  course  offered  is  of  non-technical 
character. 

With  the  consent  of  the  Board  of  Admission,  the  privilege 
of  some  substitution  within  the  regularly  prescribed  course 
of  study  may  be  extended  to  candidates  whose  preparation  is 
made  under  exceptional  conditions,  so  that  the  ordinary  require- 
ments cannot  be  met. 

The  two  methods  of  admission  are  by  examination  in  all 
subjects  (see  pages  42-44)  and  by  the  New  Plan  (see  pages 
45-47). 

•A  half  unit  of  either  Solid  Geometry  or  Trigonometry  is  not  accepted  unless  a  half  unit 
in  the  other  is  also  presented,  making  one  full  unit  of  Mathematics. 

tAll  students  are  advised  to  offer  Ancient  History  for  admission.  When  two  or  three 
units  of  History  are  offered,  it  is  required  that  one  unit  shall  be  Ancient  History. 


26  Admission  1920-21 

A  place  on  the  list  of  candidates  for  admission  will  not  be 
reserved  for  an  applicant  whose  credentials  filed  in  July  do 
not  satisfactorily  cover  twelve  of  the  fifteen  units  required 
for  admission.  The  Board  of  Admission  require  examination 
in  September  in  all  units  not  satisfactorily  covered,  and 
reserve  the  right  to  exclude  any  candidate  whose  preparation 
is  in  their  judgment  so  defective  as  to  debar  her  from  carrying 
successfully  the  work  of  the  freshman  year. 

Blank  forms  for  the  school  record  and  principal's  recom- 
mendation will  be  sent  for  all  registered  applicants  during  their 
final  year  of  preparation.  Failure  to  file  these  or  other  required 
records  at  the  time  specified  on  the  blanks  may  be  considered 
by  the  Board  of  Admission  as  equivalent  to  cancelling  the 
application. 

A  statement  from  the  applicant's  physician  to  the  effect  that 
she  is  organically  sound  and  in  good  health,  together  with  a 
certificate  of  vaccination  must  be  filed  with  the  Secretary  to 
the  Board  of  Admission  before  June  first  of  the  year  in  which 
admission  is  sought.  Blank  forms  for  these  health  reports 
will  be  sent  to  each  registered  applicant  in  the  spring  previous 
to  her  proposed  entrance.  Before  a  candidate  is  formally 
accepted  she  is  given  a  thorough  physical  examination.  The 
College  reserves  the  right  to  reject  any  candidate  if  the  results 
of  this  examination  in  the  opinion  of  the  medical  staff  justify 
such  action  or  to  accept  the  candidate  only  on  the  understand- 
ing that  she  will  take  five  years  to  complete  the  course. 

The  student  who  has  met  all  entrance  requirements  is 
qualified  for  immediate  matriculation  for  the  Baccalaureate 
degree  m  Arts. 

All  communications  concerning  admission  should  be  addressed 
to  the  Secretary  to  the  Board  of  Admission,  Wellesley  College, 
Wellesley,  Mass. 

DEFINITION  OF  REQUIREMENTS 

The  number  enclosed  in  parentheses  following  the  subject  indicates  the 
number  of  units  assigned  to  that  subject;  that  is,  the  number  of  years  with 
five  recitations  a  week  which  will  normally  be  required  in  the  secondary 
school  for  adequate  preparation  in  the  subject. 

ENGLISH  (3) 

The  study  of  English  in  school  has  two  main  objects:  (i) 
command  of  correct  and  clear  English,  spoken  and  written; 


1920-21  Admission  27 

(2)  ability  to  read  with  accuracy,  intelligence,  and  apprecia- 
tion, and  the  development  of  the  habit  of  reading  good  Utera- 
ture  with  enjoyment. 

Qrammar  and  Composition. 

The  first  object  requires  instruction  in  grammar  and  compo- 
sition. English  grammar  should  ordinarily  be  reviewed  in  the 
secondary  school;  and  correct  spelling  and  grammatical  accu- 
racy should  be  rigorously  exacted  in  connection  with  all  written 
work  during  the  four  years.  The  principles  of  English  com- 
position governing  punctuation,  the  use  of  words,  sentences, 
and  paragraphs  should  be  thoroughly  mastered;  and  practice 
in  composition,  oral  as  well  as  written,  should  extend  throughout 
the  secondary  school  period.  Written  exercises  may  well  com- 
prise letter-writing,  narration,  description,  and  easy  exposition 
and  argument.  It  is  advisable  that  subjects  for  this  work  be 
taken  from  the  student's  personal  experience,  general  knowledge, 
and  studies  other  than  EngUsh,  as  well  as  from  her  reading  in 
literature.  Finally,  special  instruction  in  language  and  com- 
position should  be  accompanied  by  concerted  effort  of  teachers 
in  all  branches  to  cultivate  in  the  student  the  habit  of  using 
good  English  in  her  recitations  and  various  exercises,  whether 
oral  or  written. 

To  meet  the  requirement  in  Composition,  there  should  be  practice  in 
writing  equivalent  to  weekly  themes  the  first  two  years,  and  fortnightly 
themes  the  last  two  years  of  the  preparatory  course.  Themes  should  be 
accompanied  by  simple  outlines.  The  following  books  are  suggested: 
Scott  and  Denney's  Composition — Rhetoric;  Neal's  Thought  Building  in 
Composition;  Robins  and  Perkins's  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Rhetoric 
supplemented  by  Herrick  and  Damon's  Composition  and  Rhetoric;  Shack- 
ford  and  Judson's  Composition — Rhetoric — Literature;  Manly  and  Rickert's 
The  Writing  of  English. 

Literature. 

The  second  object  is  sought  by  means  of  the  reading  and 
study  of  a  number  of  books,  from  which  may  be  framed  a  pro- 
gressive course  in  literature  covering  four  years.  The  student 
should  be  trained  in  reading  aloud  and  be  encouraged  to 
commit  to  memory  notable  passages  both  in  verse  and 
in  prose.  As  an  aid  to  Hterary  appreciation,  she  is  further 
advised  to  acquaint  herself  with  the  most  important  facts 
in  the  lives  of  the  authors  whose  works  she  reads  and  with 
their  place  in  literary  history.    A  few  of  these  books  should  be 


28  Admission  1920-21 

read  with  special  care,  greater  stress  being  laid  upon  form  and 
style,  the  exact  meaning  of  words  and  phrases,  and  the  under- 
standing of  allusions. 

A.  Reading. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  foster  in  the  student  the  habit  of  intelligent 
reading  and  to  develop  a  taste  for  good  literature,  by  giving  her  a  first- 
hand knowledge  of  some  of  its  best  specimens.  She  should  read  the  books 
carefully,  but  her  attention  should  not  be  so  fixed  upon  details  that  she  fails 
to  appreciate  the  main  purpose  and  charm  of  what  she  reads. 

Suggestions  for  books  to  be  read  b}^  students  who  intend  to  take  the  com- 
prehensive examination  include  the  following  list  with  some  additions. 
Knowledge  of  the  subject-matter  of  particular  books  is  not  necessary  for 
this  type  of  examination,  but  the  requisite  abihty  cannot  be  gained  without 
a  systematic  and  progressive  study  of  good  Hterature. 

With  a  view  to  some  freedom  of  choice,  the  books  provided  for  reading 
are  arranged  in  the  following  groups,  from  each  of  which  at  least  two  selec- 
tions are  to  be  made,  except  that  for  any  book  in  Group  I  a  book  from 
any  other  may  be  substituted. 

Group  I.  Classics  in  Translation.  The  Old  Testament,  at  least  the  chief 
narrative  episodes  in  Genesis,  Exodus,  Joshua,  Judges,  Samuel,  Kings,  and 
Daniel,  together  with  the  books  of  Ruth  and  Esther;  the  Odyssey,  with 
the  omission,  if  desired,  of  Books  I-V,  XV,  and  XVI;  the  jEneid;  the  Odys^ 
sey  and  the  Mneid  should  be  read  in  English  translations  of  recognized  Uter- 
ary  excellence. 

Group  II.  Drama.  Shakespeare:  Merchant  of  Venice,  As  You  Like  It, 
Julius  Ccesar. 

Group  III.  Prose  Fiction.  Dickens:  A  Tale  of  Two  Cities;  George 
Eliot:  Silas  Mar ner;  Scott:  Quentin  Durward;  Hawthorne:  The  House  of 
the  Seven  Gables. 

Group  IV.  Essays,  Biography,  etc.  Addison  and  Steele:  The  Sir 
Roger  de  Coverley  Papers;  Irving:  The  Sketch  Book — selections  covering 
about  175  pages;  Macaulay:  Lord  Clive;  Parkman:   The  Oregon  Trail. 

Group  V.  Poetry.  Tennyson:  The  Coming  of  Arthur,  Gar eth  and  Lyn- 
ette,  Lancelot  and  Elaine,  The  Passing  of  Arthur;  Browning:  Cavalier  Tunes, 
The  Lost  Leader,  How  they  Brought  the  Good  News  from  Ghent  to  Aix,  Home 
Thoughts  from  Abroad,  Home  Thoughts  from  the  Sea,  Iticident  of  the  French 
Camp,  Herve  Riel,  Pheidippides,  My  Last  Duchess,  Up  at  a  Villa — Down 
in  the  City,  The  Italian  in  England,  The  Patriot,  Tlie  Pied  Piper,  ^^De  Gusti- 
bus" — ,  Instans  Tyrannus;  Scott:  The  Lady  of  the  Lake;  Coleridge:  The 
Ancient  Mariner;  Arnold:  Sohrab  and  Rustum. 

B.  Study. 

This  part  of  the  requirement  is  intended  as  a  natural  and  logical  contin- 
uation of  the  student's  earlier  reading,  with  greater  stress  laid  upon  form 
and  style,  the  exact  meaning  of  words  and  phrases,  and  the  understanding 


1920-21  Admission  29 

of  allusions.  The  books  provided  for  study  are  arranged  in  four  groups, 
from  each  of  which  one  selection  is  to  be  made. 

Group  I.    Drama.     Shakespeare:  Macbeth,  or  Hamlet. 

Group  II.  Poetry.  Milton:  V Allegro,  II  Penseroso,  Comtis;  Book  IV 
of  Palgrave's  Golden  Treasury  (First  Series),  with  special  attention  to  Words- 
worth, Keats,  and  Shelley. 

Group  III.  Oratory.  Burke:  Speech  on  Conciliation  with  America; 
Washington's  Farewell  Address;  Webster's  First  Bunker  Hill  Oration; 
Lincoln's  Gettysburg  A  ddress. 

Group  IV.  Essays.  Macaulay:  Life  of  Johnson;  Carlyle:  Essay  on 
Burns,  with  a  brief  selection  from  Burns's  Poems. 

HISTORY   (1,2  or  3) 
Prescribed  Unit 

A  full  year  course  in  one  of  the  following  subjects: — 
(i)  Ancient  History,  including  a  brief  introductory  study 
of  the  earlier  nations,  but  with  special  emphasis  on  Greek 
History  to  the  death  of  Alexander,  and  on  Roman  History  to 
the  death  of  Charlemagne. 

(2)  English  History,  with  due  regard  to  social  and  political 
development. 

(3)  American  History,  with  the  elements  of  Civil  Government. 

(4)  Mediaeval  and  Modern  History. 

(5)  Modern  European  History. 

Candidates  are  advised  to  offer  the  course  in  Ancient  History 
as  a  part  of  their  preparation. 

In  the  subject  chosen,  the  student  should  acquire  accurate  knowledge 
of  the  history  as  presented  in  a  standard  text-book  of  not  less  than  300 
pages,  and  should  read  such  fuller  authorities  as  may  be  available,  in  amount 
not  less  than  500  pages.  Some  practice  in  drawing  maps  to  illustrate  ter- 
ritorial changes,  in  making  digests  of  lectures  and  reading,  and  in  preparing 
verbal  or  written  reports  on  subjects  assigned  for  individual  investigation 
is  essential  to  successful  work.  For  further  suggestions  about  preparation 
students  are  referred  to  Document  96  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination 
Board. 

Elective  Units 

A  candidate  may  offer  one  or  two  of  the  five  subjects  men- 
tioned above  as  additional  units  in  History,  provided  that  one 
of  the  units  offered  is  Ancient  History. 

MATHEMATICS  (3  or  4) 

Algebra. — Factors,  Common  Divisors  and  Multiples,  Ratio 
and  Proportion,  Theory  of  Exponents  including  Imaginaries, 


30  Admission  1920-21 

Radicals  and  Equations  involving  Radicals,  Inequalities,  Quad- 
ratic Equations  (including  the  theory),  Binomial  Theorem, 
Arithmetic  and  Geometric  Progressions,  Graphical  Methods. 

Plane  Geometry. — As  found  in  Chauvenet,  or  its  equivalent. 

Deficiency  in  preparation  usually  results  from  one  or  more  of  the  following 
causes:  the  use  of  text-books  which  are  too  elementary,  insufficient  time 
spent  in  preparation,  neglect  of  exercises  in  original  demonstration  in 
Geometry,  and  of  reviews  in  both  Algebra  and  Geometry.  It  is  strongly 
urged  that  there  be  constant  exercise  in  original  demonstration  in  Geometry, 
with  frequent  written  examinations  in  both  Algebra  and  Geometry,  the  prob- 
lems proposed  being  drawn  from  other  sources  than  the  text-books. 

Solid  Geometry  and  Trigonometry. — The  requirement  is 
met  by  the  courses  outlined  in  the  report  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board,  Document  96.  A  half  unit  of  either 
subject  without  the  other  may  not  be  counted  for  admission. 

LATIN  (4) 

Candidates  should  be  familiar  with  the  forms  and  sjmtax 
of  the  language  and  possess  a  vocabulary  sufficient  to  trans- 
late Latin  into  idiomatic  EngHsh  and  EngHsh  into  correct 
Latin.  They  should  also  be  able  to  translate  at  sight  Latin 
prose  and  poetry  of  moderate  difficulty  and  to  read  Latin  prose 
and  verse  according  to  the  Roman  method  of  pronunciation 
with  strict  attention  to  vowel  quantities.  To  attain  such  pro- 
ficiency not  less  than  five  forty-minute  periods  a  week  for  four 
years  should  be  given  to  the  study  of  Latin.  The  amount  of 
prepared  reading  should  not  be  less  than  four  books  of  Caesar's 
Gallic  War,  seven  Orations  of  Cicero  (counting  the  Manihan 
Law  as  two)  and  six  books  of  Vergil's  iEneid.  The  reading  may 
be  selected  from  other  works  of  the  authors  named  above  or 
from  other  suitable  authors,  but  must  include  the  pro  Archia 
and  two  other  Orations  of  Cicero  and  two  books  of  the  ^neid. 

It  is  of  special  importance  that  practice  in  writing  easy 
Latin  at  sight  should  be  continued  throughout  the  entire  period 
of  preparation  in  connection  with  the  reading  of  the  Latin  au- 
thors. In  the  last  year  special  attention  should  be  given  to 
translating  continuous  EngHsh  into  Latin  both  in  the  prepared 
and  sight  work. 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation 

Exercises  in  translation  at  sight  should  begin  in  school  with  the  first 
lessons  in  which  Latin  sentences  of  any  length  occur,  and  should  continue 
throughout  the  course  with  sufficient  frequency  to  insure  correct  methods 


1920-21  Admission  31 

lZZ\T  •"''  "l'"/  the  student.    From  the  outset  particular  attention 
should  be  given  to  deyelopmg  the  ability  to  take  in  the  meaning  of  each 
word-and  so    graduaUy,  of  the  whole  sentence-just  as  it  stands-    the 
sentence  should  be  read  and  understood  in  the  order  of  the  o^na  '  w  th 
fuU  appreciation  of  the  force  of  each  word  as  it  comes,  so  far  as  fhlcan  be 
known  or  mferred  from  that  which  has  preceded,  and  from  the  form  and 
the  position  of  the  word  itself.    The  habit  of  reading  in  this  way   Sd  be 
encouraged  and  cultivated  as  the  best  preparation  for  all  the  trlnslaUng 
that  the  student  has  to  do.    No  translation,  however,  should  be  a  mechanf 
inl  of'ftf    '''•    '^°'  ?°""  "  ^'  ^  ■""= '°»«  parapllrase.    The  fuTmTn 
Zl  finirr^'  '°  be  translated,  gathered  hi  the  way  described  aZe 
should  finaUy  be  expressed  m  clear  and  natural  English 
A  written  e.^mmation  cannot  test  the  ear  or  tongue,  but  proper  instruc 
hlT  ""y.'^r"^''  r"  °"^^^'"y  '"^'"de  the  traLmg  of  both     Th 
from  d,Tr  "^  ^"J"'  '^'f'!'''  '^""^^  '"''"de  much  reading  aloud;  writl 
rom  dictation  and  translation  from  the  teacher's  reading.    Learn  nlu"^ 
able  passages  by  heart  is  also  verj-  useful,  and  should  be  more  praS 

of  The  Utin  IhTd'-'""  ^t""'  «""  "'^  ='"^»'  '  ''^«"  undersunding 
Uie  Latin  she  is  readmg  at  the  tmie,  and  greater  facility  in  reading. 

For  a  hst  of  the  te.xts  on  which  the  ordinary  examinations  of  the  Col- 
ege  Examination  Board  will  be  based  in  1921-1922,  students  are  re 
ferred  to  Document  96  of  the  College  Entrance  E.xamination  Bolrd 

The  teachers  of  Latin  in  the  preparatory  schools  are  urged  to 
insist  upon  the  use  of  good  English  in  translation.  ^ 

whoDlan  M^.W.    '"''  i^strongIy  recommended  to  candidates 
wno  plan  to  elect  courses  m  Latin  in  college 

Ability  to  read  at  sight  easy  French  or  German  prose  is  of 
great  advantage  to  aU  classical  students. 

GREEK  (2  or  3) 
2  Unit  Requirement 

.r^^'^'TV^^  ^''^''  ^^^''  ^^^  '^"^^^t  should  acquire  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  language  sufficient  to  enable  her 

(ij  To  translate  at  sight  simple  passages  of  Attic  prose  and 
to  answer  questions  on  ordinary  forms  and  constructions 

{2)  lo  translate  mto  Greek  a  passage  of  connected  EnMic^li 
narrative,  based  on  Xenophon.  ^onnectea  ii^nglish 

'iu\^^?  ^^^^  ^^'^^^  ^^^^^   ^th  correct  pronunciation   and 
with  fuU  expression  of  the  sense  of  the  passage. 

PRESCRIBED   STUDY 

(i)  Grammar:  Inflections;  simpler  rules  for  composition  and 
derivation  of  words:   use  of  cases;   construction  of  sciences 

^)^Prn.?r'  ''^"v  '°  '^^  "^^  ^°^  «^^°'"g^  of  the  moods     ' 
(2)  Prose  Composition:  Regular  practice  in  writmg  or  speak- 


32  Admission  1920-21 

ing  Greek,  with  at  least  twenty  written  exercises,  including  some 
connected  passages. 

(3)  Three  books  of  Xenophon's  Anabasis,  or  its  equivalent. 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation 

The  acquiring  of  a  good  working  vocabulary  should  begin  with  the  first 
lesson,  and  constant  practice  in  the  use  of  the  more  common  words  should 
be  kept  up  throughout  the  course.  The  students  should  learn  to  recognize 
the  words  by  hearing  as  well  as  by  sight,  and  should  be  able  to  use  them  in 
speech  as  well  as  in  writing. 

Writing  Greek  from  dictation,  learning  short  passages  by  heart,  and  put- 
ting simple  Enghsh  sentences  into  Greek  orally,  or  answering  in  Greek  simple 
questions  asked  in  Greek  serve  not  only  to  fix  vocabulary  and  forms  in 
the  students'  mind,  but  also  to  give  them  a  feehng  for  the  natural  Greek 
form  of  expression. 

3  Unit  Requirement 

In  addition  to  the  preparation  for  the  2  unit  requirement 
stated  above,  the  student  must  be  able  to  translate  at  sight  a 
passage  from  Homer,  to  read  it  with  a  correct  expression  of  the 
rhythm,  and  to  answer  a  few  questions  on  the  Homeric  forms 
and  on  the  subject-matter. 

PRESCRIBED   STUDY 

Three  books  of  Homer's  Ihad. 

Prose  Composition:  Continued  practice  in  translation  into 
Attic  prose  of  connected  passages  of  English. 

FRENCH  (2,  3  or  4) 

The  requirements  follow  the  recommendations  of  the  Modern 
Language  Association  embodied  in  Document  96  of  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board. 

See  page  34  for  suggestions  concerning  preparation  in  the 
case  of  students  expecting  to  enter  Wellesley  College. 

2  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  "A,  Elementary,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Exam- 
ination Board.) 

THE   AIM   OF  THE  INSTRUCTION 

At  the  end  of  the  elementary  course  the  pupil  should  be  able 
to  pronounce  French  accurately,  to  read  at  sight  easy  French 
prose,  to  put  into  French  simple  English  sentences  taken  from 
the  language  of  everyday  life  or  based  upon  a  portion  of  the 
French  text  read,  and  to  answer  questions  on  the  rudiments  of 
the  grammar  as  defined  below. 


1920-21  Admission  33 

THE  WORK   TO   BE   DONE 

During  the  first  year  the  work  should  comprise: — 
(i)  Careful  drill  in  pronunciation. 

(2)  The  rudiments  of  grammar,  including  the  inflection  of 
the  regular  and  the  more  common  irregular  verbs,  the  plural 
nouns,  the  inflection  of  adjectives,  participles,  and  pronouns; 
the  use  of  personal  pronouns,  common  adverbs,  prepositions, 
and  conjunctions;  the  order  of  words  in  the  sentence,  and  the 
elementary  rules  of  syntax. 

(3)  Abundant  easy  exercises,  designed  not  only  to  fix  in  the 
memory  the  forms  and  principles  of  grammar,  but  also  to  culti- 
vate readiness  in  the  reproduction  of  natural  forms  of  expression. 

(4)  The  reading  of  from  100  to  175  duodecimo  pages  of  gradu- 
ated texts,  with  constant  practice  in  translating  into  French 
easy  variations  of  the  sentences  read  (the  teacher  giving  the 
EngHsh)  and  in  reproducing  from  memory  sentences  previously 
read. 

(5)  Writing  French  from  dictation. 

During  the  second  year  the  w^ork  should  comprise: — 

(i)  The  reading  of  from  250  to  400  pages  of  easy  modern 

prose  in  the  form  of  stories,  plays,  or  historical  or  biographical 

sketches. 

(2)  Constant  practice,  as  in  the  previous  year,  in  translating 
into  French  easy  variations  upon  the  texts  read. 

(3)  Frequent  abstracts,  sometimes  oral  and  sometimes 
written,  of  portions  of  the  text  already  read. 

(4)  Writing  French  from  dictation. 

(5)  Continued  drill  upon  the  rudiments  of  grammar,  with 
constant  application  in  the  construction  of  sentences. 

(6)  Mastery  of  the  forms  and  use  of  pronouns,  pronominal 
adjectives,  of  all  but  the  rare  irregular  verb  forms,  and  of  the 
simpler  uses  of  the  conditional  and  subjunctive. 

3  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  "B,  Intermediate,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Exam- 
ination Board.) 

THE   AIM  OF  THE  INSTRUCTION 

At  the  end  of  the  intermediate  course  the  pupil  should  be 
able  to  read  at  sight  ordinary  French  prose  or  simple  poetry, 
to  translate  into  French  a  connected  passage  of  English  based 
on  the  text  read,  and  to  answer  questions  involving  a  more 
thorough  knowledge  of  syntax  than  is  expected  in  the  elemen- 
tary course. 


34  Admission  1920-21 

TELE  WORK   TO  BE  DONE 

This  should  comprise  the  reading  of  from  400  to  600  pages* 
of  French  of  ordinary  difficulty,  a  portion  to  be  m  the  dramatic 
formj;  constant  practice  in  giving  French  paraphrases,  ab- 
stracts or  reproductions  from  memory  of  selected  portions  of 
the  matter  read;  the  study  of  a  grammar  of  moderate  com- 
pleteness; writing  from  dictation.! 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation  for  the  2  and  3  Unit  Requirements 

1.  Emphasis  should  be  laid  on  the  correct  daily  use  of  the  spoken  lan- 
guage in  the  class  room,  on  the  correct  and  intelligent  reading  of  French 
(apart  from  translation)  and  on  direct  composition,  including  the  writing 
of  short  themes  in  French. 

2.  From  the  outset  particular  attention  should  be  given  to  developing 
the  ability  to  take  in  the  meaning  of  each  word — and  so,  gradually,  of  the 
whole  sentence — just  as  it  stands;  the  sentence  should  be  read  and  under- 
stood in  the  order  of  the  original,  with  full  appreciation  of  the  force  of  each 
word  as  it  comes,  so  far  as  this  can  be  known  or  inferred  from  that  which 
has  preceded,  and  from  the  form  and  the  position  of  the  word  itself.  The 
habit  of  reading  in  this  way  should  be  encouraged  and  cultivated  as  the 
best  preparation  for  all  the  work  that  the  student  has  to  do. 

3.  It  is  particularly  urged  that  the  readmg  be  chosen  from  nineteenth 
century  writers,  of  prose,  verse,  and  drama,  and  if  possible  from  more  than 
five  authors. 

The  texts  suggested  are: — 

(i)  For  the  2  unit  requirement:  Laboulaye:  Contes  hleus;  Daudet: 
Trois  Contes  Choisis;  France:  Abeille;  Malot:  Sans  Faniille;  de  la  Brete: 
Mon  Oncle  et  Mon  Cure;  Enault:  Le  Chien  du  Capitaine;  Legouve  et 
Labiche:  La  Cigale  chez  les  Fourmis;  Daudet:  Choix  d'Extraits,  or  Le 
Petit  Chose;  Vigny:  La  Canne  de  Jonc;  Augier:  Le  Gendre  de  M.  Poirier; 
Foncin:  Le  Pays  de  France,  or  Lavisse:  Histoire  de  Fratice,  11^  annSe 
(Armand  Colin,  Paris). 

(2)  For  the  3  unit  requirement:  Lamartine:  Scenes  de  la  Revolution 
franqaise;  Maupassant:  Huit  Contes  Choisis;  About:  Le  Roi  des  Montagues; 
Balzac:  Le  CurS  de  Tours;  Colin:  Contes  et  Saynetes;  Colui:  Advanced 
Sight  Translation;  Sandeau:  Mile,  de  la  Seigliere;  Scribe  et  Legouv6: 
Bataille  de  Dames. 

4  Unit  Requirement 

For  suggestions  concerning  preparation  for  the  four  unit 
requirement,  students  are  referred  to  Document  96  of  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board. 

*  i.  e.,  In  addition  to  the  2  unit  requirement. 

t  A  part  of  this  may  be  critical  reading,  a  part  rapid  or  outside  reading, 

t  From  texts  not  previously  memorized. 


1920-21  Admission  35 

GERMAN  (2,  3  or  4) 

The  requirements  follow  the  recommendations  of  the  Modern 
Language  Association  embodied  in  Document  96  of  the  Col- 
lege Entrance  Examination  Board. 

See  page  36  for  suggestions  concerning  preparation  in  the 
case  of  students  expecting  to  enter  Vi^ellesley  College. 

2  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  "A,  Elementary,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Exami- 
nation Board.) 

During  the  first  year  the  work  should  comprise: — 
(i)  Careful  drill  upon  pronunciation. 

(2)  The  memorizing  and  frequent  repetition  of  easy  colloquial 
sentences. 

(3)  Drill  upon  the  rudiments  of  grammar,  that  is,  upon  the 
inflection  of  the  articles,  of  such  nouns  as  belong  to  the  language 
of  everyday  life,  of  adjectives,  pronouns,  weak  verbs,  and  the 
more  usual  strong  verbs,  also  upon  the  use  of  the  more  common 
prepositions,  the  simpler  uses  of  the  modal  auxiliaries,  and  the 
elementary  rules  of  syntax  and  word  order. 

(4)  Abundant  easy  exercises  designed  not  only  to  fix  in  mind 
the  forms  and  principles  of  grammar,  but  also  to  cultivate 
readiness  in  the  reproduction  of  natural  forms  of  expression. 

(5)  The  reading  of  from  75  to  100  pages*  of  graduated  texts 
from  a  reader,  with  constant  practice  in  translating  into  Ger- 
man easy  variations  upon  sentences  selected  from  the  reading 
lesson  (the  teacher  giving  the  English),  and  in  the  reproduction 
from  memory  of  sentences  previously  read. 

During  the  second  year  the  work  should  comprise : — 
(i)  The  reading  of  from  150  to  200  pages*  of  literature  in  the 
form  of  easy  stories  and  plays. 

(2)  Accompanying  practice,  as  before,  in  the  translation  into 
German  of  easy  variations  upon  the  texts  read  and  also  in  the 
off-hand  reproduction,  sometimes  orally  and  sometimes  in 
writing;  of  the  substance  of  short  and  easy  selected  passages. 

(3)  Continued  drill  upon  the  rudiments  of  the  grammar, 
directed  to  the  ends  of  enabling  the  pupil,  first,  to  use  her 
knowledge  with  facility  in  the  formation  of  sentences,  and, 
secondly,  to  state  her  knowledge  correctly  in  the  technical 
language  of  grammar. 

*See  "Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation,"  on  page  36. 


36  Admission  1920-21 

3  Unit  Requirement 

(Termed  ''^,  Intermediate,"  by  the  College  Entrance  Ex- 
amination Board.) 

THE  WORK   TO   BE   DONE 

The  work  should  comprise  in  addition  to  the  elementary 
course t,  the  reading  of  about  400  pages*  of  moderately  difficult 
prose  and  poetry,  with  constant  practice  in  giving,  sometimes 
orally  and  sometimes  in  writing,  paraphrases,  abstracts,  or 
reproductions  from  memory  of  selected  portions  of  the  text 
read;  also  gram.matical  drill  upon  the  less  usual  strong  verbs, 
the  use  of  articles,  cases,  auxiliaries  of  all  kinds,  tenses  and 
modes  (with  special  reference  to  the  infinitive  and  subjunctive) , 
and  likewise  upon  word-order  and  word-formation. 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation  for  the  2  and  3  Unit 
Requirements 

1.  The  books  selected  for  class  study  should  be  thoroughly  German  in 
character  and  content.  Intensive  work  on  a  comparatively  small  number 
of  pages  is  preferred  to  a  more  superficial  study  of  a  larger  number  of  pages. 

For  the  2  unit  requirement  the  number  of  pages  read  in  class  should, 
in  general,  not  exceed  300;  but  in  no  case  should  the  amount  be  less  than 
225  pages.  Not  more  than  100  of  these  pages  should  be  taken  from  readers 
arranged  especially  for  beginners. 

For  the  3  unit  requirement  not  more  than  600  pages  in  all  (7*.  e.,  300  in 
addition  to  the  maximum  amount  for  the  2  unit  requirement)  should,  in 
general,  be  read;  but  never  less  than  500  pages.  Not  more  than  one  work 
of  the  classical  period  of  German  Literature  should  be  included.  Besides 
this  intensive  reading,  some  rapid  home  reading  of  easier  texts  (100  pages  or 
more)  is  strongly  urged. 

2.  The  results  desired  can  not  be  obtained  if  a  considerable  portion  of 
the  time  is  spent  on  translation  from  German  into  English,  or  vice  versa. 

3.  Features  that  should  not  be  neglected  are: — 

a.  Vocabulary. — The  careful  study  of  a  goodly  number  of  common 
words  and  expressions  drawn  chiefly  from  the  texts  read. 

b.  Frequent  practice  in  the  oral  and  written  use  of  the  language  without 
the  medium  of  English.  This  should  consist  partly  in  answering  in  German 
questions  put  in  German,  based  on  all  the  texts  read  intensively  in  class, 
partly  in  reproducing  in  German,  without  the  aid  of  questions,  the  contents 
of  these  texts  (Freie  Reproduktion). 

4  Unit  Requirement 

For  suggestions  concerning  preparation  for  the  four  unit 
requirement,  students  are  referred  to  Document  96  of  the  Col- 
lege Entrance  Examination  Board. 

t  That  is,  the  2  unit  requirement. 

*  See  "Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation,"  on  page  ^6. 


1920-21  Admission  37 

SPANISH  (2  or  3) 

The  requirements  follow  the  recommendations  of  the  Modern 
Language  Association  embodied  in  Document  96  of  the  Col- 
lege Entrance  Examination  Board. 

See  page  38  for  suggestions  concerning  preparation  in  the  case 
of  students  expecting  to  enter  Wellesley  College. 

THE   AIM   OF   THE  INSTRUCTION 

At  the  end  of  the  elementary  course  the  pupil  should  be  able 
to  pronounce  Spanish  accurately,  to  read  at  sight  easy  Spanish 
prose,  to  put  into  Spanish  simple  EngHsh  sentences  taken  from 
the  language  of  everyday  Hfe  or  based  upon  a  portion  of  the 
Spanish  text  read,  and  to  answer  questions  on  the  rudiments 
of  the  grammar,  as  indicated  below. 

2  Unit  Requirement 

THE  WORK   TO   BE  DONE 

During  the  first  year  the  work  should  comprise: 
(i)  Careful  drill  in  pronunciation. 

(2)  The  rudiments  of  grammar,  including  the  conjugation  of 
the  regular  and  the  more  common  irregular  verbs,  the  inflection 
of  nouns,  adjectives  and  pronouns  and  the  elementary  rules  of 
syntax. 

(3)  Exercises  containing  illustrations  of  the  principles  of 
grammar. 

(4)  The  careful  reading  and  accurate  rendering  into  good 
English  of  about  100  pages  of  easy  prose  and  verse,  with  trans- 
lation into  Spanish  of  easy  variations  of  the  sentences  read. 

(5)  Writing  Spanish  from  dictation. 

During  the  second  year  the  work  should  comprise: 
(i)  The  reading  of  about  200  pages  of  prose  and  verse. 

(2)  Practice  in  translating  Spanish  into  EngHsh,  and  English 
variations  of  the  text  into  Spanish. 

(3)  Continued  study  of  the  elements  of  grammar  and  S3nitax. 

(4)  Mastery  of  all  but  the  rare  irregular  verb  forms  and  of  the 
simpler  uses  of  the  m^odes  and  tenses. 

(5)  Writing  Spanish  from  dictation. 

(6)  Memorizing  of  easy  short  poems. 

The  emphasis  should  be  placed  on  careful,  thorough  work  with 
much  repetition  rather  than  upon  rapid  reading. 


38  Admission  1920-21 

Suggestions  Concerning  Preparation 

1.  Grammar.  In  addition  to  the  verb  drill,  the  following  points  should 
be  emphasized:  difference  between  ser  and  estar;  use  and  position  of  pro- 
nouns; prepositions  required  with  different  verbs  and  adjectives;  use  of 
subjunctive  and  infinitive. 

2.  In  reading,  two  ideas  should  be  kept  in  mind:  (a)  accurate  translation 
especially  of  idiomatic  expressions:  (6)  a  gradual  development  of  the  power 
to  think  in  Spanish,  by  requiring  the  student  to  explam  the  meaning  of 
words  and  phrases  in  Spanish  and  give  variations  of  text  also  in  Spanish. 

3.  From  the  beginning  the  student  should  gradually  become  accustomed 
to  the  use  of  the  spoken  language  in  the  class  room,  training  the  ear  by 
means  of  short  talks  on  different  subjects  given  by  the  teacher  and  the 
tongue  by  the  different  methods  already  suggested.  Original  work  in 
composition  should  also  be  required. 

The  texts  suggested  are: — 

A  collection  of  easy  short  stories  and  lyrics  carefully  graded;  Perez 
Escrich,  Fortuna;  Ramos  Carrion  y  Vital  Aza,  ZaragUeta;  Tres  Comedias 
Modernas;  Pedro  de  Alarc6n,  El  Capitdn  Veneno;  Juan  Valera,  El  pdjaro 
verde;  Palacio  Valdes,  Jose;  Jose  Selgas,  La  mariposa  hlanca;  Carolina 
Marcial  Dorado,  Espafta  Pintoresca;  the  selected  short  stories  of  Pedro  de 
Alarc6n  or  Antonio  de  Trueba. 

3  Unit  Requirement 

This  work  should  be  a  continuation  of  the  elementary  work, 
with  certain  added  features,  such  as  (i)  conversation  and  in 
general  much  expression  in  spoken  Spanish  of  connected  ideas 
and  (2)  the  translation  of  connected  EngUsh  prose  into  Spanish. 
There  should  be  continued  review  of  the  grammatical  rules  vv^ith 
particular  attention  to  the  verb  system  and  to  saUent  facts  of 
syntax. 

Books:  A  grammar;  a  composition-book;  about  300  pages  of  inter- 
mediate texts  which  may  be  selected  from  the  following:  Perez  Galdos, 
Marianela  or  Dna  Perfeda;  Selgas,  La  mariposa  hlanca;  Palacio  Valdes, 
La  hermana  San  Siilpicio;  Isla's  version  of  the  Gil  Bias;  a  collection  of 
essays  dealing  with  Spanish  or  Spanish-x\merican  life  and  customs;  Mora  tin, 
El  si  de  las  niilas;  Larra,  Partir  a  tiempo;  plays  of  the  Alvarez  Quintero 
brothers;    plays  of  Benevente. 

ITALIAN  (2) 

The  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  makes  no  recom- 
mendations regarding  ItaHan,  but  the  requirements  are  along 
the  hues  of  those  for  French  (2)  and  Spanish  (2)  as  stated  in 
Document  96. 

AIM    OF   THE   INSTRUCTION 

At  the  end  of  the  first  year's  work,  the  pupil  should  be  able 
to  read  simple  ItaUan,  translate  from  Italian  into  English;  ask 


1920-21  Admission  39 

and  answer  simple  questions  involving  the  prime  necessities  of 
life;  write  simple  notes  or  statements. 

The  second  year  should  be  a  development  of  the  first,  stress 
to  be  laid  on  composition  and  conversation. 

THE   WORK   TO    BE   DONE 

During  the  first  >'ear  the  work  should  comprise : 
(i)  The  rudiments  of  grammar  including  the  inflection  of  the 
regular  and  more  common  irregular  verbs;  the  inflection  of 
nouns,  adjectives,  participles  and  pronouns;  the  use  of  pronouns, 
adverbs,  prepositions,  and  conjunctions  and  the  elementary 
rules  of  syntax. 

(2)  Written  and  oral  exercises  involving  rules  of  grammar 
and  forms  of  expression. 

(3)  Careful  drill  in  pronunciation. 

(4)  Careful  reading  and  accurate  rendering  of  from  100-150 
duodecimo  pages  of  graduated  text. 

(5)  Memorizing  from  100-150  lines  of  poetry  with  special 
attention  to  pronunciation. 

(6)  Writing  ItaHan  from  dictation. 

During  the  second  year  the  work  should  comprise: 

(i)  More  advanced  grammar  work  with  special  stress  on  the 

irregular  verb,  the  subjunctive  mood,  uses  of  tenses,  and  of  the 

conjunctive  pronouns. 

(2)  Reading  of  from  250-350  pages  of  modern  prose — fiction, 
plays  or  historical  and  biographical  sketches. 

(3)  Compositions  (15-20),  translations  and  abstracts  with 
constant  application  of  rules  of  grammar. 

(4)  Memorizing  150-200  lines  of  poetry. 

(5)  Writing  from  dictation. 

(6)  Verbal  reports  on  reading  or  assigned  subjects. 

Suggestions  Regarding  Preparation 

1.  Grammar.  Besides  the  verb  drill  the  following  points  should  be 
emphasized:  uses  of  tenses,  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  and  of  conjunctive 
pronouns. 

2.  The  reading  should  be  selected  with  the  view  of  giving  the  pupil  an 
insight  into  Italian  Hfe,  at  the  same  time  training  in  accurate  pronunciation 
and  translation. 

3.  The  student  should  be  accustomed  to  the  ordinary  spoken  language 
of  the  class  room.  The  subjects  for  composition  should  include  biographi- 
cal sketches  and  descriptions  of  views  (photographs)  of  Italian  cities. 


40  Admission  1920-21 

The  texts  suggested  are: — 

Bowen's  Italian  Reader;  Collodi,  Pinocchio;  CoUodi,  Viaggio  di  Gian- 
nettino;  De  Amicis,  La  vita  Militare;  Giacosa,  La  partita  a  scacchi;  Man- 
zoni,  /  promessi  sposi;  Pillico,  Le  mie  prigioni;  Martinengo — Cesaresco, 
Patriotti  Italiani;  Morandi,  Antologia  dclla  prosa  moderna;  Le  cento 
migliore  liriche;  Oxford  Book  of  Italian  Verse. 

BOTANY  (1)  ' 

The  requirement  may  be  met  in  one  of  two  ways. 

A.  By  the  course  outUned  in  Document  96  of  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board. 

The  course  should  cover: — 

(i)  The  general  principles  of  plant  anatomy,  morphology, 
physiology,  and  ecology. 

(2)  A  general  knowledge  of  the  great  groups  or  phyla  of  plants. 

In  the  second  part  of  the  course  students  should  not  only  be- 
come familiar  with  the  prim.ary  subdivisions  of  the  great  groups, 
but  should  be  able  to  trace  the  evolution  of  plant  forms  by 
means  of  a  comparative  study  of  representative  plants  in  the 
various  groups. 

B.  By  covering  the  main  features  in  the  course  as  outUned 
in  the  Laboratory  Guide  for  the  Introductory  Course  in  Welles- 
ley  College.  Copies  of  these  Guides  may  be  secured  if  desired 
through  the  oflace  of  the  Board  of  Admission  of  Wellesley 
College. 

Individual  laboratory  work  by  the  students  is  essential  and 
should  receive  at  least  double  the  amount  of  time  given  to  lec- 
ture and  recitation.  Records  of  the  laboratory  work,  properly 
certified  by  the  teacher,  in  which  stress  is  laid  upon  diagram- 
matically  accurate  drawing  and  precise  expressive  description, 
must  be  presented  on  or  before  June  fifteenth. 

CHEMISTRY  (1) 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outlined  in  Document 
96  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

The  student  should  perform  experiments  in  the  laboratory 
to  illustrate  the  properties  of  the  most  important  elements, 
both  metaUic  and  non-metallic,  and  their  compounds,  and  it 
is  strongly  recommended  that  a  few  of  these  experiments 
should  be  of  a  quantitative  nature.  Work  in  qualitative 
analysis  is  not  recommended. 

Laboratory  notebooks  need  not  be  submitted  to  the  College  for  exami- 
nation. 


1920-21  Admission  41 

PHYSICS  (1) 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outlined  in  Document 
96  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

Laboratory  notebooks  need  not  be  submitted  to  the  College  for  exami- 
nation. 

BIOLOGY  (1) 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outlined  in  Document 
96  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

PHYSICAL  QEOQRAPHY 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outUned  in  Document 
96  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

ZOOLOGY 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outhned  in  Document 
96  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

MUSIC  (i) 

The  requirement  in  Music  (Harmony)  is  met  by  examination 
at  Wellesley  College  on  the  following: — 

Knowledge  of  the  following  chords: 
All  the  triads  in  the  major  key. 
All  the  triads  in  the  minor  key. 
The  inversions  of  all  triads. 
The  dominant  seventh  chord  and  its  inversions. 
The  diminished  seventh  chord  and  its  inversions. 

Knowledge  of  all  scales,  major,  minor  (harmonic  and  melodic), 
and  chromatic,  with  their  proper  notation. 

Knowledge  of  the  proper  way  of  making  a  manuscript. 

(See  "How  to  Write  Music"  by  Harris,  published  by  the  H.  W.  Grav 
Co.,  New  York.) 

Knowledge  of  figured  bass. 

This  will  be  demonstrated  by  adding  Soprano,  Alto,  and 
Tenor  to  a  given  figured  bass. 

Note. — Students  who  have  never  studied  Figured  Bass  will  be  given 
an  Unfigured  Bass  to  harmonize. 

Knowledge  of  harmonizing  a  melody. 
This  will  be  tested  by  harmonizing  a  given  melody,  adding 
Alto,  Tenor,  and  Bass. 

Emphasis  should  be  placed  on  the  harmonization  of  melody. 


42 


Admission 


1920-21 


METHODS   OF  ADMISSION 
Old  Plan:    Examinations  in  all  Subjects 

Candidates  must  take  all  examinations  in  June  except  such 
as  by  permission  may  be  postponed  until  September.  The 
admission  examinations  conducted  at  Wellesley  College  in  June 
are  the  examinations  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination 
Board  of  which  Wellesley  College  is  a  member.  These  exami- 
nations will  be  held  June  20-25,  192 1. 

The  College  Entrance  Examination  Board  will  furnish  a  Hst 
of  other  places  at  which  these  examinations  will  be  held. 

Students  entering  by  the  old  plan  may  take  either  the  ordi- 
nary or  the  comprehensive  examinations  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  indicated  in  the  following  list: 


Subject 

No.  OF 
Units 

College  Board  Examinations 

Ordinary 

Comprehensive 

English 

3 

'  A      Grammar  and 

Composition 
[  B      Literature 
or 
AB 

Cp.  English 

History 

I 

1 

2-3 

A      Ancient  History 

or 
B      Mediaeval  and  Mod- 
ern History 

or 
C      Modern  History 

or 
D      EngKsh  History 

or 

[  E  or  G  American  History 

A  with  B,  C,  D,  E  or  G 

Cp.  History 

Mathematics 

3 

4 

A      Elementary  Algebra 
Complete 
1  C      Plane  Geometry 
f  D      SoUd  Geometry 
i                   and 
[  F      Plane  Trigonometry 

Cp.  3  Elementary  Mathe- 
matics 

Cp.  4    Elementary    and 
Advanced  Mathematics 

Latin 

4 

4  Cicero  and  Sight 
Translation  of  Prose 

5  Vergil  and  Sight 
Translation  of  Poetry 

6  Advanced  Prose 
Composition 

Cp.  4  Four-year  Latin 

1920-21 


Admission 


43 


SXJBJECT 

No.  OF 

Units 

College  Board  Examlnations 

Ordinary 

Comprehensive 

Greek 

2 

3 

f  A I     Grammar 
F       Prose  Composition 
BG    Xenophon  and  Sight 
Translation  of  Attic 
Prose 
r  Ai,F,  BG,  and 
\  CH  Homer  and  Sight 
[          Translation  of  Poetry 

Cp.  2  Two-year  Greek 
Cp.  3  Three-year  Greek 

French 

2 

3 
4 

A      Elementary  (First 
and  Second  years) 

A   and    B    Intermediate 
(Third  year) 

BC    Intermediate  and  Ad- 
vanced 

Cp.  2  Two-year  French 
Cp.  3  Three-year  French 
Cp.  4  Four-year  French 

German 

2 

3 
4 

A      Elementary  (First 
and  Second  years) 

A    and    B    Intennediate 
(Third  year) 

BC    Intermediate  and  Ad- 
vanced 

Cp.  2  Two-year  German 
Cp.  3  Three-year  German 
Cp.  4  Four-year  German 

Spanish 

2 

3 

A  Elementary  (First  and 

Second  years) 
A    and    B     Intermediate 

(Third  year) 

Cp.  2  Two-year  Spanish 
Cp.  3  Three-yearSpanish 

Biology 

Biology 

Botany 

Botany 

Chemistry 

Chemistry 

Cp.  Chemistry 

Physics 

Physics 

Cp.  Physics 

Physical 
Geography 

Geography 

Zoology 

Zoology 

44  Admission  1920-21 

Examinations  for  students  entering  by  the  old  plan  of  examina- 
tion in  all  subjects  may  be  taken  in  two  or  more  successive 
years.  Students  are  advised  to  take  final  examinations  in 
subjects  which  they  expect  to  continue  in  college. 

All  applications  for  examination,  and  all  other  inquiries 
must  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board,  431  West  117th  St.,  New  York,  N.Y. 
Applications  must  be  made  upon  a  blank  form  to  be  obtained 
from  the  Secretary  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

A  list  of  places  at  which  the  examinations  are  held  is  published  about  March 
I.  In  order  that  they  may  receive  proper  consideration,  requests  that  the 
examinations  be  held  at  particular  points  should  be  transmitted  to  the 
Secretary  of  the  Board  not  later  tha?i  February  i. 

Applications  for  examination  at  points  in  the  United  States  east  of  the 
Mississippi  River  (also  at  Minneapolis,  St.  Louis,  and  other  points  on  the 
Mississippi  River),  must  be  received  by  the  Secretary  on  or  before  Monday, 
May  30,  1921;  applications  for  admission  to  examination  elsewhere  in  the 
United  States  or  in  Canada  must  be  received  on  or  before  Monday,  May  23, 
192 1 ;  and  apphcations  for  examination  at  points  outside  the  United  States 
and  Canada  must  be  received  on  or  before  Monday,  May  o,  192 1. 

Applications  received  later  than  the  dates  named  will  be  accepted  when 
it  is  possible  to  arrange  for  the  examination  of  the  candidates  concerned, 
but  only  upon  payment  of  six  dollars  in  addition  to  the  usual  examination 
fee.     Candidates  filing  belated  applications  do  so  at  their  own  risk. 

The  examination  fee  is  six  dollars  for  all  candidates  examined  at  points 
in  the  United  States  and  Canada,  and  twenty  dollars  for  all  candidates 
examined  at  points  outside  of  the  United  States  and  Canada.  The  fee 
should  be  remitted  by  postal  order,  express  order,  or  draft  on  New  York 
to  the  order  of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

Full  information  concerning  the  scope  and  character  of  each  of  the  exami- 
nations may  be  found  in  Document  96,  published  by  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board.  This  may  be  obtained  by  sending  ten  cents  in  stamps 
to  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board. 

REGENTS   EXAMINATIONS 

Regents  examinations  with  a  rating  of  75  per  cent  may  be 
offered  under  certain  conditions  in  place  of  the  examinations 
of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board.  Credits  must  be 
presented  on  the  card  verified  by  the  State  Board  of  Educa- 
tion of  New  York  State. 

SEPTEMBER   EXAMINATIONS 

Admission  examinations  are  offered  at  Wellesley  College  in 
September   as   heretofore.     Mount    Holyoke    College,   Vassar 


1920-21  Admission  45 

College,  Smith  College,  and  Wellesley  College  will  jointly  con- 
duct examinations  in  Chicago,  September  19  to  22,  1921.  The 
comprehensive  examinations  of  the  College  Entrance  Examina- 
tion Board  will  be  used  in  September  for  all  candidates.  Stu- 
dents who  fail  in  preHminary  examinations  in  June  may  not 
repeat  examinations  in  the  same  subjects  in  September.  Appli- 
cation for  September  examinations  must  be  made  to  the  Secre- 
tary to  the  Board  of  Admission  of  Wellesley  College  by  Septem- 
ber first.  Each  candidate  will  be  charged  an  examination  fee 
of  sLx  dollars. 

SCHEDULE   OF   EXAMINATIONS 
SEPTEMBER,  1921 

Monday,  September  19 
9-12  A.  M.  English. 

2-  5  p.  M.  Chemistry,  Physics. 

Tuesday,  September  20 
9-12  A.  M.  Latin. 

2-  5  p.  M.  French. 

Wednesday,  September  21 
9-12  A.  M.  Elementary  Mathematics. 

2-  5  P.  M.  German,  Spanish. 

Thursday,  September  22 
9-12  A.  M.  History. 

2-  s  p.  M.  Greek. 

Botany,  Music. 

Advanced  Mathematics 


NEW  PLAN   OF   ADMISSION 

It  is  believed  that  this  new  type  of  admission  combines 
the  best  elements  of  the  certificate  system  and  of  the  examina- 
tion system  in  that  it  requires  the  school  record  and  estimate 
of  character^  and  also  demands  examinations  designed  to  test 
the  candidate's  intellectual  power,  not  alone  her  memory  of 
prescribed  facts.  Furthermore,  the  method  offers  the  appli- 
cant the  fullest  opportunity  to  show  her  abihty  in  subjects  in 
which  she  beUeves  herself  best  quahfied. 

The  plan  offers  a  uniform  method  of  admission  for  the  four 
women's  colleges  which  have  adopted  the  plan,  and  gives  the 


46  Admission  1920-21 

school  entire  freedom  in  the  sequence  of  its  work,  making  no 
requirements  of  certain  subjects  in  the  last  year. 

The  examinations  required  in  this  plan  are  of  the  type 
known  as  comprehensive  examinations  offered  by  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board. 

The  new  method  depends  on  two  kinds  of  evidence: 

1.  Evidence  submitted  by  the  school,  consisting  of 

a.  A  school  report  covering  the  entire  record  of  subjects 
and  grades  for  four  years. 

b.  A  statement  from  the  school  principal  including  an  esti- 
mate of  the  applicant's  scholarly  interests,  special  abiUty,  and 
character. 

2.  Evidence  submitted  by  the  candidate,  consisting  of 
Four  comprehensive  examinations,   selected  from   each   of 

the  following  groups: 

(i)  Enghsh  or  History,  selected  by  the  applicant. 

(2)  A  foreign  language,  selected  by  the  applicant. 

(3)  Mathematics,  or  Chemistry,  or  Physics,  selected  by 
the  apphcant. 

(4)  A  fourth  subject,  designated  by  the  applicant  from  the 
subjects  which  may  be  offered  for  admission.  This  choice 
must  be  approved  by  the  Committee  on  Admission  of  the 
respective  colleges. 

These  four  examinations  must  be  taken  at  one  time. 

At  least  two  examinations  must  cover  more  than  two  ad- 
mission units  each. 

In  each  subject  chosen  the  comprehensive  examination 
covering  all  the  units  offered  by  her  for  admission  must  be 
taken  by  the  applicant. 

It  is  desirable  that  applicants  furnish  school  records  and 
state  the  subjects  selected  for  examination  before  February 
fifteenth  of  the  year  in  which  the  examinations  are  to  be  taken. 

The  Committee  on  Admission  of  the  individual  college 
must  give  its  permission,  based  upon  the  evidence  submitted 
by  the  school,  before  the  applicant  may  take  the  examina- 
tions. The  comprehensive  examinations  set  by  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board  are  judged  by  readers  appointed 
by  this  Board,  and  forwarded  to  the  individual  coUege  for  final 
decision  by  the  college  Committee  on  Admission. 

Under  the  new  plan  the  candidate,  if  admitted  to  college, 
will  be  admitted  free  from  all  conditions.  Failure  to  meet 
completely  the  standard  in  both  kinds  of  evidence  required 


1920-21  Admission  47 

will  not  necessarily  involve  rejection  of  the  applicant;  the 
Committee  may  accept  unusual  excellence  in  one  part  of  the 
credentials  submitted  as  offsetting  unsatisfactory  evidence 
or  even  failure  in  another  part.  If  the  candidate  fails  of 
admission  in  June  she  v/ill  not  be  debarred  from  taking  ex- 
aminations under  the  old  system  in  September,  but  she  may 
not  take  the  comprehensive  examinations  for  admission  under 
the  new  plan  before  June  of  the  following  year. 

Comprehensive  examinations  according  to  the  new  plan 
are  given  by  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board.  In- 
formation concerning  the  character  and  scope  of  the  examina- 
tions will  be  found  in  Document  96  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board. 

ADMISSION  TO  ADVANCED  STANDING 

Candidates  for  advanced  standing  must  fulfiU  the  require- 
ments for  admission  to  the  freshman  class,  and  when  not  enter- 
ing from  other  colleges  must  pass  examinations  in  a  sufficient 
number  of  hours  of  work  to  gain  full  standing  with  the  class 
which  they  wish  to  join.  All  examinations  on  courses  offered 
for  advanced  credit  must  be  taken  at  Wellesley  in  June  or 
September.  Special  arrangements  must  be  made  for  admission 
to  these  examinations,  and  apphcations  must  be  received  by 
May  fifteenth  or  September  first  respectively. 

A  candidate  who  has  met  the  admission  requirements  for  the 
freshman  class  and  has  completed  creditably  the  w^ork  of  at 
least  one  year  at  another  college  may,  at  the  discretion  of  the 
Committee  on  Advanced  Standing,  be  admitted  without 
examination  to  the  courses  for  which  her  previous  training  seems 
to  qualify  her.  An  apphcant  desiring  to  enter  under  -this  pro- 
vision must  make  a  complete  written  statement  of  the  work  on 
which  she  bases  her  appHcation.  Blank  forms  of  appUcation 
wiU  be  furnished  by  the  College  Recorder. 

Much  importance  is  attached  to  the  quahty  of  the  w^ork 
offered.  The  College  Recorder  will  correspond  with  the  college 
attended  by  the  applicant  and  request  her  entire  record  and 
letter  of  honorable  dismissal. 

Candidates  admitted  from  other  colleges  wdll  be  required  to 
register  during  the  first  year  as  Unclassified  Students.  At  least 
two  years  of  residence  are  required  to  obtain  the  B.A.  degree, 
of  which  one  must  be  the  senior  year. 

The  number  of  students  to  be  admitted  to  advanced  standing 
in  any  year  is  limited. 


48  Admission  1920-21. 

Honor  Group  for  Advanced  Standing 

For  applicants  wishing  to  enter  on  advanced  standing,  who 
may  be  too  late  to  secure  registration  on  the  regular  Hst,  a  small 
Honor  Group  has  been  formed.  In  order  to  be  recognized  as 
a  candidate  for  the  Honor  Group  for  Advanced  Standing,  a 
student  must  present  evidence  in  the  previous  school  and  college 
records  and  m  letters  from  former  instructors  that  she  is  a 
student  of  excellent  ability  and  unusual  promise.  The  decision 
as  to  the  successful  apphcants  for  admission  to  the  Honor 
Group  for  Advanced  Standing  will  be  made  in  the  summer  of 
the  year  of  entrance,  after  the  reports  from  the  various  colleges 
have  been  received. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  College 
Recorder. 


ADMISSION  OF   CANDIDATES  FOR  THE  M.A.   DEGREE 

Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  must  be  gradu- 
ates of  Wellesley  College  or  of  other  institutions  of  satisfac- 
tory standing,  and  must  present  adequate  credentials  as  to 
their  ability  to  carry  on  the  work  for  the  M.K.  degree. 

AppHcations  for  admission  as  graduate  students  in  all  de- 
partments (including  Hygiene)  should  be  made  upon  forms 
which  will  be  furnished  by  the  College  R.ecorder  on  request. 
It  is  desirable  that  the  application  be  sent  by  May  first  of 
the  year  in  which  the  student  proposes  to  enter.  It  should 
be  accompanied  by  records  of  standing,  and,  if  possible,  by 
papers  and  reports  of  work. 

A  matriculation  fee  of  five  dollars  is  payable  when  a  student 
is  accepted  as  a  candidate  for  the  Master's  degree.  The 
amount  of  this  fee  will  be  deducted  from  the  diploma  fee  of 
twenty-five  dollars  payable  when  the  degree  is  received. 

Eighteen  scholarships,  as  described  on  page  158,  are  open 
to  accepted  candidates  for  the  M.A.  degree,  not  residing  in 
college  buildings.* 

Circulars  containing  full  information  for  graduate  students 
will  be  sent  on  appHcation  to  the  College  Recorder.  For  re- 
quirements for  the  M.A.  degree  see  page  152. 

•  With  the  present  dormitory  accommodations  it  is  not  ordinarily  possible  to  reserve 
rooms  on  the  campus  for  graduate  students;  if  candidates  secure  places  in  college  buildings 
they  must  pay  the  full  charge  for  board  and  tuition. 


1920-21  Admission  49 

ADMISSION  OF  STUDENTS  NOT   CANDIDATES 
FOR  A  DEGREE 

Applicants  who  give  satisfactory  evidence  of  ability  to 
pursue  advanced  courses  of  study  may  be  admitted  at  the 
discretion  of  the  Board  of  Admission,  provided  that  they 
satisfy  the  requirements  of  the  departments  which  they  pro- 
pose to  enter.  It  v>dll  be  noted  that  opportunities  of  prose- 
cuting work  along  special  lines  are  thus  open  to  persons  of 
experience  and  success  in  teaching  w^ho  possess  the  requisite 
qualifications  for  admission  to  college  classes. 

AppUcants  of  less  maturity  and  acquirement  are  not  ordi- 
narily admitted,  but  if  such  desire  admission  they  must  ex- 
pect to  meet  by  examination  the  requirements  prescribed  for 
admission  to  the  freshman  class,  or  a  full  equivalent  for  them 
and  to  satisfy  such  additional  requirements  as  are  prescribed 
by  the  departments  which  they  propose  to  enter.  Specific 
statements  of  these  requirements  in  Music  will  be  found  on 
page  133;  in  Hygiene  on  page  108. 

All  courses,  graduate  as  well  as  undergraduate,  are  open 
to  special  students,  subject  to  the  conditions  stated  by  the 
various  departments;  but  every  such  student  is  expected  to 
choose  a  primary  subject  to  which  she  should  devote  the 
greater  part  of  her  time.  A  student  who  creditably  com- 
pletes a  prescribed  group  of  courses  will  be  granted  a  certificate. 

As  the  capacity  of  halls  of  residence  is  not  sufficient  for 
candidates  for  degrees,  special  students  cannot  be  lodged  in 
the  college  buildings.  Comfortable  homes  may  be  found  in 
the  village  at  about  the  same  expense  as  in  college  houses. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary 
to  the  Board  of  Admission. 


50  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 


COURSES  OF  INSTRUCTION 

The  following  Courses  of  Instruction  are  offered  by  the 
several  departments.  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  with- 
draw the  offer  of  any  course  not  chosen  by  at  least  six  students. 

All  courses  are  classified  in  grades  I,  II,  III;  grade  I  in- 
cluding elementary  courses  and  grade  III  the  most  advanced 
courses.  Grade  I  courses  are  numbered  loi,  etc.;  grade  II 
courses  201,  etc.;  grade  III  courses  301,  etc. 


CLASSICAL  ARCHEOLOGY 

Professor:  Alice  Walton,  Ph.D. 
201.  History  of  Classical  Sculpture  (Art  202). 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in  either  Art,  or 
Greek,  or  Latin.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton. 

The  course  will  present  the  principles  of  Greek  and  Roman 
Sculpture,  as  developed  from  the  earliest  beginnings  through  the 
Great  Periods  into  the  Roman,  with  references  to  the  minor  arts, 
such  as  vase  painting,  coins,  and  so  forth,  as  they  are  related  to  the 
main  development.  The  work  of  the  fifth  and  fourth  centuries 
wiU  be  especially  emphasized. 

301t.  History  of  Greek  Pottery.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  (i  of  igig-20)  and 
have  studied  Greek  for  one  year.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

The  course  will  include  the  sequence  of  decorative  styles  and  the 
principles  of  design  in  vase  painting  with  especial  emphasis  upon 
the  great  period  of  the  fifth  century.  Constant  reference  will  be 
made  to  the  collection  of  vases  in  the  Boston  Museum  of  Fine  Arts. 

302t.  Greek  and  Roman  Coins.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  {4  of  igiQ-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

Greek  coin  types  will  be  considered  especially  for  their  artistic 
quality,  Roman  coins  for  their  historical  value, 
t  Archeology  301-302  and  Latin  302-303  are  not  usually  given  in  the  same  year. 


1920-21  Art  51 

ART 

Professor:  Alice  Van  Vechten  Brown. 
Assistant  Professor:  Myrtilla  Avery,  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:    BERTHA    KNICKERBOCKER    STRAIGHT,^    B.A. 

Harriet   Boyd  Hawes,   M.A.,  L.H.D. 
Hazel  Brill  Jackson." 
Lecturers:  Eliza  Jacobus  Newkirk,  M.A. 
Alice  Walton,  Ph.D., 

PROFESSOR    of   ARCH/tOLOQY. 

Assistant:  Agn-es  Abbot. 
Museum  Assistant  in  Charge:  Gladys  Adams  Turnbach,  B.A. 
Museum  Assistant:  Alice  Churchill  Moore. 

101.  Introductory  Course  in  the  History  of  Art  to  the  Eighth 

Century  a.d. 

Open    to   freshmen,    sophomores,    and  juniors.     No    prerequisites. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Brown,  Mrs.  Hawes. 

This  course  offers  a  re\'iew  of  the  general  development  of  archi- 
tecture, sculpture,  and  painting  in  the  period  studied,  and  aims  to 
develop  an  appreciation  of  aesthetic  values  by  means  of  a  close 
study  of  photographs  and  the  works  themselves,  through  the  lab- 
oratory method. 

Visits  to  Museums. 

Drawing  and  other  practical  work  is  required. 

102.  Introductory  Course  in  the  History  of  Art  to  the  Eighth 

Century  a.d. 

Open  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  and  juniors.     No  prerequisites.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Avery. 

The  ground  covered  is  in  general  the  same  as  in  course  loi,  but 
special  reference  is  made  to  the  principles,  forms,  and  motives 
which  persist  in  the  Middle  Ages  and  the  Renaissance. 

There  will  be  no  practical  work. 

103 1-  Studio  Practice. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.    No  prerequisites.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year.     {Nine  hours  of  studio  practice.) 

Miss  Brown,  Miss  Straight,  Miss  Jackson. 
Drawing,  sketching,  painting  (oil  and  watercolor),  modeling. 

s  Appointed  for  the  first  semester  only. 
^  Appointed  for  the  winter  term  only, 
t  See  note  on  page  54. 


52  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

201.  History  of  Architecture  from  the   Classic  Period  through 

THE  Renaissance. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  102  {or  12  of  igig- 
20).     Three  hours  a  week  jor  a  year. 

Miss  Newkirk. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  view  of  the  develop- 
ment of  styles  and  a  thorough  understanding  of  their  essential 
elements,  both  constructive  and  decorative. 

First  semester:  Introduction  to  the  subject  and  history  of  archi- 
tecture from  the  classic  to  the  Gothic  period. 

Second  semester:  Architecture  of  the  Gothic  and  Renaissance 
periods. 

The  first  semester  of  course  201  is  open  on  recommendation  of 
one  of  the  classical  departments  to  any  student  who  especially  de- 
sires preparation  for  one  of  the  classical  schools  and  may  be  counted 
as  a  complete  semester  course. 

Text-book:   Kimball  and  Edgell: — A  History  of  Architecture. 

Drawing  required. 

202.  History  of  Classical  Sculpture.     (Archeology  201.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  101  or  102  {or  12  of  igig- 
26)  or  one  full  course  in  either  Greek  or  Latin.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton. 

The  course  will  present  the  principles  of  Greek  and  Roman  Sculp- 
ture, as  developed  from  the  earhest  beginnings  through  the  Great 
Periods  into  the  Roman,  with  references  to  the  minor  arts,  such  as 
vase  painting,  coins,  and  so  forth,  as  they  are  related  to  the  main 
development.  The  work  of  the  fifth  and  fourth  centuries  will  be 
especially  emphasized.  Drawing  offered  but  not  required.  Visits 
to  the  Boston  Museum  of  Fine  Arts. 

203.  Outline  Course  in  the  History  of  Art. 

Open  to  seniors  only.  No  prerequisites.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Avery. 

This  course  furnishes  an  outline  of  the  development  of  styles  in 
Architecture,  Sculpture,  and  Painting  (excluding  the  Far  East), 
and  aims  to  develop  observation  and  aesthetic  appreciation  as  well 
as  to  relate  important  monuments  to  their  contemporary  civilization. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or  are  tak- 
ing any  other  history  course  in  the  Art  Department. 

Visits  to  Museums. 


1920-21  Art  53 

204t,  Studio  Practice. 

Open  by  permission  of  the  department  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have 
completed  course  loj  (5.  14  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester.     {Nine  hours  of  studio  practice.) 

Miss  Straight. 
Design. 

301.  Medleval  Sculpture  and  Painting. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  either  course  201  or  course  202. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Avery. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  make  the  connection  between 
ancient  and  Renaissance  art.  It  includes  an  outline  study  of  Byzan- 
tine figure  arts,  the  cathedral  sculpture  of  France,  and  sculpture  and 
painting  in  Italy  through  Cimabue  and  Giovanni  Pisano.  Visits  to 
Boston  collections.     Drawing  offered  but  not  required. 

302.  History  of  Italian  Painting  through  the  Fifteenth  Century. 

Opeii  to  students  who  have  completed  course  joi.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Brown. 

A  general  review  of  movements  and  schools  with  special  emphasis 
upon  the  Florentine  School  from  Giotto  through  Botticelli.  A 
text-book  required.  Visits  to  Museums.  Drawing  offered  but  not 
required. 

303.  History  of  Italian  Painting:  Special  Studies. 

In  IQ20-2I  open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  j  of  igig-20 
and  course  301.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester.  After 
ig20-2i  three  hours  a  week  for  a  year  and  open  to  students  who  have 
completed  courses  301  and  302. 

Miss  Brown. 

In  this  course  critical  and  detailed  study  will  be  given  to  a  special 
period,  school,  or  problem  in  painting.  In  1920-21  the  subject  will 
be  studies  in  the  Venetian  School.  Close  study  of  photographs  is 
required,  and  an  understanding  of  the  methods  used  by  Crowe  and 
Cavalcaselle,  Morelli,  Berenson  and  other  critics.  Museum  visits. 
Drawing  offered  but  not  required. 

304.  History  of  Renaissance  Architecture. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  201  (i  of  igig-20)  and 
t  See  note  on  page  54. 


54  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

have  completed  or  are  taking  courses  301.  302.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  year. 

Miss  Newkirk. 

This  course  centers  in  a  critical  study  of  the  works  of  representa- 
tive architects  of  the  Italian  Renaissance.  It  follows  the  influence 
of  that  style  upon  the  native  architectural  expression  of  France 
and  England,  and  shows  the  elements  that  entered  into  the  design 
and  details  of  Colonial  Architecture  in  America.  Drawing  required. 
Expeditions  to  study  examples  of  Colonial  Architecture. 

305.  Certain  Periods  or  Northern  Art.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

306.  Theory  of  Decoration.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

307.  Special  Studies  in  the  Art  of  the  Middle  Ages.     (Not  offered  in 

1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  cotnpleted  or  are  taking  301  and  302.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Avery. 

The  course  includes  iconography  and  inter-relations,  both  his- 
torical and  technical,  and  forms  a  background  for  the  scholarly 
interpretation  of  the  Renaissance. 

Note. — After  one  course  in  the  History  of  Art  has  been  com- 
pleted, three  hours  of  practical  work  as  indicated  in  103,  204, 
above,  equivalent  to  nine  hours  of  practice,  may  count  toward  the 
degree;  four  and  one-half  hours  of  practical  work,  equivalent  to 
thirteen  and  one-half  hours  of  practice,  may  so  count,  if  six  hours  in 
the  History  of  Art  have  been  completed.  This  practical  work  is 
arranged  solely  to  develop  such  qualities  of  observation  and  appre- 
ciation as  are  necessary  to  the  critical  study  of  Art  History. 

Students  in  Art  courses  are  required  to  use  laboratory  methods, 
examining  and  comparing  the  photographs  used  in  illustration. 
Written  description  may  be  substituted  for  laboratory  drawing. 

Previous  preparation  in  drawing  is  not  required. 

The  art  library  is  open  to  students  from  8.00  to  5.36  daily,  and 
from  7.15  to  9.15  on  certain  evenings. 


1920-21  Astronomy  55 

ASTRONOMY 

Professor:  John  Charles  Duncan,^  Ph.D. 

INSTRUCTOR:    LeAH    BrOWN    ALLEN,    M.A. 

Laboratory  Assistant:  Dorothy  E.  Peck.  B.A. 

101.  Descriptive  Astronomy. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Allen,  Miss  Peck. 

A  general  survey  of  the  facts  of  Astronomy,  of  the  methods  by 
which  they  are  obtained  and  of  the  theories  that  account  for  them; 
facts  with  which  every  educated  person  should  be  familiar,  in  order 
to  understand  the  astronomical  allusions  occurring  in  Hterature  and 
to  be  alive  to  the  beauty  of  the  order  that  is  about  us. 

102.  Uranography.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  seniors  and  graduate  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Allen. 

This  course  will  be  given  Monday  evenings  at  7.30  o'clock. 
On  clear  evenings,  naked  eye  study  of  the  constellations  and  tele- 
scopic observations  of  the  moon,  planets,  and  other  objects  of  in- 
terest. On  cloudy  evenings,  lectures  and  study  of  photographs, 
maps,  and  apparatus  illustrating  the  motions  of  the  heavenly 
bodies. 

201.  Advanced  General  Astronomy.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20),  and 
who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  course  in  Physics  or  Chemistry. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

This  course  will  take  up  in  greater  detail  many  of  the  topics  which 
are  treated  in  a  general  way  in  course  loi,  and  will  treat  other 
topics  as  well.  It  is  intended  to  meet  the  requirements  of  students 
who,  though  not  specializing  in  Astronomy,  are  not  satisfied  with 
the  knowledge  of  the  subject  that  can  be  obtained  from  a  single 
course. 

Original  memoirs  will  be  consulted  and  the  telescopes  used. 

202.  Observatory  Practice. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Allen. 

3  Absent  on  leave. 


56  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Practical  work  in  the  astronomy  of  position.  Determination  of 
time,  longitude,  latitude,  right  ascension  and  declination.  Use 
of  the  sextant,  transit  instrument  and  micrometer. 


203.  Observatory  Practice. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-2o).  One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year.  By  special  permission,  two  or  three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Allen,  Miss  Peck. 

Use  of  the  observatory  equipment  in  work  not  covered  by  course 
202.  The  specific  subjects  will  vary  from  year  to  year  with  such 
changing  conditions  as  the  configuration  of  the  planets,  the  ap- 
pearance of  new  stars  and  comets,  the  occurrence  of  echpses,  etc. 
The  course  may  be  taken  repeatedly. 


301.  Astrophysics.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  a  course  in  Differential  Calculus 
and  either  a  course  in  Astronomy  or  one  in  Optics.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

Astronomical  spectroscopy,  photography,  and  photometry.    The 
laws  of  radiation.     Solar  and  sidereal  physics;  stellar  motions. 


302.  Determination  of  Orbits.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Astronomy  loi  (i  of  igiQ-20) 
and  a  year  of  Calculus.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

Determination,  from  three  observations,  of  the  elliptic  and 
parabolic  orbits  of  bodies  in  the  solar  system.  Orbits  of  visual  and 
spectroscopic  binary  stars.    Theory  and  practice. 

303.  Celestial  Mechanics.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Duncan. 

The  attraction  of  bodies  of  various  forms  under  Newton's  law  of 
gravitation.  The  problems  of  two  and  of  three  bodies.  Perturba- 
tions. 


1920-21  Biblical  History  57 


BIBLICAL  HISTORY,  LITERATURE,  AND 
INTERPRETATION 

Professor:  Eliza  Hall  Kendrick,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professors:  Adelaide  Imogene  Locke,   B.A.,  S.T.B. 

Olive  Dutcher,   M.A.,   B.D. 
Assistant  Professors:  Muriel  Anne  Streibert,   B.A.,  B.D. 
Louise  Pettibone  Smith,   Ph.D. 
Seal  Thompson,^  M.A. 
Lecturer:  Gordon   Boit  Wellman,  Th.D. 
Instructor:  Beatrice  Allard  Brooks,  B.A. 

101.  102.  The  Development  of  Thought  in  the  Old  Testament. 

Required  of  sophomores.  Course  loi,  three  hours  first  semester. 
Course  102,  three  hours  second  semester.  Course  loi  mil  be  offered 
also  in  the  second  semester,  and  course  102  in  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Locke,  Miss  Dutcher,  Miss  Streibert, 
Miss  Smith,  Mrs.  Brooks. 
It  is  the  purpose  of  this  course  to  offer  studies  in  the  develop- 
ment of  rehgion  and  ethics  in  the  Old  Testament.  There  will  be 
included  such  historical  study  of  Hebrew  national  hfe  and  such 
presentation  of  the  literary  problems  connected  with  the  Old  Testa- 
ment writings  as  are  necessary  to  make  intelligible  the  develop- 
ment of  thought. 

201.  Development  of  Thought  in  Later  Jewish  Literature. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loi  and  102  (i  and  2  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Dutcher. 

The  course  will  deal  with  the  development  of  thought  among  the 
Jews  during  the  period  approximately  from  300  B.C.  to  100  a.d. 

Particular  emphasis  will  be  laid  upon  such  topics  as  the  Messianic 
hope,  angelology  and  demonology,  life  after  death  and  the  resur- 
rection, wisdom  thought,  ethical  ideas  and  sanctions,  all  in  their 
relation  to  the  history  of  the  period.  The  course  should  therefore 
give  to  the  students  a  valuable  knowledge  of  the  background  out  of 
which  Jesus  came  and  a  clearer  understanding  of  his  categories  of 
thought. 

202.  The  Life  of  Christ. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loi  and  102  (i  and  2 
of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  either  semester. 

Miss  Kendrick, 
Miss  Streibert,  Mr.  Wellman. 

»  Absent  on  leave. 


58  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Aim:  (i)  To  study  the  environment  of  Christ  in  the  govern- 
ment, institutions,  manner  of  life,  ideals,  and  literature  of  the  Jewish 
people  of  his  time. 

(2)  To  follow  the  unfolding  of  his  life  from  the  historical  point 
of  view. 

(3)  To  study  the  teachings  of  Christ:  (a)  in  their  historical 
connections  as  far  as  possible;  (b)  topically. 

(4)  To  become  acquainted  with  the  leading  problems  regarding 
the  person  and  vrork  of  Christ,  with  different  points  of  view  and  with 
the  best  Hterature  on  the  subject. 

203.  Elementary  Hebrew. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith, 

The  elements  of  Hebrew  grammar,  with  practice  in  translation 
and  the  memorizing  of  a  vocabulary.  Reading  of  selections  from 
the  old  Testament. 

At  the  end  of  the  course  the  student  should  be  able  to  read  simple 
Hebrew  and  to  use  the  language  in  the  study  of  the  Old  Testament. 

204.  The  Apostolic  Age. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  202  {4  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Kendrick,  Mr.  Wellman. 
It  is  the  purpose  of  this  course  to  offer  studies  in  the  essential 
teachings  of  Christianity  as  represented  by  the  several  New  Tes- 
tament writers  outside  of  the  authors  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels. 
There  will  be  included  such  historical  study  of  New  Testament 
times  and  such  presentation  of  the  questions  connected  with  New 
Testament  Introduction  as  are  necessary  to  make  intelligible  the 
development  of  Christian  thought. 

205.  Greek  Testament.    Text  Study  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels.     (Not 

given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loi  and  102  (i  and  2 
of  igig-20),  and  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  Greek  or  have  taken  Greek  loi  in  college.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Miss  Kendrick. 

206.  Greek  Testament.    Text  Study  of  Other  New  Testament  Books. 

(Not  given  in  1920-21.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  205  (5  of  igig-20) .     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  sem^ester. 

Miss  ELendrick. 


1920-21  Botany  59 

301.  History  of  Religions. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  the  required  courses  in  Biblical 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Locke. 
Introductory  study  of  primitive  religions  followed  by  an  outline 
comparative  study  of  the  rise  and  development  of  the  leading  his- 
toric faiths. 

302.  Interpretations  of  Christianity. 

Open  to  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendrick. 
The  aim  of  this  course  will  be  to  trace  in  the  devotional  and  con- 
troversial literature  of  certain  of  the  most  important  periods  of  the 
Christian  Church,  from  the  beginning  to  the  present  day,  varying 
conceptions  of  the  essentials  of  Christianity,  to  consider  the  effect 
upon  these  conceptions  of  some  of  the  most  important  currents  of 
thought  of  the  period  studied  and  to  make  constant  comparison  with 
New  Testament  religion. 

303.  Second  Year  Hebrew.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  those  who  have  completed  course  20 j  {11  of  igig-20).     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith. 

BOTANY 

PROFESSOR:    MARGARET    CLAY    FERGUSON,"    PH.D. 

Associate  Professors:  Laetitia  Morris  Snow,  Ph.D. 

Howard  Edward  Pulling,   Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professors:  Mary  Campbell  Bliss,  M.A.  (Chairman). 

Mabel  Annie  Stone,   M.A. 

Alice  Maria  Ottley,^  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:    HELEN    ISABEL    DAVIS,    B.A. 

Margery  Claire  Carlson,  M.S. 

Helen  Stillwell  Thomas,  M.A. 
Assistants:  Ruth  Margery  Addoms.  B.A. 

Ellen  Armstrong,  B.A. 

Anna  Parker  Fessenden,  M.S. 

Ruth   Langmuir,   B.A. 
Secretary:  Dorothy  Moore,  B.A. 

101.  Plant  Studies. 

Open  to  freshmen  and  sopho^nores.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bliss,  Miss  Stone,  Miss  Carlson, 
Miss  Thomas,  Miss  Addoms,  Miss  Fessenden. 

'  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave. 
3  Absent  on  leave. 


60  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

This  course  is  designed  to  bring  the  student  into  sympathy  with 
the  plant  world,  to  cultivate  the  power  of  careful  observation, 
to  give  a  knowledge  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  plant  life 
and  plant  breeding,  and  of  the  general  principles  of  floriculture. 
The  course  is  developed  on  purely  scientific  lines,  but,  at  the  same 
time,  it  seeks  so  to  relate  our  study  of  plants  to  all  life  as  to  give 
the  student  that  familiar  and  intimate  acquaintance  with  her  living 
environment  which  makes  for  the  broadest  culture  of  to-day. 

Lectures  are  accompanied  by  studies  in  the  laboratory  and  in 
the  field.  As  a  basis  for  acquaintance  with  the  nature  and  work  of 
plants,  the  structure  and  development  of  plants  are  studied  from 
seed  germination  to  fruit  formation,  and  the  more  simple  physiologi- 
cal responses  are  investigated.  Students  are  trained  to  know  the 
herbaceous  plants  in  their  spring  condition,  to  recognize  the  early 
flowers,  and  to  know  our  common  trees  both  in  their  winter  and  in 
their  summer  aspect. 


201.  Evolution  of  Plants. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (5  of  igig-20)  or  its 
equivalent  and  to  juniors  and  seniors  without  prerequisite.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Bliss,  Miss  Stone, 

From  a  comparative  study  of  plants  extending  from  simple 
one-celled  organisms  to  the  most  modem  and  higlily  specialized 
forms,  the  student  constructs  a  probable  scheme  of  evolution  in  the 
development  of  a  land  flora.  This  detailed  study  of  forms  is  supple- 
mented by  discussions  of  general  principles  and  theories  of  evolu- 
tion. The  course  also  includes  the  technique  of  collecting  and 
preserving  the  material  on  which  the  study  is  based. 


202.  Elementary  Physiology  of  Seed  Plants. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (5  of  igig-26)  or  its 
equivalent  and  to  juniors  and  seniors  without  prerequisite.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Pulling. 

A  study  of  the  growth  and  development  of  seedlings  and  mature 
plants,  including  flowering  and  seed  formation,  from  the  standpoint 
of  the  principal  processes  concerned  and  the  chief  influences  of  the 
environment  upon  them.  In  general,  the  plant  is  considered  from 
the  biological  point  of  view  as  a  responsive  and  self-adjusting  mech- 
anism; details  of  the  chemical  and  physical  reactions  involved 
receive  only  superficial  treatment. 


1920-21  Botany  61 

203.  Taxonomy  and  Geographical  Distribution  of  the  Pteridophytes 

AND    SpERMATOPHYTES. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (5  of  igig-26)  or  201 
{16  of  igip-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Thomas. 

A  consideration  of  the  classification  and  natural  relationships 
of  the  Ferns  and  Seed-plants,  based  on  the  study  of  the  local  flora 
in  the  field  and  in  the  laboratory,  with  the  use  of  manuals  and 
practice  in  the  construction  of  keys.  The  course  will  also  include 
some  consideration  of  the  facts  and  problems  of  plant  geography. 
There  will  be  a  considerable  amount  of  field-work  in  the  spring  term. 

204.  Garden  Plants. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  201  (16  of 
igig-20)  or  202.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a  semester;  ofered  in 
both  semesters. 

Miss  Davis. 

A  scientific  study  of  garden  plants,  their  classification,  structure, 
ecology  and  physiology  as  a  basis  for  their  cultivation.  The  lec- 
tures and  laboratory  practice  treat  of  the  principles  of  plant  propa- 
gation, nutrition,  and  requirements  of  soil,  moisture,  heat,  hght, 
etc.,  both  out  of  doors  and  in  the  greenhouse.  Some  of  the  special 
problems  of  school  gardening  are  considered,  and  also  the  artistic 
value  of  the  various  plant  forms,  textures,  colors,  and  effects  in 
landscape  gardening. 

205.  General  Bacteriology. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in  Botany  or 
Chemistry  or  Zoology.  This  course  cannot  count  toward  the  science 
requirement  unless  followed  by  course  308.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
semester;  offered /in  both  semesters. 

Miss  Snow,  Miss  Armstrong. 

A  study  of  bacteria  and  some  of  the  common  moulds  and  yeasts 
in  relation  to  daily  life.  The  general  physiological  relations  of 
bacteria,  their  cultural  and  staining  reactions  and  their  distribution 
in  air,  foods,  milk,  water,  and  soil  will  be  considered.  An  applica- 
tion of  the  above  principles  and  methods  will  be  made  to  the  problem 
of  a  safe  milk  supply. 

301.  Comparative  Morphology  and  Taxonomy  of  the  Alg^,  Liver- 
worts, AND  Mosses. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  {16  of  igig-20)  or 
202.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Stone. 


62  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

This  course  aims  to  give  the  student  facihty  in  the  determination 
of  Algae,  Liverworts,  and  Mosses,  and  also  considers  the  funda- 
mental problems  underlying  their  development  and  evolution. 

302.  Comparative   Morphology   or   the   Ferns,   Gymnosperms,   and 
Angiosperms. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  (16  of  igiQ-20)  or 
301  (18  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Stone. 

This  course  considers  the  origin,  development,  and  structure  of 
vascular  plants  from  the  standpoint  of  evolution.  Special  attention 
is  placed  on  tracing  the  steps  in  the  development  of  vegetative  and 
reproductive  organs,  and  on  a  consideration  of  the  homologies  of 
sporogenous,  reproductive,  and  embryological  parts.  The  genetic 
relationships  of  plants,  both  fossil  and  living,  are  carefully  considered. 
Students  will  become  acquainted  with  the  technique  of  plant 
histology  and  embryology  by  preparing  a  considerable  proportion 
of  the  microscopic  slides  used  in  the  class  room. 


303.  Evolution  of  Plant  Tissues. 

Open  to  students  wJw  have  completed  course  201  or  301  {16  or  18  oj 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Bliss. 

A  detailed  comparative  study  of  the  tissues  of  the  lower  and 
higher  vascular  plants,  both  fossil  and  living,  from  the  standpoint 
of  evolution.  Special  emphasis  is  laid  on  the  origin  and  development 
of  the  elements  of  the  fibro-vascular  tissue  and  their  distribution  in 
root  and  stem.  A  brief  consideration  will  be  given  to  the  origin 
and  structure  of  coal,  involving  the  special  technique  of  hard  tissues. 


304.  Pathology  or  the  Higher  Plants. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (5  of  igig- 
20)  or  205  {4  of  igig-20),  or  a  semester  of  physiology.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Pulling. 

A  general  course  on  the  diseases  of  plants.  The  structure,  patho- 
logical processes  and  effects  of  representative  fungi  on  plants  ot  either 
economic  or  ornamental  value  are  studied.  Modern  methods  of 
combating  plant  diseases  are  briefly  considered  from  the  stand- 
point of  the  principles  that  underUe  them. 


1920-21  Botany  63 

305.  Ecology. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  201  {16  of  igig- 
20)  or  202,  or  301  {18  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Snow. 

A  consideration  of  the  natural  grouping  of  plants  on  the  earth 
and  the  principles  underlying  these  plant  associations.  The  course 
is  divided  into  a  study  of  (i)  plant  formations  which  have  arisen  in 
response  to  climatic  conditions,  and  (2)  local  plant  associations 
which  have  resulted  from  physiographic  changes.  This  study  in- 
cludes a  consideration  of  the  various  modifications  of  plant  structure 
found  under  different  environmental  conditions.  In  the  spring 
term  an  average  of  one  appointment  a  week  will  be  devoted  to  field 
work. 

306.  Plant  Physiology. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  2  full  years  of  Botany 
in  college,  and  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  year  of  either  Chemistry 
or  Physics.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Pulling. 

Experiments,  lectures,  discussions,  and  readings  designed  to  ac- 
quaint the  student  vvdth  the  higher  plants  as  working  organisms.  The 
experiments  embody  problems  in,  to  a  greater  extent  than  demon- 
strations of,  the  fundamental  activities  of  the  higher  plants  in  re- 
lation to  their  environment.  It  is  planned  that  increased  precision 
in  laboratory  manipulation  shall  keep  pace  with  the  student's 
growing  knowledge  of  physiological  methods. 

307.  Cytology  and  Problems  of  In-heritance.     (Not  offered  in  1920- 

21.) 

Open  to  seniors  and,  by  permissiofi  of  the  department,  to  juniors  who 
have  completed  two  full  years  of  Botany.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Ferguson. 

Studies  in  the  structure  of  the  cell;  the  phenomena  of  ceil  division; 
the  constitution  of  the  reproductive  cells  with  special  reference  to 
the  theories  of  heredity  and  evolution.  The  relation  between 
definite  cell  structures  and  visible  plant  characteristics  will  be 
determined  by  a  study  of  their  inheritance  in  cross  breeding  and  in 
mutation.  At  the  beginning  of  the  year  each  student  will  be 
assigned  a  practical  problem  in  plant  breeding  as  a  basis  for  the 
study  of  the  behavior  of  pure  lines  in  hybridization  and  the  origin 
and  transmission  of  characters. 


64  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

308.  Advanced  Bacteriology. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  Botany  205  (4  of  igig- 
20)  and  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  course  in  Chemistry.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  semester;  ofered  in  both  semesters. 

Miss  Snow. 

A  continuation  of  the  study  of  bacteria  in  relation  to  pubKc 
problems.  These  will  include  the  protection  and  purification  of 
water  supplies,  methods  of  sewage  disposal,  the  diagnosis  of  disease 
in  plants  and  animals,  etc.  There  will  be  discussions  of  such  topics 
as  theories  of  immunity,  infection,  infant  welfare  work,  industrial 
hygiene,  methods  used  in  sanitary  surveys,  etc.  Throughout  the 
course  standard  technical  methods  will  be  used. 

309.  Landscape  Gardening. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  204  (ig  of  ipig-20),  and 
by  special  permission  to  seniors  who  elect  204.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

The  work  continues  the  study  of  ornamental  plants  begun  in 
course  204,  emphasizing  their  use  in  landscape  design.  The  lectures 
treat  of  the  principles  of  design  in  planting;  the  laboratory  gives 
training  in  landscape  draughting,  the  principles  of  landscape  con- 
struction, hand  level  surveying,  grading,  planting,  and  maintenance. 

310.  Landscape  Design. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  jog  (26  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

This  course  continues  the  study  of  principles  introduced  in  course 
309.  The  work  is  conducted  by  lecture  and  laboratory  practice 
and  trips  are  taken  as  often  as  possible  for  observation  and  study  of 
actual  examples  of  the  art.  The  lectures  consider  the  basic  princi- 
ples involved  and  include  a  summary  of  the  history  of  gardening 
from  the  earhest  times  to  the  present. 

311.  The  Plants  and  Problems  of  Economic  Botany.     (Not  offered  in 

1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  {16  of  jgig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Snow. 

This  course  aims  to  bring  to  the  student  a  realization  of  the  im- 
portance of  the  plant  kingdom  in  modern  civilization.     Selected 


1920-21  Botany  65 

studies  will  be  made  from  the  plants  of  agriculture,  horticulture,  for- 
estry, medicine,  textile  industries,  etc.  Plants  will  be  considered 
not  only  from  the  standpoints  of  their  production,  distribution,  and 
preser\^ation,  but  also  with  reference  to  their  past  development  and 
their  future  improvement  and  conservation.  Adequate  emphasis 
will  be  placed  upon  the  technique  involved  and  an  opportunity  will 
be  given  to  visit  various  estabUshments  whose  work  has  special 
significance  for  this  course. 

321.  Botanical  Seminar.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Required  of  graduate  students,  and  open  to  seniors  by  permission  of 
the  department.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Ferguson. 

Reading  and  discussion  of  current  botanical  literature,  reports 
of  problems  under  investigation,  studies  in  the  historical  develop- 
ment of  some  phase  of  botanical  knowledge.  Students  will  become 
acquainted  with  the  technique  of  plant  histology  and  embryology 
by  preparing  a  considerable  proportion  of  the  microscopic  sUdes 
used  in  the  class  room. 


322.  Plant  Problems. 

Open  to  graduate  students  and,  by  permission  of  the  department,  to 
seniors.     Three  or  six  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Snow,  Miss  Bliss, 
Miss  Stone,  Mr.  Pulling. 

This  is  prim^arily  a  laboratory  course,  but  a  definite  weekly 
appointment  is  made  with  each  student  for  a  report  of  the  papers 
read  and  of  the  progress  of  her  study;  and  a  final  paper  or  thesis 
embodying  the  results  of  her  investigations  is  required.  A  special 
problem  in  one  of  the  following  subjects  is  assigned  to  each  student: 
(i)  Embryology  and  Genetics;  (2)  Histology  and  tissue  studies 
from  the  standpoint  of  phylogeny;  (3)  Physiology  and  Experimental 
morphology;  (4)  Taxonomy  of  the  Phanerogams;  (5)  Taxonomy 
of  the  Cryptogams. 

The  amount  of  time  for  reading  in  Cambridge  varies  with  the 
nature  of  the  problem  investigated. 


Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 


CHEMISTRY 

Associate  Professors:  Charlotte  Almira  Bragg,  B.S. 
Helen  Somersby  French,   Ph.D. 
Mary  Amerman  Griggs,   Ph.D. 
Instructor:  Lillian  Eloise  Baker,*^  M.A. 
Assistants:  Ruth  Loveland,  B.A. 

Marion  Elmira  Warner,  B.S. 
MiLDA  Wegner,    B.A. 

101.  Elementary  Chemistry.    Lectures  and  Laboratory  Work. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bragg,  Miss  Baker,  Miss  Loveland. 

Course  loi  is  for  beginners  in  Chemistry,  and  is  intended  to  fa- 
miliarize the  student  with  the  important  properties  of  the  elements 
and  their  compounds,  with  their  modes  of  preparation,  and  with 
such  tests  as  shall  lead  up  to  the  study  of  systematic  Qualitative 
Analysis;  also  to  present  the  laws  governing  chemical  reactions, 
the  meaning  of  chemical  equations,  and  the  more  recent  theories 
adopted  in  the  science. 

102.  General  Chemistry. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  admission  requirement  or  its  equiva- 
lent, and  who  are  electing  course  201.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  French,  Miss  Wegner. 

This  course  is  intended  for  those  students  who  have  offered 
Chemistry  for  entrance,  and  who  plan  to  major  in  Chemistry  in 
college.  It  aims  to  give  a  brief  intensive  review  of  the  preparatory 
work  in  Chemistry,  with  such  additional  study,  particularly  of  the 
metallic  elements  and  the  theories  of  solutions,  as  shall  prepare  the 
students  for  the  grade  II  courses  in  the  department. 

201.  Qualitative  Analysis. 

Ope7i  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20) .  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20)  or 
course  102  (4  of  ig20-2i).    Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester 

Miss  Griggs,  Miss  Warner. 

A  system  of  analysis  for  the  detection  of  the  common  metals 
and  acid  radicals  with  the  application  of  theoretical  principles  to 

■''*  Appointed  for  the  first  semester  only. 


1920-21  Chemistry  67 

the  reactions  involved.  The  laboratory  work  includes  practice  in 
the  solution  and  analysis  of  substances  unknown  to  the  student. 

202.  Quantitative  Analysis. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  (2  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Griggs,  Miss  Warner. 

This  course  is  designed  to  give  training  in  gravimetric  and  volu- 
metric analysis.  The  theories  discussed  in  course  201  are  applied 
to  the  work  of  the  laboratory,  and  problems  related  to  the  work 
are  included  in  the  class  discussions. 

203.  Qualitative  Analysis. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  {2  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Griggs. 

A  continuation  of  course  201  deahng  with  the  more  difficult  prob- 
lems of  qualitative  analysis.  A  few  of  the  rare  elements  are  in- 
cluded in  the  scheme  of  analysis. 

204.  Chemistry  in  its  Applications  to  Daily  Life.     (Not  offered  in 

1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  course  102.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  French. 

301.  Organic  Chemistry,  with  Laboratory  Work  in  Organic  Prep- 

arations. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  courses 
201  and  202  (2  arid  5  of  igig-20)  and,  by  special  permission,  to 
seniors  who  have  completed  courses  102  and  201,  or  4  of  igig-20,  or 
loi  {i  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

IV^iss  French,  Miss  Wegner. 

302.  Advanced  Laboratory  Course  in  Organic  Cheiostry. 

Open  to  stiide?its  who  have  completed  course  301  {7  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  French. 

303.  quantitatr^  analysis. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  201  and  202  (2  and  5  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Griggs. 
A  continuation  of  course  202. 


68  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

304.  Food  Analysis. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loi  or  102  (i  or  4  of 
iQip-20),  201,  202  (2  and  5  of  igig-20),  aftd  301  (7  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Baker. 

305.  Theoretical  and  Physical  Chemistry. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  301  (7  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  French. 

306.  Laboratory  Work  in  Physical  Cheaostry. 

Open  to  seniors  and  graduates  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course 
305  (8  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  French. 

307.  Inorganic  Chemistry. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loi  or  102  (i  or  4  of 
igig-20),  201  and  202  (2  and  5  of  igig-20),  and  301  (7  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Bragg. 

This  course  makes  use  of  the  laboratory  work  of  the  courses 
taken  in  preceding  years. 

ECONOMICS  AND  SOCIOLOGY 

Associate  Professor:  Jane  Isabel  Newell.  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professors:  Elizabeth  Donnan,  B.A. 

Frances  Fenton  Bernard,  Ph.D. 
Instructors:  Leila  Ruth  Albright,  M.A. 
'  Marion  Bancker,  M.A. 

Olqa  Spencer  Halsey,  M.A. 
Lecturer:  Donald  Skeele  Tucker,  M.A. 

lOL  Introduction  to  Economics  and  Sociology. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Newell,  Miss  Donnan,  Mrs.  Bernard, 
Miss  Albright,  Miss  Bancker. 
A  descriptive  course  setting  forth  the  evolution  of  industry,  the 
outstanding  features  of  present  industrial  society,  the  social  prob- 
lems involved  in  jithe  unequal  distribution  of  wealth,  and  the  pro- 
grams and  agencies  attempting  to  deal  with  these  problems. 

20L  Principles  of  Economics.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Donnan. 


1920-21  Economics  and  Sociology  69 

A  study  of  current  economic  thought — principles  of  value  and 
of  distribution, — with  some  examination  of  the  historical  develop- 
ment of  economic  theory. 

202.  An  Introduction  to  General  Sociology. 

Open  to  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Newell. 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  society — its  development  and  its 
present  structure  and  functioning. 

It  is  proposed  to  take  up:  (a)  the  environmental,  biological,  psy- 
chological, and  technological  factors  conditioning  society;  {h)  social 
relations  among  backward  peoples;  (c)  facts  and  theories  of  social 
organization  with  especial  reference  to  present  conditions. 

203.  Economic  History  of  the  United  States.     (Not  offered  in   1920- 

21.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  of  igig-20  or  course  205 
{15  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Newell. 

A  study  of  our  national  development  in  its  material  and  social 
aspects,  with  especial  emphasis  upon  the  development  of  business 
combinations  and  of  trade  unions. 

204.  EcoNOSiics  OF  Consumption.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  of  igig-20  or  course  205 
(75  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

This  course  will  deal  with  both  theoretical  and  practical  aspects 
of  the  use  of  wealth.  Some  or  all  of  the  following  topics  will  be 
discussed:  the  division  of  public  and  private  incomes  between 
use  as  capital  and  use  for  immediate  consumption  (functions  and 
limits  of  sa\ing),  ''Engel's  law,"  standards  of  Hving,  workingmen's 
budgets  and  the  minimum  wage,  Veblen's  theory  of  conspicuous 
consumption,  the  role  and  social  limits  of  luxury,  final  utility  and 
its  relation  to  expenditure.  The  function  of  women  in  directing 
household  expenditure  will  be  considered  throughout. 

205.  Introduction  to  Economic  Life. 

Open  to  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester, 

Mrs.  Bernard. 

A  brief  survey  of  modern  economic  life  with  especial  reference  to 
the  operation  of  the  money  economy.     The  topics  considered  will 


70  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

include  production,  its  factors  and  limits;    money  and  banking; 
the  fixing  of  prices  and  the  forces  determining  wages  and  other 


206.  Economic  Development.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  only  to  students  who  have  completed  course  205  {15  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

A  survey  of  the  chief  stages  of  economic  life,  in  an  effort  to 
understand  the  development  of  the  institutions  which  character- 
ize our  present-day  money  economy.  Especial  emphasis  will  be 
laid  on  the  distinctive  features  of  modern  industrialism. 

207.  Immigration. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  (i  of  iQig-20)  or 
course  205  {15  of  igig-26).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  secottd  se- 
mester. 

Mrs.  Bernard. 

A  study  of  immigration  into  the  United  States,  the  elements 
represented,  and  their  geographical  distribution;  the  social,  polit- 
ical, and  economic  influence  of  our  foreign  populations;  the  history 
of  restrictive  legislation,  and  the  arrangements  thus  far  provided 
for  the  reception  and  care  of  aliens. 

301.  Socialism  and  Social  Reform. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Mrs.  Bernard. 

A  critical  study  of  the  theoretical  bases,  ultimate  purposes  and 
present  methods  of  some  of  the  following:  individualism,  philosophic 
anarchism,  trade  unionism,  syndicalism,  co-operation,  progressivism, 
the  single  tax,  and  the  several  forms  of  sociaHsm. 

302.  Economic  History  of  England. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  {i  of  igig-20)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
secotid  semester. 

Miss  Donnan. 

This  course  will  include  a  survey  of  the  chief  stages  in  English 
economic  history,  but  especial  attention  will  be  devoted  to  the  period 
since  the  industrial  revolution. 


1920-21  Economics  and  Sociology  71 

303.  Social  Economics. 

Open  to  seniors  {and  by  special  permission  to  juniors)  who  have  com- 
pleted course  loi  (i  of  igig-20)  or  courses  205-206  {15-13  of  1919-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Albright. 

A  study  of  the  dependent,  defective,  and  delinquent  classes, 
accompanied  by  discussion  of  methods  of  dealing  with  each. 

304.  Municipal  Sociology. 

Ope7i  to  seniors  {and  by  special  permission  to  juniors)  who  have  com- 
pleted course  loi  {i  of  1919-20)  or  courses  205-206  {15-13  of  1919-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Albright. 

A  discussion  of  problems  of  community  life,  and  of  methods  of 
meeting  certain  normal  social  needs,  such  as  housing,  sanitation, 
education,  and  recreation. 

305.  Railroads:  Rates  and  Regulation. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  1919-20)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  1919-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Donnan. 

A  brief  survey  of  some  of  the  fiscal,  economic,  and  social  problems 
arising  from  our  modern  means  of  transportation.  Among  the 
topics  discussed  will  be  the  following:  history  of  American  railroad 
construction;  railway  charters;  powers  of  directors  and  stock- 
holders; nature  of  railway  securities;  financing  of  construction  and 
development  work;  inter-company  relations  and  the  construction 
of  systems;  railroad  traffic  and  rates;  history  of  American  railway 
regulation;  the  problems  and  possibilities  of  government  operation. 

306.  Corporate  Organization  and  Control. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  {i  of  1919-20)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  1919-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Donnan. 

The  development  of  large  scale  production  and  the  growth  of  cor- 
porate business;  characteristic  forms  of  industrial  combination; 
state  and  federal  regulatory  legislation  and  judicial  decisions  re- 
lating thereto;  alleged  advantages  and  evils  of  industrial  combina- 
tion; proposed  remedies  for  the  latter. 


72  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

307.  Industrial  and  Social  Legislation. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  {i  of  igiQ-2o)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  igiQ-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
first  semester. 

Miss  Halsey. 

A  study  of  industrial  and  social  conditions  and  their  regulation 
by  means  of  legislation. 

308.  The  Modern  Labor  Movement. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  iQig-20)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Halsey. 

A  study  of  modern  industrial  unrest  with  special  attention  to 
the  viewpoint  of  the  employer  and  that  of  organized  labor. 

309.  Money  and  Banking. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  {i  of  igig-20)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
first  semester. 

Miss  Donnan. 

The  course  deals  mainly  with  the  principles  of  money  and  bank- 
ing, but  it  is  also  designed  to  give  the  student  some  acquaintance 
with  the  history  and  chief  characteristics  of  t>^ical  modern  systems 
of  banking. 

310.  General  Principles  of  Taxation. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  {i  of  igig-20)  or 
courses  205-206  {15-13  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Mr.  Tucker. 

This  course  will  deal  with  the  principles  of  taxation  with  special 
reference  to  conditions  in  the  United  States.  Each  student  will 
be  required  to  make  a  study  of  the  tax  system  of  some  one  state 
or  municipality. 


1920-21  Education  73 


EDUCATION 

PROFESSORS:    ARTHUR    ORLO    NORTON,    M.A. 

ANNA  Jane  McKeaq,  Ph.D.,  LL.D. 
Assistant:  Pauline  Holmes,  B.A. 
Graduate  Assistant:  Helen  Parker  Smith,  B.A. 

The  Department  of  Education  offers  both  undergraduate  and 
graduate  courses.  Six  hours  of  work  may  be  counted  toward  the 
B.A.  degree.     Full  work  for  the  M.A.  degree  is  offered. 

201.  Modern  Education:  Principles  and  Institutions. 

Open  to  juniors  who  have  completed  or  who  are  taking  the  required 
course  in  Philosophy,  and  to  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Norton,  Miss  McKeag. 

This  course  is  organized  to  meet  the  needs  not  only  of  prospec- 
tive teachers  but  also  of  all  who  are  interested  in  the  intelligent 
direction  of  education  as  a  phase  of  civic  or  social  service.  Its  pur- 
pose is  to  give  a  general  surv^ey  of  the  practices,  theories,  and 
problems  of  modern  education. 

The  work  of  the  course  is  illustrated  throughout  the  year  by 
visits  to  assigned  schools  for  the  observation  of  children  and  of 
class-room  practice,  by  examples  of  school  work,  and  by  lantern 
sHdes. 

202.  History  of  Education. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  the  required  course 
in  Philosophy.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Norton. 

From  the  point  of  view  of  this  course  modern  education  appears 
as  the  outcome  of  a  long  series  of  historic  events,  the  effects  of 
which  are  visible  in  the  ideals,  studies,  modes  of  teaching,  and 
organization  of  our  present  schools,  colleges,  and  universities. 
The  purpose  of  the  year's  work  is  to  study  in  some  detail  the  most 
important  events  in  the  history  of  European  and  American  edu- 
cation, and  their  effects  on  the  present  course  of  educational  affairs. 

The  lectures  are  constantly  illustrated  by  original  manuscripts, 
facsimiles,  early  editions  of  noted  text-books,  and  similar  historical 
documents,  by  translations  from  the  sources,  and  by  numerous 
lantern  slides. 

301.  Secondary  Education. 

Open  by  permission  to  seniors  who  have  completed  a  full  course  in 
Education,  and  to  graduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 


74  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

The  history  and  principles  of  secondary  education,  with  special 
reference  to  the  high  schools  of  the  United  States.  A  study  will  be 
made  of  approved  methods  of  teaching  English,  foreign  languages, 
sciences,  mathematics,  and  history  in  high  schools.  Opportunity 
will  be  given  for  observation  of  the  work  of  specially  successful 
high  school  teachers  in  the  subject  which  the  student  expects  to 
teach. 

In  connection  with  this  course  the  department  of  Education 
requires  from  graduates  a  semester  of  systematic  practice  teaching 
in  a  high  school,  to  be  done  as  independent  work,  under  the  guid- 
ance of  the  department  and  with  the  co-operation  of  the  principal 
of  the  high  school.  Practice  in  teaching  is  not  open  to  under- 
graduates. 

302.  Principles  and  Problems  of  Religious  Education.     (Not  given 

in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  Education  201  {6  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

The  aims  of  religious  education  in  the  Hght  of  the  fundamental 
characteristics  and  present  tendencies  of  Christianity.  The  reli- 
gious development  of  the  individual.  The  selection  and  use  of 
BibUcal  material  for  different  ages.  The  Sunday  school:  its 
organization,  curricula,  and  methods  of  teaching;  its  relation  to 
the  home. 

303.  Principles  and  Methods   of  teaching  French  in   Secondary 

Schools.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  French  30 §  (4  of 
jgig-20),  and  who  have  also  completed  or  are  taking  Education  201 
(6  of  jgig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  teach  the  students  how  to  impart  to 
their  pupils,  in  the  shortest  possible  time,  a  speaking,  understanding, 
reading,  and  writing  knowledge  of  French.  After  a  survey  of  the 
general  difficulties  arising  from  English  habits  of  thought  and  of 
expression  already  formed,  the  instructor  will  deal  with  the  several 
aspects  of  modern  language  work,  such  as  the  teaching  of  vocabu- 
lary, of  grammar,  of  composition,  and  of  translation;  the  selection 
and  use  of  books,  the  correction  and  elimination  of  errors,  the 
equipment  of  the  teacher  and  of  her  department  in  the  high  school. 

321.  Problems  in  Education.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  a  full  course  in  Education. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 


1920-21  Education  75 

The  subject-matter  of  this  course  will  vary  from  year  to  year 
in  accordance  with  the  equipment  and  needs  of  students.  The 
topics  for  study  will  be  chosen  from  the  field  of  experimental  or 
statistical  investigation  or  from  that  of  the  general  science  of  edu- 
cation. 

322.  The  History,  Theory,  and  Problems  of  the  Kindergarten.     (Not 

given  in  1920-21.) 
Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  Philosophy  loi,  102,  or  an 
equivalent,  and  one  full  course  in  Education.     {Courses  322  and  323 
must  ordinarily  be  taken  together.)     Four  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

The  reconstruction  of  educational  theories  in  the  eighteenth 
and  early  nineteenth  centuries.  The  relation  of  this  reconstruc- 
tion to  the  work  of  Froebel.  The  origins  and  history  of  the  kinder- 
garten movement  in  Europe  and  America.  Exposition  and  criti- 
cism of  the  theory  of  kindergarten  practice.  Other  forms  of  sub- 
primary  education:  the  Waverley  plan,  the  Montessori  methods; 
their  reladon  to  kindergarten  practice.  The  kindergarten  and  the 
primary  school. 

323.  Kindergarten     Practice:      Materials,     Methods,     Exercises, 

Technique.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  Philosophy  loi,  102,  or  an 
equivalent,  and  one  full  course  in  Education  {see  note  below).  Four 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Course  323  deals  in  general  with  practical  apphcations  of  the 
theory  given  in  course  322.  It  includes  on  the  one  hand  a  detailed 
study  of  the  materials,  devices,  exercises,  and  methods  of  the 
kindergarten,  and  on  the  other,  extensive  observation  of  their 
use,  with  practice  in  teaching. 

Note. — Courses  322  and  323  must  ordinarily  be  taken  together. 
They  will  occupy  two  thirds  of  the  student's  time  for  the  year. 
Students  who  are  preparing  to  conduct  kindergartens  or  kinder- 
garten training  classes  are  required  to  take  a  third  course,  usually 
in  Education,  to  be  determined  on  consultation  with  the  head  of 
the  department  of  Education.  Ability  to  play  on  the  piano  the 
music  of  kindergarten  songs  and  games  is  a  prerequisite  of  these 
courses. 

324.  Elementary  Education:  History,  Theory,  Practice,  and  Prob- 

lems.    (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  Philosophy  loi,  or  an  equivalent, 
and  one  full  course  in  Education.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 


76  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Course  324  includes  a  brief  survey  of  the  history  of  elementary 
education  in  the  United  States,  a  detailed  study  of  present  elemen- 
tary school  practice,  a  critical  discussion  of  the  principles  which 
underlie  that  practice,  and  the  investigation  of  selected  problems  in 
elementary  education. 

The  purpose  of  the  course  is  to  give  to  each  student  a  knowledge 
of  existing  conditions  and  problems,  some  facility  in  handling  the 
tools  and  methods  of  practical  research  in  this  field,  and  ability  to 
formulate  her  views  as  to  the  ideas,  scope,  and  work  of  the  elemen- 
tary schools. 

ENGLISH 
I.     English  Literature 

Professors:  Katharine  Lee  Bates,*  M.A.,  Litt.D. 

ViDA    DUTTON    SCUDDER,^    M.A. 

Margaret  Pollock  Sherwood,  Ph.D.,  L.H.D. 
Alice  Vinton  Waite,  M.A. 
Martha  Hale  Shackford,   Ph.D. 
Associate  Professors:  Laura  Emma  Lockwood,  Ph.D. 
Charles  Lowell  Young,  b.A. 
Martha  Pike  Conant,  Ph.D. 
Alice  Ida  Perry  Wood,  Ph.D. 
Laura  Alandis  Hibbard,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professors:  Elizabeth  Wheeler  Manwaring,  B.A. 
Annie  Kimball  Tuell,  M.A. 
Instructors:  Mary  Bowen  Brainerd,  Ph.D. 

Katherine  Canby  Balderston,  M.A. 

101.  Outline  History  of  English  Literature. 

Open  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  and  juniors.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Wood,  Miss  Hibbard,  Miss  Tuell,  Miss  Balderston. 

The  course  traces  the  essential  outlines  of  EngHsh  literary  history, 
presents  the  leading  types  of  prose  and  poetry,  and  gives  training  in 
critical  appreciation.  The  work  is  conducted  by  lectures  and  by 
studies  of  selected  masterpieces. 

102.  The  Elizabethan  Lyric. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  in  preparatory  school  an  approved 
course  in  the  history  of  English  Literature.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Mrs.  Brainerd. 

The  course  is  for  students  who  wish  to  begin  their  work  in  the 
department  with  intensive  study  in  one  Hterary  period.     The  mate- 

» Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave, 
s  Absent  on  leave. 


1920-21  English  77 

rial  used  is  the  non-dramatic  poetry  in  the  time  of  Elizabeth  and  the 
Stuarts,  especially  the  lyrics  of  Sidney,  Shakespeare,  Ben  Jonson, 
Donne,  Herrick,  Herbert,  Milton,  and  the  cavalier  poets. 

103.  Spenser. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  in  preparatory  school  an  approved 
course  in  the  history  of  English  Literature.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  second  semester. 

Mrs.  Brainerd. 

This  course  should  follow  course  102  for  students  beginning  their 
work  in  the  department  without  taking  course  loi.  The  greater 
part  of  the  poetry  of  Spenser  will  be  read.  The  minor  poems  will 
be  studied  for  their  varied  forms  and  poetic  content  in  relation  to 
other  literature.  The  Faerie  Queene  will  be  considered  in  relation 
to  other  romantic  epics  and  for  its  embodiment  of  Renaissance 
ideas  as  well  as  for  its  poetic  quaUties. 

201.  English  Masterpieces. 

Open  only  to  seniors  who  have  completed  no  full  course  in  the  department, 
or  course  101  (i  of  igig-20)  only.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Conant. 

The  course  is  intended  to  develop  a  sympathetic  appreciation 
of  literature  through  the  study  of  chosen  masterpieces.  The 
work  includes  readings  from  Wordsworth,  Coleridge,  Shelley, 
Carlyle,  Ruskin,  Arnold,  Browning,  Shakespeare,  Scott,  Jane 
Austen,  and  Thackeray;  also,  if  time  permits,  from  modern  drama 
and  recent  verse. 

202.  American  Literature. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a 
grade  I  course,  and  to  all  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Young. 

The  course  attempts  to  give  a  comprehensive  account  of  American 
literature.  It  studies  the  Colonial  and  Revolutionary  sources  of 
American  idealism,  the  rise  of  imaginative  Hterature  in  the  Middle 
States,  the  florescence  of  Puritan  culture  in  New  England,  the 
achievement  of  democratic  nationahty  in  the  mid-nineteenth  cen- 
tury, the  literature  of  the  country  at  large  after  the  Civil  War,  and 
the  most  recent  departures  in  Uf  e  and  hterature. 

203.  Dryden  and  Pope.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  loi.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 


78  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

The  course  centers  in  the  personaUty,  work,  and  influence  of 
Dryden  and  of  Pope,  and  includes  study  of  important  contem- 
porary writers,  and  the  social,  poHtical,  and  historical  background. 

204.  Milton. 

Ope7i  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a 
grade  I  course.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lockwood. 

The  primary  object  of  the  coiarse  is  the  critical  study  of  Milton 
as  a  master  in  lyric,  epic,  and  dramatic  poetry,  and  as  a  writer  of 
notable  prose.  The  character  and  genius  of  the  poet  are  considered 
as  influenced  by  the  poHtical  and  rehgious  conflict  of  the  times. 
Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  comparison  of  Milton's  work  with 
that  of  other  great  writers  who  have  used  the  same  Hterary  forms. 

205.  The  British  Ballad. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
a  grade  I  course.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hibbard. 

The  course  studies  the  Enghsh  and  Scottish  popular  ballad  and 
the  modern  Hterary  baUad.  Special  attention  wiU  be  given  to  folk 
lore  elements  in  the  baUad  and  to  the  significance  of  the  recent  re- 
vival of  interest  in  folk  dance  and  story. 

206.  Development  of  English  Prose  Fiction  to  1830. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a 
grade  I  course.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Tuell. 

The  course  outHnes  the  progress  of  modern  English  prose  fiction, 
from  its  rise  in  the  Elizabethan  Age  through  its  eighteenth  century 
development  in  Defoe,  Richardson,  Fielding,  Goldsmith,  Fanny 
Burney,  etc.,  ending  with  Jane  Austen,  Scott,  and  the  period  of 
Scott  influence.  Its  main  emphasis  is  upon  the  novel  of  manners, 
with  consideration  of  various  other  types. 

207.  Introduction  to  Arthurian  Romance. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a 
grade  I  course.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  Hibbard. 

The  course  studies  in  the  first  semester  the  Arthurian  Chronicles, 
Marie  de  France  and  Chretien  de  Troies  in  translation,  with  close 


1920-21  English  79 

reading  of  Malory's  Morte  Darthur  and  with  general  lectures.  In 
the  second  semester,  the  work  deals  with  the  cycles  of  Merhn, 
Tristan,  Gawain,  Lancelot,  and  the  Grail;  the  English  metrical 
Arthurian  romances  and,  as  time  permits,  modem  forms  of  the 
Arthurian  story. 

208.  English  Literature  or  the  Fourteenth  Century. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
a  grade  I  course;  to  sophomores  who  have  completed  English  Com- 
position loi  (i  of  igig-2o)  with  credit  and  who  plan  a  major  conclud- 
ing with  course  308  {10  of  iQig-20);  to  juniors  who  plan  a  major 
concluding  with  course  308  {10  of  jgi^zo).  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Shackford. 

The  course  centers  in  a  study  of  Chaucer's  development  as  a 
poet.  Attention  is  paid  to  his  chief  Latin,  French,  and  Italian 
sources,  and  to  contemporary  English  literature  which  illustrates 
the  life  and  ideals  of  the  Middle  Ages.  Special  study  is  made  of  a 
few  metrical  romances  and  of  Piers  Plowman. 

209.  Versification. 

Open  to  students,  except  freshmen,  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
one  full  course  in  the  department  of  English  Literature,  and  also  to 
those  majoring  in  English  Composition.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manwaring. 

The  course  has  as  its  object  in  general  such  study  of  the  principles 
of  English  versification  as  m.ay  give  to  the  student  of  Uterature  a 
keener  appreciation  of  poetic  expression;  and  in  particular,  for 
those  interested  in  writing  verse,  opportunity  for  experiment  and 
criticism. 

SOL  Social  Ideals  in  English  Letters.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in  English  Liter- 
ature or  Economics  or  History,  or  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in 
any  of  these  departments  and  are  taking  another  course.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

The  course  studies  the  expression  in  English  Uterature  of  social 
compunction,  social  criticisrfi,  and  social  ideals.  It  covers  a  swift 
surv^ey  from  the  time  of  Piers  Plowman  to  that  of  Blake,  and  a 
closer  consideration  of  the  literature  of  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth 
centuries  in  its  social  bearing. 


80  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

302.  Tendencies   of   Twentieth   Century  Poetry.     (Not  offered  in 

1920-21.) 
Open  only  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  already  completed  two 
full  courses  in  the  department.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

The  course  proposes  to  point  out  the  special  significance,  as 
related  to  the  English  tradition,  of  the  work  of  certain  contemporary 
poets,  Enghsh  and  American,  especially  those  who  have  won  dis- 
tinction since  1900. 

303.  Contemporary  Drama. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  full  course  of 
grade  III  in  the  department.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Waite. 

The  modern  Enghsh  drama  is  considered  in  relation  to  par- 
allel European  drama. 

304.  Development  of  English  Drama. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  a  grade  I  course,  and 
have  completed  or  are  taking  a  full  year  course,  or  two  semester  courses 
of  grade  II;  also  to  juniors  who  are  beginning  their  major  with  course 
208  {8  of  igig-20),  and  propose  to  complete  it  with  course  308  {10  of 
jgig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wood. 

The  course  traces  the  history  of  Enghsh  drama  from  the  begin- 
nings in  folk-plays  and  the  liturgy  of  the  Church,  through  the 
INIiracles  and  Moralities,  the  Ehzabethan  dramatists,  and  the 
comedy  and  tragedy  of  the  seventeenth  and  the  eighteenth  cen- 
turies, to  the  final  development  into  contemporary  forms. 

305.  Shakespeare:  Selected  Plays. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  a  grade  I  course^ 
and  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  full  year  course  or  two  semester 
courses  of  grade  II;  also  to  juniors  who  are  beginning  their  major 
with  course  208  (8  of  igig-20),  and  propose  to  complete  it  with  course 
308  (10  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Conant. 

Close  study  of  six  plays,  selected  to  illustrate  Shakespeare's 
earlier  and  later  work.  The  course  emphasizes  the  literary  study  of 
Shakespeare.  It  gives  opportunity  for  training  in  imaginative, 
scholarly,  vital  study  of  the  text.  For  1920-21  the  plays  are  Twelfth 
Night,  Romeo  and  Juliet,  II  Henry  IV,  Hamlet,  Antony  and  Cleo- 
patra, and  The  Winter's  Tale. 


1920-21  English  81 

306.  Victorian  Prose. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  a  grade  I  course,  and 
have  completed  or  are  taking  a  full  year  course  or  two  semester  courses, 
of  grade  II.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Tuell. 

The  course  considers,  with  the  necessary  reference  to  historical 
background,  the  distinctive  values  of  Victorian  prose,  making  a 
comparatively  even  division  of  time  between  the  essay  and  the 
novel.  The  stress  in  class  is  laid  upon  Dickens,  Carlyle,  Newman, 
Thackeray,  George  Ehot,  Ruskin,  Arnold,  Meredith,  with  briefer 
study  of  the  minor  novelists,  and  some  notice  of  late  Victorians  in 
their  contact  with  the  present  era. 

307.  English  Poetry  of  the  Nineteenth  Century. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  a  grade  I  course,  and 
have  completed  or  are  taking  a  full  year  course,  or  two  semester  courses, 
of  grade  II.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Sherwood. 

The  course  considers  the  work  of  the  great  Georgian  and  Vic- 
torian poets  in  their  relation  to  one  another  and  to  contemporary 
thought.  Extended  study  is  given  to  Wordsworth  and  Coleridge; 
Shelley  and  Keats;  Tennyson  and  Browning;  with  briefer  readings 
from  Byron,  Scott,  Landor,  Clough,  Arnold,  Rossetti,  Morris,  and 
Swinburne. 

308.  Historical  Development  of  English  Literature. 

Open  to  graduates,  and  required  of  seniors  who  are  majoring  in  English 
Literature  and  have  not  had  course  loi  (i  of  igig-2o)  or  its  equivalent. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lock  wood. 

The  course  proposes  a  study  of  the  development  of  English 
literature  from  the  time  of  Beowulf  to  the  end  of  the  Victorian  age. 
It  aims  to  focus  attention  upon  successive  phases  of  national  thought 
and  hfe  as  expressed  in  salient  and  representative  books. 

309.  Shakespeare.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi,  ajid  have 
completed  or  are  taking  a  full  year  course,  or  two  semester  courses,  of 
grade  II;  also  to  juniors  who  are  beginning  their  major  with  course  208. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

Shakespeare's  plays  and  sonnets  wiU  all  be  read  and  discussed, 
and  a  few  selected  plays  will  be  closely  studied.     The  Tudor  and 


82  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Stuart  times,  and  Shakespeare's  life  and  art,  as  changing  with  the 
times,  will  form  the  background  of  the  work. 

321.  Modern  Authors. 

Ope7t  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
full  courses  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Shackford. 

Two  or  more  authors  are  chosen  each  year  for  special  study. 
In  1920-21  the  choice  is  Wordsworth,  Keats,  and  Browning. 

322.  English  Romanticism.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
full  courses  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Sherwood. 

A  study  of  the  Romantic  Movement  in  England,  from  its  begin- 
nings in  the  eighteenth  century,  on  through  the  work  of  the  early 
nineteenth  century  poets.  Certain  phases  of  the  relation  of  Eng- 
lish to  German  literature  and  to  French  literature  during  the  period 
of  reaction  are  studied. 

323.  Critical  Studies  in  English  Drama.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates  and  to  approved  seniors.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

The  course  attempts  to  give  graduate  training  in  literary  inves- 
tigation. To  each  student  is  assigned  some  special  problem  of 
source,  authorship,  or  the  like,  which  she  pursues  till  her  conclusion 
is  reached,  reporting  progress  from  week  to  week  in  the  seminar. 

324.  Special  Studies  in  American  Literature. 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  are  making  a  twelve- 
hour  major.  Of  the  three  other  courses,  one  must  be  course  202.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Young. 

The  course  studies  the  interpretation  of  American  hfe  in  the  na- 
tional literature. 

325.  Beginnings    of   the    English   Renaissance    from    Caxton    to 

Shakespeare.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
full  courses  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Conant. 


1920-21  English  83 

The  course  aims  to  give  graduate  training,  and  so  to  present 
the  beginnings  of  the  English  Renaissance  that  the  student  may 
rightly  estimate  the  achievements  of  the  great  Elizabethans. 

326.  Medleval  English  Literature. 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
full  courses  {not  including  course  208)  in  the  department.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hibbard. 

The  course  introduces  students  to  the  types  of  literature  growing 
out  of  the  social  and  rehgious  movements  of  the  thirteenth  and  four- 
teenth centuries.  Extended  study  is  given  to  the  works  of  Chaucer 
and  to  the  problems  in  criticism  and  scholarship  to  which  they  give 
rise. 

II.     English  Composition 

PROFESSOR:    SOPHIE    CHANTAL    HART,    M.A. 

Associate  Professors:  Agnes  Frances  Perkins,  M.A. 

Josephine  Harding  Batchelder,^  M.A. 

Amy  Kelly,  M.A. 

Helen  Sard  Hughes,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professors:  Elizabeth  Wheeler  Manwaring,  B.A. 

Alfred  Dwight  Sheffield,  M.A. 

Annie  Kimball  Tuell,  M.A. 

Frances  Lester  Warner,  B.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:    HeLENE    BuHLERT    BULLOCK,    M.A. 

Elisabeth  Wilkins  Thomas,  M.A. 
Frances  Bradshaw  Blanshard,  M.A. 
101  f.  General  Survey. 

Required  of  freshmen.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Perkins,  Miss  Kelly, 

Mr.  Sheffeeld,  Miss  Tuell,  Miss  Warner, 

Mrs.  Bullock,  Miss  Thomas,  Mrs.  Blanshard. 

First  semester:  expository  writing,  v,ith  emphasis  on  structure. 
Weekly  themes.  Second  semester:  expository  writing,  critical  and 
interpretative;  description;  simple  narrative.  Fortnightly  themes 
or  their  equivalent. 

102.  Intermediate  Course  in  Expository  Writing. 

Required  of  students  who  have  made  D  grade  in  the  second  semester  of 
course  loi  (i  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  one  semester. 

Mr.  Sheffleld. 

J  Absent  on  leave. 

t  If  a  student  submits  papers  notably  deficient  in  English  as  part  of  her  work,  in  any 
department,  she  will  incur  a  condition  in  English  Composition,  whether  or  not  she  has  com- 
pleted the  requirement  in  English  Composition. 


84  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

201.  Oral  Exposition. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of 
igiQ-2o) .     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Sheffield. 

The  analysis  of  contemporary  subjects,  and  the  preparation  of 
written  outlines  and  of  speeches  based  upon  them. 

202.  Special  Types  of  Oral  Exposition. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of 
igig-2o).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Sheffield. 
This  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  201. 

The  work  deals  with  the  methods  of  organization  and  presenta- 
tion in  group  discussion. 

203.  Advanced  Expository  Writing. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of 
igigt-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Perkins,  Miss  Hughes. 

A  critical  study  of  the  abstract,  the  editorial,  the  review,  the 
special  article,  as  exempHfied  in  the  newspaper  and  the  weekly  peri- 
odical.    Fortnightly  themes. 

204.  Advanced  Expository  Writing. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (z  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Perkins,  Miss  Hughes. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  203.  The  essay  form, 
biography,  the  critical  review,  the  sketch,  the  interpretative  study 
of  prose  style.     Fortnightly  themes  or  their  equivalent. 

205.  Argumentation  and  Debates. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kelly. 
Debates  throughout  the  year. 

301.  Narrative  Writing. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  10 1  (i  of  igig- 
20).     Two  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Manwaring. 


1920-21  English  85 

Four  narratives,  approximately  i,8oo  words  each.  Study  of 
principles  and  forms  of  narrative  writing,  including  analysis  of  one 
novel. 

302.  Short  Themes. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of 
igig-2o).     Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Manwaring. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  301. 

Practice  in  writing  briefly  on  many  sorts  of  subjects  to  increase 
suppleness  and  precision  of  style,  with  especial  consideration  of 
diction  and  sentence  form  and  rhythm. 

Short  themes.  Reading  and  class  discussion  of  the  theory  and 
practice  of  various  writers. 

303.  The  Theory  and  History  of  Criticism. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hart. 

Lectures  on  the  critical  theory  of  Plato  and  Aristotle  and  on  the 
more  important  Enghsh  and  French  critics. 

304.  Advanced  Course  in  English  Composition. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  courses  201.  202,  or  20 j.  204  or 
205  or  301.  302.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hart. 

Studies  in  exposition,  description,  and  narration,  with  one  piece 
of  dramatization  or  an  original  play.     Frequent  practice  in  writing. 


III.     English  Language 

Associate  Professor:  Laura  Emma  Lockwood,  Ph.D.  (Chairman). 
Professor:  Alice  Vinton  Waite,  M.A. 
Assistant  Professor:  Alfred  Dwiqht  Sheffield,  M.A: 

301.  Old  English. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  a  year  of  language 
in  college.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Sheffield. 

A  study  of  the  grammar  and  vocabulary  of  Old  English.  The 
reading  of  Beowulf  and  of  selections  from  old  Enghsh  poetry  and 
prose. 


86  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

302.  History  or  the  English  Language,     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Waite. 

Origin  and  structure  of  the  English  Language  in  vocabulary, 
grammatical  inflections,  and  syntax  as  the  basis  of  modern  usage. 

303.  Seminar  in  Old  English.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  department. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lockwood. 

A  study  of  Old  English  inflections,  phonology,  and  syntax.  The 
reading  of  the  best  pieces  of  literature  in  Old  Enghsh  prose  and 
poetry.  A  particular  problem  in  either  literature  or  language  is 
assigned  to  each  student  for  investigation. 


FRENCH 

Professor:  Louis  Perdriau,'  Lie.  es  L. 
Assistant  Professor:  Eunice  Clara  Smith-Goard,^  M.A. 

Visiting  Professor:  Blanche  Conorton,  Agregee  d-histoire. 

Instructors:  Mathilde  Boutron  Damazy,  B.  es  L.  (Chairman). 
Gladys  Priscilla  Haines,  B.A, 
Dorothy  Warner  Dennis,  B.A. 
Florence  Beard  Bracq,  M.A. 
Marthe  Pugny. 
Ruth  Elvira  Clark,  Litt.D. 
Marie  Elizabeth  Ponsolle,  Professorat  (langues). 

All  courses  beginning  with  course  loi  are  conducted  in  French. 

101 +.  Elementary    Course.     French    phonetics,  grammar,    composi- 
tion, reading,  exercises  in  speaking,  and  dictation. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Dennis,  Miss  Bracq. 

The  course  includes  (i)  a  practical  study  of  French  pronunciation, 
phonetic  drill;  (2)  the  practical  study  of  French  grammar;  (3) 
readings  on  French  hfe  and  French  institutions. 

'  Absent  on  Sabbatical  leave. 

'  Absent  on  leave. 

J  First -year  French  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after  the 
sophomore  year,  nor  second-year  French  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  French  loi  and 
German  loi  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


1920-21  French  87 

102t.  Intermediate  Course.     French  phonetics,  syntax,  composition; 

READINGS  FROM  CONTEMPORARY  AUTHORS  OF  NOTE;    EXERCISES  IN 
SPEAKING;    WRITING  FROM   DICTATION. 

Open  to  all  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-26),  or 
the  two  unit  admission  requirement  in  French.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Dennis,  Miss  Bracq. 

The  course  includes  (i)  a  practical  study  of  French  pronuncia- 
tion with  phonetic  drill;  (2)  a  systematic  review  of  syntax  intro, 
ductory  to  theme  writing  and  oral  narrative;  (3)  selected  readings- 
prepared  and  sight,  from  modern  writers. 


103.  TmED  French  Course. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  French,  also  to  those  who  have  completed  course  102  (2  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Haines,  Miss  Dennis,  Miss  Pugny,  Miss  Clark. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  the  acquisition  by  the  student  of  a  reason- 
able degree  of  proficiency  in  the  use  of  spoken  and  written  French, 
both  as  an  end  in  itself  and  as  a  preparation  for  more  advanced 
work  in  language  and  in  Hterature.  It  includes  a  careful  study  of 
pronunciation,  with  phonetic  drill;  grammar  and  free  composi- 
tion, with  frequent  written  exercises  and  themes;  varied  reading 
with  the  apphcation  of  lecture  expliquie  methods;  it  affords  oppor- 
tunity for  constant  practice  in  the  written  and  the  spoken  language. 


201.  Practical  French.    Translation,  themes,  and  oral  composition. 

Open,  in  ig20-2i,  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  3.  5,  or 
24.  2g  of  igig-20;  thereafter,  to  students  who  have  completed  course 
10 J.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Ponsolle. 

This  course  continues  the  plan  of  course  103  with  additional 
emphasis  on  fluency  and  flexibihty  in  the  use  of  the  language. 
Together  with  the  various  kinds  of  work  enumerated,  it  includes  the 
careful  study  of  selected  passages  of  prose  and  poetry  {lecture  ex- 
pliquee)  and  more  extensive  parallel  readings. 

t  First-year  French  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after  the 
sophomore  year,  nor  second-year  French  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  French  loi  and 
German  loi  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


88  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

202.  Practical  Phonetics  with  Advanced  Grammar  and  Composition. 

Open,  in  ip20-2i,  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  3.  5,  or 
24.  2g  of  igip-20;  thereafter,  to  students  who  have  completed  course 
103.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Clark. 

The  course  consists  of  a  series  of  lessons  in  practical  phonetics 
and  advanced  grammar,  with  weekly  written  or  oral  exercises  based 
on  the  lessons. 


301.  The  Classical  Period  of  French  Literature. 

Open,  in  ig20-2i,  to  seniors  who  have  completed  courses  3.  5,  or 
24.  2g  of  igig-20,  and  to  juniors  and  sophomores  who  have  com- 
pleted courses  3.  5  or  24.  2g  with  a  grade  of  B  in  the  second  semester. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Damazy,  Miss  Ponsolle. 

As  an  introduction  to  this  course,  a  short  study  will  be  made 
of  the  origin  of  French  classicism  in  the  Renaissance  movement  of 
the  sixteenth  century;  but  the  main  object  of  the  course  will  be 
the  study  of  the  evolution  of  French  classical  Hterature  during  the 
seventeenth  century,  in  the  works  of  the  great  dramatists  and  prose 
writers:  Descartes,  Corneille,  Racine,  MoUere,  La  Fontaine, 
Boileau,  Mme.  de  Sevigne,  Pascal,  etc. 


302.  Literature  of  the  French  Revolution. 

Open,  in  ig20-2i,  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  (12  of 
igig-20),  thereafter,  to  students  having  completed  course  201.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Damazy. 

This  course  aims  to  give  a  comprehensive  view  of  the  Hterature 
of  the  French  Revolution  as  exemphfied  in  certain  representative 
philosophers  and  orators:  Voltaire,  J.  J.  Rousseau,  Diderot,  Mira- 
beau,  Robespierre,  etc. 

A  special  study  will  be  made  of  the  origin  of  French  Romanticism 
as  found  in  the  work  of  Rousseau  and  his  disciples  in  France  and 
abroad. 

303.  The  Romantic  and  the  Realistic  Periods  of  the  Nineteenth 

Century. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  302  {g  of  igig-20) .  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Damazy. 


1920-21  French  89 

This  course  treats  of  French  romanticism  as  expressed  in  the 
works  of  the  masters  of  its  various  forms — criticism,  drama,  lyric, 
novel.  The  writers  studied  include:  Lamartine,  Hugo,  Vigny, 
Musset,  G.  Sand,  Balzac,  Flaubert,  Taine,  Renan,  etc, 

304.  Conversation  and  Jouiinal  Club. 

Open,  in  1920-21,  to  juniors  and  settlors  who  have  completed  course 
301  {12  of  ipiQ-20).    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Conorton. 

Oral  reports,  reviews,  and  discussion  of  important  magazine 
articles,  together  with  a  short  account,  usually  at  each  meeting  of 
the  class,  of  current  events  in  France.  The  aim  of  the  course  is 
twofold:  practice  in  the  use  of  the  spoken  language,  and  a  brief 
study  of  the  France  of  to-day  and  of  French  institutions. 

305.  Intensive  Reading  and  Advanced  Composition. 

Open,  in  1920-21,  to  students  who  have  completed  course  joi  {12  of 
1919-20),  also  to  seniors  taking  course  joi  {12  of  1919-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Conorton. 

Together  with  the  intensive  reading  of  short  passages  widely 
varied  in  character  the  plan  of  this  course  includes  practical  pho- 
netics for  continued  training  in  pronunciation,  grammar,  and  com- 
position. French  '' lecture  expliquee"  methods,  emphasis  on  oral 
work. 

307.  Contemporary  French  Literature  from  the  beginning  of  the 
Naturalistic  Period  to  the  Present  Time. 

Open,  in  1920-21,  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course 
301  (12  of  1919-20),  thereafter  to  seniors  who  have  completed  either 
course  joi  or  courses  302  and  303.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Conorton. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  give  to  advanced  students  general 
information  about  contemporary  French  novelists,  poets,  dram- 
atists, critics,  and  philosophers.  The  authors  studied  as  repre- 
sentative of  the  contemporary  French  period  are:  E.  Zola,  G.  de 
Maupassant,  A.  Daudet,  P.  Loti,  P.  Bourget,  A.  France,  M.  Barres, 
Baudelaire,  Leconte  de  Lisle,  J.  M.  de  Heredia,  F.  Coppee,  Sully- 
Prudhomme,  P.  Verlaine,  H.  de  Regnier,  Madame  de  Noailles; 
M.  Maeterlinck,  E.  Rostand;  F.  Brunetiere,  J.  Lemaitre;  H. 
Poincare,  H.  Bergson,  and  the  war- writers. 


90  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

308.  Studies  in  Style.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7.     One  hour  a  week  for 
a  year. 

This  course  is  related  to  course  307. 

321.  Old   French  and   Old   French   Literature.      (Not   offered  in 

1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  department. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Phonology  with  reading  of  La  Vie  de  St.  Alexis,  La  Chanson  de 
Roland,  Aucassin  et  Nicolete,  Chretien  de  Troyes.  Gaston  Paris: 
Extraits  des  Chroniqueurs  franqais.  Selections  from  Constans: 
Chrestomathie  de  Vancien  franqais.  The  history  of  the  French 
language  is  traced  from  its  origin  to  the  present  time,  and  illus- 
trated by  texts  read.  For  reference,  Darmesteter:  Grammaire 
Historique;  Gaston  Paris:  Manuel  de  la  litterature  franqaise  du 
moyen  age;  also  standard  works  on  the  subject  in  the  college  Hbrary. 
Lectures,  critical  reading. 

322.  Old  Provencal.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduate  sttddents  only. 

This  course  is  complementarj'-  to  course  321.  Together  these 
courses  mark  the  synchronic  lines  of  development  of  the  langue 
d'oil  and  the  langue  d'oc. 

The  department  is  prepared  to  direct  research  work  for  graduate 
students  in  special  subjects  in  Old  French  and  Old  French  litera- 
ture, also  in  modern  French  language  and  literature. 

GEOLOGY  AND   GEOGRAPHY 

Professor:  Elizabeth  Florette  Fisher,  B.S. 
Associate  Professor:  Mary  Jean  Lanier,  B.S. 

Instructor:  Margaret  Terrell  Parker,  B.S. 

ASSISTANT:    FRANCES   VANDERVOORT  TRIPP,    B.A. 

Laboratory  Assistant:  Esther  Rippard  Trethaway,  B.A. 
101.  General  Geology. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fisher,  Miss  Lanier,  Miss  Parker,  Miss  Tripp. 

First  Semester — Physiography,  A  study  of  the  work  which  wind, 
waves,  rivers,  glaciers,  volcanoes,  and  earth  movements  have  done 
and  are  doing  to  shape  the  earth's  surface.     This  study  explains  the 


1920-21  Geology  and  Geography  91 

origin  of  hills  and  valleys,  of  plains,  plateaus  and  mountains,  of  con- 
tinents and  ocean  basins,  and  makes  clear  the  ways  in  which  these 
surface  features  have  affected  man's  life  on  the  earth. 

Second  Semester — Historical  Geology.  The  origin  of  the  earth 
and  its  history  from  the  time  of  its  origin  until  the  present.  The 
evolution  of  Hfe  on  the  earth  traced  from  its  earliest  known  appear- 
ance through  its  recent  development. 

Lectures  and  recitations  are  accompanied  by  parallel  studies  in 
the  laboratory  and  by  field  and  museum  excursions. 

Geology 

201.  Earth  Evolution. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  completed 
Geology  loi  (8  of  igig-20)  or  i  of  igig-20.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Miss  Parker. 

The  origin  and  evolution  of  the  earth  and  the  Hfe  on  it  as  re- 
vealed by  a  study  of  the  rocks  of  past  geologic  ages  and  the  fossils 
they  contain.  The  study  includes  an  explanation  of  the  earth's 
present  surface  features,  and  of  the  processes  by  which";they  have 
been  formed  and  are  now  being  modified. 

Lectures,  class  discussions,  laboratory  and  field  work. 

202.  Economic  Mineralogy, 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  201  {8  or  i  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 

A  study  of  the  more  important  minerals.  Those  minerals  are 
selected  which  are  noteworthy  either  because  they  are  essential 
constituents  of  rocks,  or  because  they  are  of  value  economically. 
The  treatment  will  include  a  study  of  the  principles  of  crystallog- 
raphy; the  sight  recognition  of  minerals  by  means  of  their  physical 
properties;  the  mode  of  occurrence  and  field  associations  of  those 
minerals;  the  uses  to  which  they  are  put  industrially;  the  geographic 
location  and  methods  of  development  of  mineral  deposits  of 
economic  importance,  with  especial  emphasis  upon  the  mineral 
resources  of  the  United  States. 

203.  Petrography.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Geology  202.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

A  study  of  the  more  important  igneous,  sedimentary,  and  meta- 
morphic  rocks.     The  work  is  intended  to  afford  the  student  an 


92  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

opportunity  to  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  macroscopic 
characteristics  of  the  principal  rock  types  and  the  methods  of  petro- 
graphical  study,  and  to  enable  the  student  to  gain  some  acquaint- 
ance with  the  theories  of  modern  petrology. 
Lectures,  class  discussions,  and  laboratory  work. 

301.  Field  Geology. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (8  of 
igig-26),  and  a  grade  II  course,  or  course  201  (i  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Parker. 

Advanced  field  study  of  the  region  including  the  Boston  Basin 
and  areas  immediately  surrounding  it.  The  course  attempts  to 
train  the  student  to  determine  and  to  interpret  independently  the 
physiographic  and  structural  geology  of  the  region  studied.  It 
deals  further  with  the  relation  between  the  physical  features  of  the 
area  and  its  economic  and  commercial  development. 

Field  study  is  accompanied  by  lectures,  class  discussions,  and  labo- 
ratory work. 

305.  Seminar  in  Geology  and  Geography.     (See  Geography  305.) 

Geography 

204.  Climatology.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  201  (8  or  i  of 
jgig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Lanier. 

A  study  of  the  relations  of  climate  to  man.  The  course  is  designed 
to  give  an  understanding  of  the  elements  and  the  controls  of  chmates; 
the  characteristics  of  the  leading  types  of  climate  and  the  distribu- 
tion of  those  types  throughout  the  world;  the  ways  in  which  chmate 
influences  the  economic  development  of  regions. 

Lectures,  recitations,  and  laboratory  work. 

205.  Industrial  and  Commercial  Geography. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed 
course  loi  {8  of  igig-20).  To  count  toward  a  major  in  the  de- 
partment, hut  not  to  count  toward  the  science  requirement.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Laneer. 

A  study  of  world  production  and  world  trade  as  influenced  by  geo- 
graphic factors.  The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  give  the  student  an 
understanding  of  the  geographic  conditions  which  favor  the  de- 


1920-21  Geology  and  Geography  93 

velopment  of  the  various  types  of  industries,  as  pastoral,  agricul- 
tural, forest,  mining,  and  manufacturing  activities;  the  areas  which 
furnish  the  important  commercial  products  and  the  conditions  of 
their  production;  the  geographic  basis  of  trade  and  the  great  con- 
tinental and  ocean  trade  routes;  the  location  and  growth  of  conmier- 
cial  centers;  types  of  commercial  nations. 

206.  Conservation  of  Our  Natural  Resources. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.  To  count  toward  a  major  in  the  depart- 
ment hut  not  to  count  toward  the  science  requirement.  Three  hours  a 
week  jor  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 

A  study  of  the  natural  resources  of  the  United  States, — soils, 
forests,  minerals,  and  waters;  the  complete  dependence  of  the  na- 
tion's industries  upon  them,  and  the  efficient  use  of  these  resources 
that  they  may  serve  the  greatest  number  of  people  for  the  longest 
time.  The  course  includes  the  study  of  the  need  for  reducing  soil 
waste,  supplying  fertihzers  for  worn-out  soil,  reclaiming  swamp  and 
arid  lands,  increasing  agricultural  production  and  conserving 
mineral  fuels  and  metals,  and  of  the  methods  of  attaining  these 
results.  The  course  further  deals  \\dth  problems  of  forest  protec- 
tion, water  supply,  control  of  water  power,  and  the  use  of  inland 
waterv,-ays.  The  course  helps  to  establish  principles  of  good  citi- 
zenship. 

302.  Geographic  Intluences  in   the  Development  op    the    United 

States. 

Open  to  juniors  and  setiiors  who  have  completed  either  course  loi 
{8  of  igig-2o),  and  a  grade  II  course  in  the  department,  or  course  i 
or  3  of  igig-20.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 

Regional  geography  of  the  United  States  in  its  physical,  economic, 
commercial,  and  historical  aspects;  including  a  study  of  the  relation 
of  the  continent  to  the  world  as  a  whole,  and  the  influence  of  its 
natural  resources  upon  its  industrial  development  and  upon  the 
course  of  American  History. 

303.  Geographic  Influences  in  the  Development  of  Europe. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  {8  of 
igig-26),  and  a  grade  II  course  in  the  department,  or  course  i  or  3  of 
igig-20.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Lanier. 

Regional  geography  of  Europe  in  its  physical,  economic,  com- 
mercial, and  historical  aspects;  including  a  study  of  the  relation  of 


94  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

the  continent  to  the  world  as  a  whole,  and  the  influence  of  its 
natural  resources  upon  its  industrial  and  historical  development. 

304.  Geographic  Influences  in  the  Development  of  South  America. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  {8  of 
igiQ-2o),  and  a  grade  II  course  in  the  department,  or  course  i  or 
3  of  igig-20.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Lanier. 

Regional  geography  of  South  America  in  its  physical,  economic, 
commercial,  and  historical  aspects;  including  a  study  of  the  relation 
of  the  continent  to  the  world  as  a  whole,  and  the  influence  of  its 
natural  resources  upon  the  present  and  probable  future  develop- 
ment of  the  several  countries. 

305.  Seminar  in  Geology  and  Geography.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduate  students  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  depart- 
ment.    Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 

The  course  begins  with  a  study  of  the  methods  of  individual 
research.  Early  in  the  course  a  selected  topic  is  assigned  to  each 
student  for  investigation  and  reports  of  the  individual  work  are  pre- 
sented weekly.  In  this  way  the  work  of  the  seminar  is  adapted  to 
the  needs  of  the  individual  student.  The  student  wishing  primarily 
a  geographic  problem  is  assigned  a  selected  area  in  which  she  is  to 
study  the  geographic  factors  which  have  influenced  its  develop- 
ment. A  student  desiring  geologic  research  is  assigned  a  problem 
in  historical,  structural,  or  physiographic  Geology. 


GERMAN 

Professor:  Margarethe  Muller. 
Associate  Professor:  Natalie  Wipplinger,  Ph.D. 

101 1-  Elementary   Course.     Grammar,  reading,  oral   and  written 
exercises. 

Open  to  all  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  texts  used  in  this  course  are  made  the  basis  for  a  study  of 
grammatical  forms  and  rules,  for  speaking  exercises  and  composi- 
tion work.     Frequent  written  exercises  are  required. 

t  First-year  German  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after  the 
sophomore  year,  nor  second-year  German  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  German  loi  and 
French  loi  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


1920-21  German  95 

102t.  Elementary  Course.    Reading,  free  reproduction,  written  and 

ORAL  EXERCISES,  SHORT  THEMES,  MEMORIZING  OF  POEMS. 

Open  to  all  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20) 
or  the  two  tmit  admission  requirement  in  German.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  methods  are  the  same  as  in  course  loi.  In  connection  with 
the  reading  special  attention  is  given  to  the  learning  of  the  more 
common  idioms.  Some  pages  of  easy  reading  are  required  outside 
of  the  regular  class  assignments.  Several  poems  are  memorized. 
Frequent  written  tests  or  short  themes  are  required. 

Course  102  is  intended  to  fit  students  to  enter  courses  201,  202, 
203. 

103.  Grammar  and  Composition. 

Open  to  freshmen  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  German,  and  required  in  connection  with  course  104.  Course  103 
camiot  be  taken  without  course  104.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Muller. 
Review  of  elementary  grammar  and  study  of  more  advanced 
grammar.     Bi-weekly  themes;  grammatical -exercises  based  on  texts 
read  in  course  104. 

104.  Outline  History  of  German  Literature. 

Open  to  freshmen  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement 
in  Germafi,  and  required  in  connection  with  course  loj.  Course 
104  cannot  be  taken  without  course  10 j.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Muller. 
The  object  of  this  course  is  to  furnish  the  student  with  the  vocab- 
ulary necessary  for  the  reading  and  discussion  of  literature,  and 
to  give  her  a  general  historical  background  for  the  more  detailed 
study  of  German  Hterature  in  subsequent  courses.  Texts  used: 
Stroebe  and  Whitney,  Histor}'-  of  German  Literature,  Wenckebach's 
Meisterwerke,  Goethe's  Dichtung  und  Wahrheit  (Jagemann). 

201.  Grammar  and  Composition. 

Open  to  sophomores,  jmiiors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course 

102  or  equivalent,  and  required  of  those  taking  courses  202  and  20J. 

Course  201  camiot  be  taken  without  courses  202,  203.    One  hour  a 

week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  practice  in  oral  and 

written    expression.      Bi-weekly    themes;     grammatical    exercises 

based  on  the  material  treated  in  courses  202  and  203. 

t  First-year  German  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after  the 
sophomore  year,  nor  second-year  German  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  German  loi  and 
French  loi  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


96  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

202.  History  of  German  Literature. 

Open  to  sophomores,  jttniors,  aful  seniors  who  have  completed  course 
102  or  equivalent,  and  required  in  comiection  with  course  201.  Course 
202  cannot  be  taken  without  course  201.  Two  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  course  consists  of  discussions,  reading,  and  occasional  lectures 
on  the  history  of  German  literature  before  Goethe.  The  aim  of 
the  course  is  to  trace  the  parallel  development  of  the  language, 
literature,  social  conditions,  and  religious  ideals  of  the  times.  Works 
read  and  discussed  are:  the  Hildehrandslied,  selections  from  the 
Nibelungenlied,  the  works  of  Wolfram,  Gottfried,  Hartmann,  the 
Minnesingers  and  the  Meistersingers,  Volkslied,  selections  from 
Luther,  Hans  Sachs, — all  according  to  Wenckebach's  Meisterwerke. 
Occasional  reference  to  Scherer's  and  Vogt  und  Koch's  Geschichte 
der  deutschen  Literatur. 

203.  History  of  German  Literature. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course 
202,  and  to  others  by  permission  of  the  department;  required  in  connec- 
tion with  course  201.  Course  20 j  cannot  be  taken  without  course  201. 
Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

The  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  202;  the  methods  and 
aims  are  the  same.  Chief  topic:  the  classical  period  in  German 
literature,  with  special  emphasis  on  Lessing,  Herder,  Schiller, 
Goethe. 

204.  Schiller's  Life  and  Works  (Introductory  Course). 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loj.  104  (5.  10  of  191Q- 
26),  or  201,  202,  203  {8,  15,  16  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Lectures,  discussions.  Study  of  Schiller's  life  and  some  of  his 
important  dramatic  works.  Texts:  Boyesen's  Schiller's  Life;  Die 
Rduher  (Cotta) ;  Wallenstein  (Carruth) ;  Schiller's  Gedichte  (Cotta) ; 
Schiller's  Brief e  (Kiihnemann). 

205.  Goethe's  Life  and  Works  (Introductory  Course). 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  204  {22  of  1919-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Mijller. 


1920-21  German  97 

Lectures,  discussions.  Study  of  the  principal  characteristics 
of  Goethe's  life  and  works  to  the  time  of  his  literary  co-operation 
with  Schiller.  Works  discussed  in  class:  Goiz  von  Berlichingen, 
Iphigenie,  selected  poems  (Goebel).  Interpretation  of  "Storm 
and  Stress"  in  connection  with  Gotz,  of  German  classicism  in 
connection  ^vith  Iphigenie.  Supplementary  discussion  of  some  of 
the  following:  Goethe's  Brief e  (Langewiesche),  Dichtung  und 
Wahrheit,  Euripides'  Iphigenie,  Boyesen's  Life  of  Goethe. 

206.  German  Lyrics  and  Ballads.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  103,  104  or  201,  202, 
20J,  and  are  taking  other  work  in  German.  One  hour  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Historical  study  of  Minnegesang,  Volkslied,  and  the  principal 
lyric  poets  up  to  the  present  day. 

207.  Studies  in  Modern  German  Idiom.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  taking  other  work  in  German,  who  have  completed 
courses  loj.  104  or  201,  202,  20J,  and  by  special  permission  to  those 
who  have  completed  course  102.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

This  course  is  designed  to  aid  the  student  in  acquiring  a  larger 
working  vocabulary.  Modern  German  texts  are  used  as  a  basis 
of  study.     Constant  oral  and  frequent  written  practice. 

301.  The  German  Novel.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  cotnpleted  or  are  taking  three 
hours  of  grade  II.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Lectures  on  the  historical  development  of  the  German  novel 
before  Goethe.  Special  study  of  some  of  the  representative  novels 
by  Goethe,  Eichendorff,  Freytag,  Spielhagen,  Keller,  Storm, 
Sudermann,  and  others,  illustrative  of  certain  important  phases 
of  German  KuUurgeschichte. 

302.  History  of  the  German  Language.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  three  hours  of  grade 
II  and  are  taking  other  work  in  German.  One  hour  a  week  for  a 
year. 

This  course  aims  to  give  a  fuller  and  more  thorough  understand- 
ing of  modern  German  through  the  study  of  its  historical  develop- 
ment.   Text-book:   Behagel's  Die  deutsche  Sprache. 


98  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

303.  Middle   High    German    (Introductory    Course).     (Not   offered   in 

1920-21.) 
Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  at  least  three  hours 
of  grade  II.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Survey  of  Middle  High  German  forms  and  sounds.  Transla- 
tion of  Middle  High  German  epic  and  lyric  poetry  into  the  modern 
idiom. 

304.  Goethe's  Faust,  Part  I. 

Open  to  juniors  and   seniors   who  have  completed  courses  204.  205 
{22.  II  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Muller. 

Study  of  the  pre-Goethean  development  of  the  Faust  legend  in 
its  more  important  hterary  forms.  Close  study  of  the  text  of 
Goethe's  Faust,  Part  I.  Collateral  readings  and  reports  on  the 
relation  of  the  poem  to  Goethe's  life  and  times.  Part  II.  will  be 
treated  in  a  few  final  lectures. 

305.  The  German  Romantic  School. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  304  {31  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

A  study  of  the  development  and  spirit  of  the  German  Romantic 
School.  Outside  reading  assigned  from  the  following  reference 
books:  Haym,  Brandes,  Beers,  on  Romanticism;  R.  Huch's  Bliltezeit 
der  Romantik;  Hillebrandt's  Lectures  on  German  Thought;  Boyesen's 
Essays;  Heilborn's  Novalis.  Class  work  is  based  on  the  works  of 
Friedrich  Schlegel,  NovaUs,  Tieck,  Chamisso,  Eichendorff,  Heine, 
and  others. 

306.  Lessing  as  Dramatist  and  Critic  (Seminary  Course).     (Not  offered 

in  1920-21.) 
Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  three  hours  of  grade  III,  and  to 
others  by  special  permission.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Treatment  of  Lessing's  critical  work  in  literature,  theology,  and 
aesthetics.  Works  read  and  discussed  are:  Minna  von  Barnhelm, 
Emilia  Galotti,  Nathan  der  Weise,  Die  Hamhurgische  Dratnaturgie, 
Laokoon,  Axiomata,  Anti-Gotze,  Erzichung  des  Menschengeschlechts. 
Reference  books:  Erich  Schmidt's  Lessing,  Kuno  Fischer's  Lessing 
als  Reformator  der  deutschen  Literatur,  Kuno  Fischer's  Lessing's 
Nathan,  and  others. 


1920-21  Greek  99 

307.  Goethe,  Advanced  Course  (Seminary  Course). 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  J04  (31  of  igiQ-20)  and 
at  least  one  other  three-hour  semester  course  of  grade  III;  students 
not  taking  course  304  till  the  senior  year,  may  by  special  permission 
enter  course  307.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Muller. 

Study  of  Goethe's  lyrics,  ballads,  later  dramas,  parts  of  Faust  II., 
Wilhelm  Meister,  and  other  works.  Collateral  reading  in  the  Goethe 
Jahrbuch,  and  from  Eckermann,  Graf,  Hamack,  and  others.  Con- 
sideration of  Goethe's  relation  to  other  literatures,  and  as  art-critic. 

308.  Nineteenth  Century  Drama. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  307  {32  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Special  study  of  Kleist,  Grillparzer,  Otto  Ludwig,  Hebbel,  Ibsen, 
Hauptmann,  Sudermann,  and  others;  their  relation  to  classic  and 
romantic  art,  and  to  the  social  and  philosophical  problems  of  the 
century. 

309.  Schiller  as  Philosopher  and  Writer  on  Esthetics  (Seminary 

Course).     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  204  (22  of  igig-20)  and  at 
hast  three  hours  of  grade  III.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Study  of  Schiller  through  his  correspondence  with  Korner, 
Goethe,  etc.,  and  his  philosophic-aesthetic  poems  and  essays.  These 
are  read  and  discussed  in  class. 

310.  Gothic.  (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the  instructor. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 


GREEK 

Professors:  Katharine  May  Edwards,  Ph.D. 
Alice  VMlton,  Ph.D. 

101.  Beginning  Greek. 

Open  to  all  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  cover  in  one  year  the  fundamental  facts 
of  Greek  grammar  with  practice  in  reading  and  writing.     The  text- 


100  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

book  is  Allen's  First  Year  in  Greek.  The  longer  selections  for  read- 
ing are  from  Plato,  but  quotations  from  other  masterpieces  of  prose 
and  poetry  are  included. 

201.  Second  Year  Greek. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  {13  of  igig-20)  or 
the  two  unit  admissiott  requirement.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton. 

First  semester:  Plato;  Apology  and  selections  from  other  dia- 
logues. 

Second  semester:    Homer;    Selected  books  of  Iliad  or  Odyssey. 

202.  Plato:  Apology  and  selections  from  other  dialogues;  Homer: 

Odyssey  (six  or  seven  books);  Euripides:  one  drama. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  three  unit  admission  requirement. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards,  Miss  Walton. 

203.  Greek  Literature  in  English  Translations. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  completed 
one  full  course  in  Greek,  or  Art,  or  English  Literature.  One  hour  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

The  work  of  the  first  semester  will  be  the  reading  and  study  of 
Homer,  with  class  discussions,  and  lectures  on  the  development 
of  Epic  and  Lyric  Poetry.  The  second  semester  will  be  given  to  the 
critical  study  of  several  plays  with  lectures  on  the  development  of 
Greek  Drama. 

301.  Fifth  Century  Prose  and  Poetry. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  or  202  {14  or  i  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Rapid  reading,  partly  in  class,  of  selections  from  Herodotus 
(Battles  of  Marathon  and  Thermopylae)  and  Thucydides  (De- 
mocracy of  Athens).  Reading  and  study  of  dramas  of  iEschylus, 
Sophocles  and  Euripides,  at  least  one  of  each. 

302.  Greek  Lyric  Poetry. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  or  4  of  igig-20. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 


1920-21  Greek  101 

Special  study  of  the  poems  of  Sappho  and  Alcaeus;  Pindar  and 
Bacchylides;  Theocritus.  Lectures  on  development  of  Greek 
Lyric  Poetry.     Reading  of  Plato's  Ion  and  Aristotle's  Poetics. 

303.  Homeric  Seminary.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  302.     Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Critical  study  of  selected  portions  of  the  Iliad,  with  discussions 
and  lectures  on  special  problems. 

304.  Greek  Dialects.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  of  grade  III. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

A  comparative  study  of  the  Greek  dialects,  their  characteristics 
and  their  relations  to  each  other,  with  reading  and  study  of  inscrip- 
tions and  selected  texts. 

305.  Modern  Greek.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  of  grade  III.  One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

The  course  has  two  objects:  first,  a  practical  one,  to  give  some 
acquaintance  with  the  spoken  and  written  Greek  of  to-day;  second, 
a  linguistic  one,  to  trace  the  historical  development  of  the  language 
from  classical  times  to  the  present. 

306.  General    Introduction    to    the    Science    of    Language.     (Not 

offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  seniors  and  juniors  who  have  had  one  year  of  Greek.  One  hour 
a  week  for  a  year  and  an  additional  hour  in  alternate  weeks.  To  count 
as  one  and  one-half  hours. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Lectures  on  the  origin  and  nature  of  language  and  the  principles 
of  its  life  and  growth;  outline  studies  in  phonetics;  classification  of 
languages;  groups  of  the  Indo-European  languages  with  chief 
characteristics. 

For  additional  courses  see  Classical  Archaeology. 
For  courses  in  the  study  of  Greek  Testament  see  Biblical 
History. 


102  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 


HISTORY 

Professors:  Julia  Swift  Orvis,  Ph.D. 

Mabel  Elisabeth  Hodder,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professors:  Edna  Virginia  Moffett,^  Ph.D. 
Barnette  Miller,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors:  Edward  Ely  Curtis,  Ph.D. 

Judith  Blow  Williams,  Ph.D. 
Instructors:  Brewer  Goddard  Whitmore,  M.A. 
Margaret  Bancroft,  M.A. 

101 1  Political  History  of  England  to  1485. 

Open  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  and  juniors,  and  to  seniors  who  have 
taken  no  college  course  in  History.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Williams. 

102|.  Political  History  of  England  from  1485  to  the  Present  Time. 

Open  to  sophofKores,  juniors,  and  seniors  as  above,  and  to  freshmen 
who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20),  or  who  ofered  English 
History  as  an  admission  subject.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Williams. 

The  aim  of  these  courses  is  to  train  students  in  the  use  of  his- 
torical material  and  in  dealing  with  historical  problems.  Emphasis 
is  laid  on  the  political,  social,  and  industrial|conditions  which  have 
developed  the  England  of  to-day. 

103 J.  History  of  Western  Europe  from  the  Fifth  Century  to  the 
Treaties  of  Westphalia. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder,  Miss  Miller, 
Miss  Williams,  Miss  Bancroft. 

A  general  survey  of  the  history  of  Western  Europe  from  the 
decline  of  Rome  to  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century.  Em- 
phasis is  laid  upon  such  topics  as:  the  mediaeval  Empire,  the 
Papacy,  feudalism,  monasticism,  the  Crusades,  the  rise  of  towns. 
Hundred  Years'  War,  mediaeval  and  Renaissance  life  and  culture, 
the  Reformation,  and  the  beginnings  of  modem  nationalities. 
The  course  aims  to  train  students  in  methods  of  historical  work 
and  to  furnish  a  background  for  the  detailed  study  of  particular 
periods. 

» Absent  on  leave. 

X  Courses  loi  and  102,  or  course  103,  or  course  104  are  prerequisite  to  later  election. 


1920-21  History  103 

104t.  Medieval  Life  and  Institutions.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 
Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Mopfett. 

The  course  will  cover  the  histor}^  of  Europe  to  the  close  of  the 
fourteenth  century.  It  will  deal  especially  with  those  phases  of 
medioeval  Kfe  which  have  left  the  strongest  impress  upon  modem 
times.  A  few  mediaeval  sources  will  be  read  at  first  hand,  and  some 
of  the  great  personahties  whose  work  is  still  ^dtal  will  be  studied 
as  carefully  as  time  allows.  The  aim  of  the  course  will  be  to  show 
the  points  of  contact  and  of  difference  between  the  mediseval  spirit 
and  the  modern,  and  to  serve  as  a  foundation  for  courses  deahng 
with  later  periods,  or  as  a  backgroimd  for  the  study  of  mediaeval 
art  or  Uterature. 

201.  History  of  Europe  since  the  French  Revolution. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one  full 
course  in  History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  course  involves  (i)  an  introductory  discussion  of  the  condition 
of  France  on  the  eve  of  the  Revolution;  (2)  a  study  of  the  progress 
of  the  Revolution  and  of  the  reaction  against  democratic  tyranny 
culminating  in  imperiahsm;  (3)  a  study  of  the  influence  of  revolu- 
tionary ideas  in  the  subsequent  history  of  Europe. 

202.  Constitutional  History  of  England  to  1399.      (Not  offered  in 

1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in  History.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  English  constitutional  govern- 
ment as  an  expression  of  the  character  of  the  English  people.  The 
course  deals  with  the  Germanic  origins,  and  with  the  development 
of  English  thought  along  constitutional  lines  to  the  close  of  the 
Plantagenet  period. 

203.  Constitutional  History  of  England  from  1399  to  the  Present 

Time.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  one  full  course  in  History.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  study  of  the  later  development  of  the  Enghsh  constitution, 
the  rise  of  party  and  cabinet  government,  and  the  actual  working 
of  the  constitution  to-day. 
X  Courses  loi  and  io2,  or  course  103,  or  course  104  are  prerequisite  to  later  election. 


104  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

204.  History  of  Rome. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one 
college  course  in  History,  or  who  are  giving  special  attention  to  Latin 
or  Greek.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder. 

This  course  offers  a  general  survey  of  Roman  History.  The 
attempt  is  made  to  present  the  problems  of  recent  scholarship  in 
the  study  of  the  earher  period,  but  the  main  emphasis  is  placed  upon 
the  later  Republic  and  the  Empire,  Particular  attention  will  be 
given  to  economic  and  social  conditions,  and  to  the  development  of 
the  Roman  system  of  government. 


205.  Colonial  America. 

a.  Age  of  Discovery  and  Conquest. 

b.  The  American  Revolution. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are 
taking  a  full  course  in  History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Curtis. 

After  surveying  the  discovery  and  exploration  of  America  in  the 
sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries,  the  course  deals  with  the  foun- 
dation and  growth  of  the  British  Empire  in  America.  Emphasis  is 
laid  upon  British  colonial  policy  and  administration.  The  second 
semester  is  devoted  mainly  to  a  consideration  of  the  American  Rev- 
olution, attention  being  directed  to  the  problems  of  British  states- 
manship and  the  European  background. 


206.  Constitutional  Go\'t:rnment. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  either  courses  loi. 
102  (i.  2  of  igig-2o)  or  course  loj  {j  of  igig-20),  or  Economics 
201  (i  of  igig-20),  or  205  {15  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Mr.  Whitmore. 

This  is  an  introductory  course  deahng  with  comparative  govern- 
ments. In  the  first  semester  the  governments  of  Great  Britain, 
France,  Italy,  and  Germany  are  studied  as  a  basis  for  comparison 
with  the  government  of  the  United  States,  on  which  the  second 
semester  is  spent.  Throughout  the  course,  special  attention  is 
given  to  the  practical  working  of  governments,  to  modern  political 
tendencies,  and  to  the  relations  of  the  individual  to  the  government. 
An  aim  of  the  course  is  to  prepare  students  for  intelligent  and 
effective  citizenship. 


1920-21  History  105 

207.  Geography  of  European  History,     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  and  sophomores  who  have  com- 
pleted one  college  course  in  History.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 

The  institutions,  economic  and  social  conditions,  and  political 
history  of  some  parts  of  Europe  will  be  briefly  studied  in  connection 
with  their  topography.  Besides  the  study  of  the  more  important 
changes  of  boundaries,  the  course  will  attempt  to  strengthen  the 
connection  between  events  and  localities,  and  to  give  a  clearer  con- 
ception of  the  scene  of  events  already  studied,  or  to  be  studied,  in 
other  courses  in  European  History. 

208.  International  Politics. 

Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
a  full  course  in  History.  One  hour  a  week  for  a  year  with  an  addi- 
tional appointment  in  alternate  weeks.  To  count  as  one  and  one-half 
hours. 

Miss  Miller. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  view  of  international 
conditions  since  the  close  of  the  Bismarck  period,  with  especial 
reference  to  the  present  relations  of  Europe,  America,  and  Asia. 

209.  Political  History  of  Russia  from  the  earliest  times  to  the 

present.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
another  course  in  History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  course  includes  a  study  of  (i)  the  forces  which  made 
Russia  a  world  power,  (2)  the  development  and  policy  of  the  autoc- 
racy, and  (3)  the  struggle  for  freedom  culminating  in  the  revolution 
of  1917. 

301.  History  of  the  United  States  from  1787  to  the  Present  Time, 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one  full  course  and 
have  completed  or  are  taking  a  second  course  in  History.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Curtis. 

A  study  of  the  formation  and  development  of  the  constitution 
of  the  United  States,  with  especial  reference  to  controlling  forces, 
such  as  the  organization  of  parties,  the  growth  of  democracy,  the 
rise  of  the  slave  power,  the  political  effect  of  the  development  of 
the  West. 


106  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

302 f.  EunoPE  IN  THE  Fifteenth  Century.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History,  or  course  103  (j  of  igig-20),  or  104  {10  of  igig-20),  and  two 
courses  in  Art.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  study  of  the  intellectual,  religious,  and  social  life  of  the  fifteenth 
century,  and  of  the  institutions_and  movements  which  were  its  out- 
come. 

303  f.  Europe  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  continuation  of  course  302  though  the  latter  is  not  a  prerequisite. 

A  brief  introductory  sur\^ey  of  conditions  in  the  fifteenth  century 
is  followed  by  a  more  detailed  study  of  the  sixteenth,  its  great  move- 
ments, and  its  great  personalities. 

304.  England  under  the  Tudors  and  Stuarts. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder. 

This  course  deals  with  the  religious  and  constitutional  struggles 
in  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries,  with  economic  and 
social  changes,  international  relations,  and  with  the  founding  of 
the  British  Empire. 

305.  Diplomatic  History  of  Europe  since  1740. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  course  includes  (i)  a  review  of  the  period  1 648-1 740;  (2) 
the  age  of  Frederick  II;  (3)  a  Survey  of  the  Revolutionary  and 
Napoleonic  period;   (4)  the  age  of  Bismarck  and  its  results, 

306.  Growth  of  the  British  Empire.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

This  course  includes  (i)  a  historical  review  of  the  development 
of  the  empire;    (2)  a  study  of  the  changes  of  colonial  policy;    (3) 
a  study  of  colonial  administration;   and  (4)  a  discussion  of  present 
colonial  and  imperial  problems. 
t  History  302  and  History  303  will  not  both  be  given  in  the  same  year. 


1920-21  History  107 

307.  American  Foreign  Relations. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  fidl  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Curtis. 

This  course  deals  with  the  most  significant  diplomatic  problems 
which  have  arisen  as  the  result  of  war,  westward  expansion,  the 
growth  of  foreign  commerce,  immigration,  and  the  acquisition  of 
colonial  possessions.  The  origin  of  important  treaties,  the  develop- 
ment of  the  Monroe  Doctrine,  and  the  evolution  of  the  United  States 
into  a  world  power  will  be  traced. 

308.  History  of  Political  Institutions.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full  courses  in 
History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

This  is  an  introductory  course  in  the  comparative  study  of  the 
origin,  character,  development,  and  aim  of  political  institutions. 

309.  Selected  Studies  in  Medieval  History.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  approved  juniors,  seniors,  and  graduates  who  have  had  course 
103  {3  of  igig-20),  or  course  104  {10  of  igig-20),  and  a  second  course 
in  History.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

This  is  a  second  and  more  advanced  course  in  Mediaeval  History, 
designed  to  give  training  in  methods  of  historical  research,  using  the 
mediaeval  period  as  a  field.  There  will  be  lectures,  discussions, 
and  indi\ddual  work  done  by  each  student  with  the  instructor. 
Study  of  mediaeval  problems  and  incidents,  practice  in  compiling  \ 
bibliographies,  comparing  sources  and  combining  them  to  reach 
conclusions  will  form  part  of  the  work  of  the  course. 


108  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

HYGIENE 

Director:  Roxana  Hayward  Vivian,  Ph.D., 
professor  of  mathematics. 
Professor:  William  Skarstrom,  M.D. 
Associate  Professors:  Eugene  Clarence  Howe,  Ph.D. 
Julia  Eleanor  Moody,  Ph.D., 

associate  professor  of  zoology. 
Assistant  Professor:  Alice  Middleton  Boring,  Ph.D., 

assistant  professor  of  zoology. 
Resident  Physician  :  Katharine  Piatt  Raymond,  B.S.,  M.D. 

INSTRUCTORS:    EDNA    BARRETT    MANSHIP, 

Margaret  Johnson. 
Elizabeth  Halsey,  Ph.B. 
Mary  Sophie  Haagensen. 
Harry  Edward  Brown,  B.A. 
Mary  Rees  Mulliner,  M.D. 

Assistants:  Fanny  Garrison.  B. a. 
Annie  Chapin  Stedman. 
Julia  Rebecca  Grout,  B.A. 
Recorder:  Ruth  Parish  Reynolds,  B.A. 
Librarian:  Julia  Clemma  Knowlton,  Ph.B.,  B.L.S. 
Curator:  Anna  Elizabeth  Anderson. 

I.     Courses  Prescribed  for  the  Certificate  of  tlie  Department 

(i)  A  two  years'  course  leading  to  the  certificate  of  the  Department  of  Hygiene  is  offered 
to  students  who  already  hold  the  Bachelor's  degree.  This  course  is  especially  designed  for 
the  training  of  teachers  of  hygiene  and  physical  education.  In  order  to  be  admitted  to 
this  course,  candidates  must  be  without  organic  disease  or  serious  functional  disorder.  A 
keen  sense  of  rhythm  is  necessary  and  also  the  ability  to  use  the  voice  with  ease  and  power. 
Previous  courses  in  Chemistry,  Physics,  Psychology,  and  Education  are  essential.  If  a  sat- 
isfactory previous  course  in  Chemistry  or  Physics  is  lacking,  it  must  be  taken  in  the  first 
year  t  and  Hygiene  321  deferred  until  the  second  year.  In  order  to  enter  second-year 
elective  work,  these  four  preliminary  courses  and  the  required  first-year  courses  must  be 
completed  before  the  beginning  of  the  second  year. 

Courses  leading  to  the  degree  of  M.A.  may  be  completed  while  m  residence  for  the  cer- 
tificate.    Detailed  information  will  be  found  in  the  Circular  of  the  Department  of  Hygiene. 

(2)  A  five-years'  course  is  offered  leading  to  the  B.A.  degree  and  the  certificate  of  the 
Department  of  Hygiene.  This  course  is  open  only  to  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  in 
residence  at  Wellesley  College.  In  general,  students  in  this  course  receive  the  B.A.  degree 
at  the  end  of  the  fourth  year  and  complete  in  the  fifth  year  the  work  required  for  the  certifi- 
cate of  the  Department  of  Hygiene.  The  following  courses  count  toward  the  Bachelor's  de- 
gree: course  301,  one  and  one-half  hours;  courses  302,  303,  321,  322,  each  three  hours. 

Courses  for  First- Year  Students 

101.  Gymnastics. 

Required  oj  all  first-year  students.    Five  hours  a  week  in  the  fall  and 
winter. 

Dr.  Skarstrom. 

Marching — adaptation  of  modern  military  marching.     Elemen- 
tary to  fairly  advanced  free-standing  gymnastic  exercises.     Ele- 

t  See  undergraduate  courses  in  Chemistry  or  Physics. 


1920-21  Hygiene  109 

mentary  exercises  on  gymnastic  apparatus,  such  as  booms,  ladders, 
ropes,  rings,  vaulting  box,  horse  and  buck. 

102*.  Outdoor  Games  and  Sports. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  in  the  fall, 
eight  hours  in  the  spring. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Halsey, 
Mr.  Brown,  Miss  Garrison. 

In  addition  to  field  work,  rules  are  studied  and  principles  of 
management  and  coaching  are  discussed  in  the  following  sports: 
fall  season— baseball,  basket  ball,  and  field  hockey;  spring  sea- 
son—archery, baseball,  basket  ball,  field  hockey,  rowing,  and 
tennis. 

103.  Personal  Hygiene. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     One  hour  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Mr.  Howe. 

A  conservative  exposition  of  the  regulation  of  the  environmental 
conditions  of  health,  and  of  the  guidance  of  adaptation  to  these 
conditions. 

104.  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship. 

Elementary  course  in  Folk  Dancing  and  Singing  Games. 

105.  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship. 

This  course  includes  elementary  exercises  in  technique  to  secure 
plasticity,  poise,  co-ordination  and  grace.  Dances  are  graded  from 
Nursery  Rhyme  dances  for  children  in  the  lower  grades  to  slightly 
more  complicated  aesthetic,  classic,  and  interpretative  dances. 

106.  Symptomatology  and  Emergencies. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  the  first 

semester. 

Dr.  Raymond. 

This  brief  course  is  intended  to  enable  students  to  understand 
something  of  the  nature,  causes,  and  symptoms  of  the  more  common 

•  A  course  of  twelve  lessons,  including  methods  of  instructing  beginners,  will  probably 
be  given  at  an  adjacent  swimming  pool  during  the  indoor  season,  and  also  similar  lessons  m 
horseback  riding.     A  charge  will  be  made  for  these  lessons. 


no  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

diseases;  to  detect  conditions  of  doubtful  health  in  applicants  for 
gymnastic  training;  to  comprehend  intelligently  the  directions 
given  by  physicians  regarding  patients  whom  they  may  advise  to 
take  gymnastic  exercise;  and  to  apply  First  Aid  methods  in  case 
of  accident  or  sudden  illness  in  camp  or  gymnasium. 

107*.  Swimming.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21,) 

203.  Normal  Instruction. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom. 

This  course  comprises  five  or  six  weeks  of  lectures  and  quizzes 
on  gymnastic  terminology  with  a  survey  of  gymnastic  material, 
followed  by  preliminary  practice  teaching.  Students  are  given 
thorough  drill  on  all  the  technical  devices  of  teaching  gymnastics. 

208.  Play,  Playgrounds,  and  Athletics. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Brown. 

The  aims  of  this  course  are: 

(i)  To  give  the  students  an  understanding  of  the  development 
of  the  playground  and  recreation  movement,  and  its  relation  to 
community  health. 

(2)  To  discuss  the  best  methods  of  coaching  and  managing  athlet- 
ics, intramural  sports  and  group  contests,  or  mass  athletics,  with 
emphasis  on  the  healthy  development  of  the  participants  in  those 
sports. 

209.  Corrective  Gymnastics  and  Massage. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Mulliner. 

Lectures  on  the  theory  and  mechanics  of  faulty  posture  with 
practice  in  giving  exercises  suitable  for  each  condition.  General 
and  local  massage  for  cases  that  teachers  of  physical  education 
should  be  able  to  treat  under  a  physician's  direction. 

210.  Remedial  Gymnastics. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.  One  hour  a  week  for  the  first 
semester;  two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Haagensen. 

*  A  course  of  twelve  lessons,  including  methods  of  instructing  beginners,  will  probably 
be  given  at  an  adjacent  swimming  pool  during  the  indoor  season,  and  also  similar  lessons  in 
horseback  riding.    A  charge  will  be  made  for  these  lessons. 


1920-21  Hygiene  111 

This  course  is  arranged  to  present  the  causes  and  early  indica- 
tions of  conditions  which  require  remedial  work  and  practice  in 
the  application  of  hygiene  rules  and  exercises  which  wiU  lead  to 
normal  health. 

301.  Mammalian  Anatomy  and  Histology.     (Zoology  301.) 

Open  to  first-year  students  in  the  Department  of  Hygiene;  also  to  juniors 
and  seniors  who  are  registered  as  five-year  students.  If  counted  as 
part  of  a  major  i?i  Zoology,  Zoology  301  must  be  preceded  by  Zoology 
loi.    One  and  one-half  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moody. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  on  the  gross  and  microscopic  anat- 
omy of  bones  and  muscles;  digestive,  respiratory,  excretory,  repro- 
ductive, circulatory,  and  nervous  systems.  Special  emphasis  is 
given  to  the  study  of  the  human  skeleton  and  muscles. 

This  course  counts  one  and  one-half  hours  toward  the  Bachelor's 
degree. 

302.  General  Physiology.     (Zoology  302.) 

Open  to  first-year  students  in  the  Department  of  Hygiene;  also  to  jun^ 
tors  and  seniors  who  are  registered  as  five-year  students.  If  counted 
with  Zoology  joi  as  part  of  a  major  hi  Zoology,  Zoology  302  must  be 
preceded  by  Zoology  loi.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Boring. 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  present  the  fundamental  facts  and 
theories  which  underlie  the  normal  functions  of  animal  organisms. 
Mammalian  and  human  physiology  will  receive  particular  attention. 
It  will  include  a  brief  survey  of  foods;  a  consideration  of  the  prob- 
lems of  nutrition  and  metabolism;  and  as  detailed  a  study  as  time 
will  permit  of  the  digestive,  respiratory,  circulatory,  muscular,  ner\^- 
ous,  excretory,  and  reproductive  systems,  and  of  the  special  sense 
organs. 

This  course  counts  three  hours  toward  the  Bachelor's  degree. 

303.  Kinesiology. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom. 

Lectures  and  recitations  dealing  with  the  anatomical  mechanism 
of  movements:  the  role  of  joint  motion,  muscular  action,  gravity, 
leverage,  inertia,  and  internal  resistance  in  the  production  and 
modification  of  gymnastic  movements  and  their  effects,  as  contrasted 
with  "natural"  movements. 

This  course  counts  three  hours  toward  the  Bachelor's  degree. 


112  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Courses  for  Second-Year  Students 

201.  Gymnastics. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    Four  hours  a  week  in  the  fall  and 

winter. 

Dr.  Skarstrom. 

Intermediate  and  advanced  marching,  gymnastic  free-standing 
exercises,  and  apparatus  work. 

202*.  Outdoor  Games  and  Sports. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    Eight  hours  a  week  in  the  fall, 
six  hours  a  week  in  the  spring. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Halsey, 
Mr.  Brown,  Miss  Garrison. 

In  addition  to  field  work,  rules  are  studied  and  principles  of 
management  and  coaching  are  discussed  in  the  following  sports: 
fall  season— archery,  baseball,  basket  ball,  field  hockey,  rowing, 
and  tennis;  spring  season— archery,  baseball,  basket  ball,  field 
hockey,  and  tennis. 

204.  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship. 
Advanced  course  in  Folk  and  National  Dances. 

205.  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship. 

This  course  includes  more  advanced  work  than  that  offered  in 
course  105.     Assignments  are  made  for  two  original  dances. 

206.  Practice   in   Teaching  Esthetic,   Social  and   Folk  Dancing, 

AND  Lectures  on  the  Relation  of  Music  to  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson. 

Practical  work  in  teaching  dances  similar  to  those  in  courses  104, 
los,  204,  205.  ^ 

Demonstrations  and  criticisms  of  origmal  dances  written  for 
course  205.  Practice  in  teaching  dances  suitable  for  schoolrooms 
and  playgrounds. 

•A  course  of  twelve  lessons,  including  methods  of  instructing  beginners,  will  probably 
be  given  at  an  adjacent  swimming  pool  during  the  indoor  season,  and  also  similar  lessons  m 
horseback  riding.    A  charge  will  be  made  for  these  lessons. 


1920-21  Hygiene  113 

207.  Theory  and  Practice  of  Physical  Education  in  the  First  and 
Second  Grades. 

Required  of  all  secofid-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Halsey. 

A  study  of  the  relations  of  physical  education  to  the  needs  of 
children  between  six  and  eight  years  of  age  in  the  elementary  schools. 
Practice  in  rhythm  training,  games,  story  plays,  and  mimetic 
exercises. 

211.  Anthropometry. 

Required  of  all  secojid-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Dr.  Mulliner, . 

Laboratory  work  in  the  use  of  anthropometric  instruments  in 
recording  and  filing;  a  presentation  of  the  statistical  methods  of 
value  in  anthropometry;  and  the  solution  of  problems  based  upon 
anthropometric  measurements. 

212.  History  and  Literature  of  Physical  Education. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Brown. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  comprehensive 
survey  of  the  field  of  physical  education,  past  and  present;  to  give 
a  clear  understanding  of  the  conditions  governing  the  success  or 
failure  of  the  application  of  its  principles;  and  to  show  the  relation 
it  bears  to  the  other  big  movements  of  our  time  with  a  view  to 
revealing  a  vision  of  its  tremendous  opportunities. 

213.  Corrective  Gymnastics  and  Massage. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Two  hours  a  week  from  Novem-  ■ 

her  until  May. 

Dr.  Mulliner. 

Practice  under  supervision  in  the  use  of  methods  and  exercises 
taught  in  course  209  with  the  college  students  whose  physical  ex- 
aminations have  shown  the  need  for  special  training  in  order  to 
attain  and  maintain  good  posture. 

214.  Practice  Teaching. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.    Six  to  eight  hours  a  week  for 

the  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom,  Miss  Manship, 
Miss  Halsey,  Mr.  Brown. 


114  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Students  assist  in  the  required  work  of  the  college  classes  two  to 
four  hours  a  week,  as  coaches  in  the  sports  and  squad  leaders  in  the 
gymnasium  and  carry  on  under  careful  supervision  the  regular  physi- 
cal education  work  in  the  public  schools  of  Wellesley,  teaching  two 
or  three  different  grades  during  the  year,  four  hours  a  week. 

304.  Theory  of  Physical  Education  and  Methods  or  Teaching. 

Required  of  all  second-year  students.     Three  hours  a  week  Jor  a  year. 

Dr.  Skarstrom. 

The  aims  of  this  course  are:  (i)  to  discuss  the  purposes,  scope, 
and  ideals  of  physical  education;  (2)  to  study  the  character,  selec- 
tion, classification,  arrangement,  and  progression  of  gymnastic  ex- 
ercises; (3)  a  systematic  study  of  the  principles  and  technique  of 
teaching  gymnastics. 


321*.  Physiology. 

Required  of  all  students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 


Mr.  Howe. 


Human  physiology  with  special  emphasis  on  its  application  in 
personal  hygiene  and  in  physical  education.  Three  lectures  and 
one  laboratory  appointment  of  three  periods. 

This  course  counts  three  hours  toward  the  Bachelor's  degree. 

322.  Health  Problems  of  School  and  Community. 

Open  to  all  students  who  have  completed  course  302  or  321.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Howe. 

The  first  part  of  the  course  deals  with  school  health  problems 
such  as  methods  of  effective  health  instruction,  statistics  and 
discussion  of  child  development  from  the  point  of  view  of  hy- 
giene; and  all  of  the  sanitary  aspects  of  school  environment.  In 
the  second  part  are  discussed  the  phases  of  general  sanitary  science 
with  which  teachers  of  hygiene  and  physical  education  come  in 
contact  not  only  in  schools,  but  in  social  settlements,  camps,  in- 
dustrial and  recreation  centers,  etc.  The  laboratory  appointments 
equivalent  to  two  or  three  hours  a  week  will  be  devoted  to  the 
practical  and  experimental  study  of  such  problems  as  ventilation 
and  lighting,  and  to  visits  to  open  air  schools,  school  lunch  estab- 
lishments, swimming  pools,  clinics,  board  of  health  laboratories, 
and  to  certain  industrial  and  commercial  plants.     The  course  is 

•  In  1921-22  this  course  will  be  entitled  Applied  Physiology,  will  require  course  302,  or  an 
equivalent,  as  a  prerequisite  and  will  deal  with  advanced  problems  in  Hygiene.  In  addition 
to  being  required  for  the  certificate  it  may  also  count  as  a  part  of  the  work  for  the  M.A.  degree. 


1920-21  Hygiene  115 

illustrated  by  lantern  slides  showing  conditions  at  home  and  abroad, 
and  by  the  latest  charts,  maps,  and  bulletins  of  boards  of  health  and 
education. 
This  course  counts  three  hours  toward  the  M.A.  degree. 


II.     Courses  open  to  all  Undergraduates* 

Two  hours  in  Hygiene  are  prescribed  for  the  degree.  One  hour  of  this  requirement  is 
met  by  course  120;  the  second  hour  is  met  by  four  periods  of  practical  work,  two  periods  per 
week  in  the  freshman  year  (course  121)  and  two  in  the  sophomore  year  (course  122). 

By  special  permission  courses  123,  124,  and  125  may  be  substituted  for  the  indoor  work  of 
courses  lai  and  122.  Courses  123,  124,  125,  126,  127,  and  128  (except  as  noted  below)  do  not 
count  toward  the  degree. 

120.  Personal  Hygiene. 

Required  of  freshmen.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Howe,  Miss  Halsey. 

Stress  is  laid  (i)  on  the  applicability  of  hygienic  practice  in  the 
immediate  situations  of  college  life,  and  (2)  on  the  development  of 
habits  of  posture  and  movement  as  a  phase  of  education.  The 
underlying  physiology  is  reduced  to  the  least  amount  needed  for 
the  scientific  justification  of  the  practice  of  personal  hygiene. 

121.  Gymnastics  and  Outdoor  Sports. 

Required  of  all  freshmen.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year,  counting  one- 
half  hour  toward  the  degree. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson,  Miss  Halsey, 
Mr.  Brown,  Miss  Garrison,  and  Assistants. 

Outdoor  work  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms — organized  sports: 
archery,  baseball,  basket  ball,  golf,  field  hockey,  horseback  riding, 
rowing,  running,  tennis,  and  volley  ball.  This  part  of  the  work  is 
designated  as  121  f.s.  (fall,  spring). 

Indoor  work  in  the  winter  term — gymnastics.  This  part  of  the 
course  is  designated  as  121  w.  (winter).  Students  needing  corrective 
or  remedial  work  will  substitute  course  124  or  125  for  the  indoor 
gymnasium  practice, 

122.  Gymnastics  and  Outdoor  Sports. 

Required  of  all  sophomores  who  have  completed  course  121.    Two  hours 
a  week  for  a  year,  counting  one-half  hour  toward  the  degree. 

Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson,  Miss  Halsey, 
Mr.  Brown,  Miss  Garrison,  and  Assistants. 

•In  courses  121,  122,  123,  and  124  an  opportunity  is  given  to  graduate  students  for 
practice  in  corrective  work  and  in  coaching. 


116  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Advanced  work  on  topics  as  in  course  121.  The  outdoor  work  of 
this  course  is  designated  as  122  f.s.  (fall,  spring),  and  the  indoor 
work  as  122  w.  (winter).  Students  needing  corrective  or  remedial 
work  will  substitute  course  124  or  125  for  the  gymnasium  practice  of 
this  course. 

123.  Gymnastics. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses  121  and  122  or 
their  equivalent ,  and,  by  permission  of  the  instructor,  open  to  freshmen 
and  sophomores  who  have  had  an  equivalent  of  courses  121  and  122  and 
who  meet  the  requirements  of  the  department.  Two  hours  a  week  from 
November  until  May. 

Dr.  Skarstrom,  Miss  Johnson,  and  Assistants. 

124.  Corrective  Gymnastics. 

Required  in  place  of  the  indoor  work  of  courses  121  and  122  in  the  case 
of  all  freshmen  and  sophomores  whose  physical  examination  indicates 
the  need  of  posture  trainitig  or  other  corrective  work. 

Dr.  Mulliner  and  Assistants. 

125.  Remedial  Gymnastics. 

Required  in  place  of  the  indoor  work  of  courses  121  and  122  in  the  case 
of  all  freshmen  and  sophomores  whose  physical  examination  indicates 
the  need  of  remedial  work.  This  course  is  open  also  to  juniors  and 
seniors.    A  fee  may  be  charged  for  this  course. 

Miss  Haagensen,  Miss  Garrison,  and  Assistants. 

126.  Organized  Sports. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses  121  and  122, 
or  their  equivalent.     Two  hours  a  week  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms. 
Miss  Manship,  Miss  Johnson,  Miss  Halsey, 
Mr.  Brown,  Miss  Garrison,  and  Field  Instructors. 

Archery,  basket  ball,  baseball,  golf,  field  hockey,  horseback  riding, 
rowing,  running,  tennis,  and  volley  ball. 

127.  Elementary  Dancing. 

Open  to  students  who  have  had  no  previous  training.  One  hour  a 
week  from  November  until  May. 

Miss  Manship. 

This  course  will  include  exercises  in  technique  to  insure  poise, 
co-ordination,  plasticity,  and  grace.  Dances  will  be  graded  from 
simple  Nursery  Rhyme  dances  to  slightly  more  complicated  aesthetic, 
classic,  and  interpretative  dances.  A  synopsis  of  each  day's  program 
is  typewritten  and  posted,  and  each  student  is  required  to  keep  a 
notebook. 


1920-21  Italian  117 

128.  Advanced  Dancing. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  127  or  an  equivalent. 
One  hour  a  week  from  November  until  May. 

Miss  Manship. 

This  course  includes  exercises  in  technique  and  dances  more 
advanced  than  those  ofifered  in  course  127.  Each  student  is  required 
to  keep  a  notebook. 


ITALIAN 

Professor:  Margaret  Hastings  Jackson. 
101 1-  Elementary  Course. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Grammar,  with  written  and  oral  exercises;  reading  and  sight 
translation;  conversation. 

201.  Intermediate  Course.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20)  or 
equivalent.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Grammar,  prose  composition;  reading  and  translation  at  sight; 
in  the  first  semester  from  modem  authors;  in  the  second  semester 
from  the  classic  authors. 

202.  Dante  and  the  Early  Italian  Renaissance.    English  Course. 

(Not  ofifered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Dante's  Divine  Comedy  (in  English)  and  the  conditions  of  the 
age  which  produced  it;  the  Early  Italian  Renaissance  as  expressed 
in  the  works  of  Petrarch,  Boccaccio.  A  knowledge  of  Italian  is 
not  required. 

Note. — The  Dante  Society  ofiFers  an  annual  prize  of  one  hundred 
dollars  for  the  best  essay  on  a  subject  drawn  from  the  life  or  works 
of  Dante.  The  competition  is  open  to  students  or  graduates  of 
not  more  than  three  years'  standing  from  colleges  or  universities  in 
the  United  States.  For  subjects  and  conditions  consult  page  559 
of  the  Harvard  University  Catalogue,  1919-20. 

X  Italian  loi  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree,  if  taken  after  the  junior  year. 


118  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

301.  History  of  Italian  Literature  in  the  Thirteenth  and  Four- 

teenth Centuries.    Emphasis  on  Dante.     (Not  given  in  1920- 

21.) 
Open  on  consultation  with  the  instructor  to  juniors  and  seniors  who 
have  a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  the  Vita  Nuova  and  the  Divina  Commedia  of  Dante, 
the  Sonnets  of  Petrarch  and  the  Tales  of  Boccaccio  will  be  read  m 
the  original. 

302.  History  of  Italian  Literature  in  the  Nineteenth  Century. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loi  and  201  (i  and  2  of 
ipiQ-20)  or  equivalents.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

303.  Italian  Prose  Writers  of  the  Fifteenth  and  Early  Sixteenth 

Centuries.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  on  consultation  with  the  instructor  to  juniors  and  seniors  who 
have  a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.  Three  hours  a  iveek  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  the  works  of  Macchiavelli,  Castiglione,  Savonarola 
and  other  writers  of  the  period  will  be  read  in  the  original. 

304.  Italian  Poets  of  the  Fifteenth  and  Early  Sixteenth  Centuries. 

(Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  on  consultation  with  the  instructor  to  juniors  and  seniors  who 
have  a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  Poliziano,  Lorenzo  de'  Medici,  Boiardo,  Ariosto, 
Michael  Angelo,  Vittoria  Colonna,will  be  read  in  the  original. 

While  courses  7  and  8  are  continuous,  one  being  the  complement 
of  the  other,  they  may  be  elected  separately. 

305.  Literature    of    the    Italian    Renaissance.       (Not    offered     in 

1920-21.) 

Open  on  consultation  with  the  instructor  to  graduate  students  who  have 
a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 


1920-21  Latin  119 

It  is  not  the  intention  of  the  instructor  to  cover  the  entire  period 
of  the  Renaissance  but  to  treat  of  certain  aspects  only,  the  work  to 
adjust  itself  to  the  needs  of  the  individual  student.  Under  the 
supervision  of  the  instructor  the  student  will  choose  some  author, 
or  phase,  or  problem  of  Italian  Uterature  for  special  study,  report- 
ing thereon  weekly. 


LATIN 

Professors:  Adeline  Belle  Hawes,  M.A. 
Alice  Walton,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor:  Caroline  Rebecca  Fletcher,  M.A. 
Assistant  Professor:  Anna  Bertha  Miller,  Ph.D. 

101.  Introduction  to  Latin  Literature. 

Open  to  freshmen,  and  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have 
had  no  Latin  in  college.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton,  Miss  Fletcher,  Miss  Miller. 

A  brief  survey  of  the  literature,  illustrated  by  short  passages 
from  representative  authors. 

A  more  detailed  study  of  certain  masterpieces  in  prose  and  verse, 
with  special  regard  to  their  literary  form  and  their  influence  upon 
modern  writers. 

First  Semester,  Studies  in  Prose  Authors:  Cicero:  Essay  on 
Friendship,  and  selections  from  his  correspondence  with  friends. 
Phny  the  Younger:  The  letter  as  a  literary  form.  Letters  of  Eras- 
mus. 

Second  Semester,  Selections  from  Latin  Poets:  Terence:  Scenes 
from  one  or  more  comedies.  Ovid:  Passages  from  the  Metamor- 
phoses.    Short  selections  from  other  poets. 

102.  Contributions    of    Latin    Literature    to    Modern    Life    and 

Thought. 

Open  to  freshmen,  and  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have 
had  no  Latin  in  college.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Miller. 

The  study  of  passages  in  Latin  authors  embodying  certain  funda- 
mental ideas  which  are  a  part  of  the  classical  heritage  of  modem 
life.  The  reading  and  class  discussion  will  center  about  topics 
suggested  in  such  current  terms  as  imperial  destiny,  citizenship, 
nationalism,  the  State  Church,  humanism,  etc.  The  readings  will 
be  selected  from  Catullus,  Cicero,  Horace,  Livy,  Ovid,  Vergil,  and 
other  authors. 


120  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

201.  Horace. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  102  (i  or  j  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

The  Odes  are  studied,  with  selections  from  the  Epistles. 

202.  Vergil. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  102  (i  or  j  of  ipig- 
20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hawes. 

Selections  from  the  Bucolics,  Georgics,  and  Mneid  VII-XII. 

203.  TiBULLUs,  Propertius,  and  Ovid. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  102  (i  or  3  of  iQig- 
20) .     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

204.  Studies  in  Tacitus  and  Pliny. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  a  semester  course  of  grade  II. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Hawes,  Miss  Walton. 

Tacitus,  Germania  and  Agricola,  with  selections  from  the  other 
works.  Pliny's  Letters.  The  work  in  Pliny  includes  careful  study 
of  certain  letters  and  the  rapid  reading  of  many  others. 

205.  Cicero.    Essays  and  Letters. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  a  semester  course  of  grade  II. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

206.  Latin  Prose  Composition.    Intermediate  Course. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  102  {i  or  3  of 
igig-20)  and  are  taking  a  full  cotirse  in  the  department.  One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

207.  Sight  Reading  in  Prose  and  Verse. 

Open  to  students  who  are  taking  a  full  course  of  grade  II.  One  hour 
a  week  for  a  year.  A  second  appointment  with  the  instructor  is  sub- 
stituted for  preparation. 

Miss  Miller. 


1920-21  Latin  .  121 

208.  Roman  Life  and  Customs. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  w^ithout  prerequisite,  and  to  sophomores 
who  have  completed  course  loi  or  102  (i  or  3  of  igig-20).  One  hour 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Miller. 

Lectures,  illustrated  by  photographs  and  lantern  slides,  on  sub- 
jects connected  with  the  daily  life  and  surroundings  of  the  Romans, 
such  as  family  life,  dress,  education,  buildings,  roads,  travel,  social 
functions,  amusements,  religious  customs,  etc.  The  required  read- 
ing will  be  mainly  in  English. 

SOL  Comedy.    Plautus  and  Terence. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hawes. 

This  course  includes  the  careful  study  of  two  or  more  plays  to- 
gether with  the  rapid  reading  of  several  others. 

302.  Satire.    Horace  and  Juvenal. 

Ope?t  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Hawes. 

This  course  includes  the  reading  of  selected  satires  of  Horace  and 
Juvenal,  with  study  of  other  Roman  satirists  by  lectures  and  special 
topics.     Sight  reading  in  Martial. 

303.  Latin  Epigraphy.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

Selected  inscriptions  will  be  studied  both  for  their  content  as 
sources  of  Roman  public  and  private  life,  and  their  form. 
Egbert's  Latin  Inscriptions  and  facsimiles  will  be  used. 

304.  Topography  or  Roman  Sites.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

Architectural  History  and  Topography  of  Ancient  Rome  and  of 
typical  municipal  and  provincial  towns. 


122  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

305.  Liv-Y.    Books.    I-X. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

Study  of  the  sources  of  the  early  history  of  the  Roman  Republic. 
Lectures  and  collateral  reading. 

306.  Ovid,  Fasti;  Cicero,  De  Divinatione,  De  Natura  Deorum. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

The  early  religious  institutions  of  the  Romans  will  be  studied  from 
these  sources  and  from  other  selected  readings. 

307.  Latin  Literature  of  the  Early  Christian  Period. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Miller. 

Readings  from  the  Early  Christian  Apologists  and  Fathers  illus- 
trating the  contact  of  Christian  ideals  with  Pagan  thought  and  civ- 
ilization.    Latin  Hymns. 

This  course  may  count  as  an  elective  in  the  Department  of  Biblical 
History. 

308.  Latin  Prose  Composition. 

Open  at  the  discretion  of  the  instructor  to  students  who  have  completed 
course  206  {11  of  igiQ-20),  and  who  are  taking  a  full  course  in  the  de- 
partment.   One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

309 J.  Literature  of  the  Roman  Empire. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  three  full  courses.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hawes. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  secure  an  acquaintance  with  many 
representative  authors  of  the  Roman  Empire,  and  to  show  the  in- 
terest and  the  value  of  the  "Silver  Latinity"  and  the  writers  of 
the  later  Imperial  Period.  The  readings,  which  include  both 
poetry  and  prose,  and  vary  somewhat  from  year  to  year,  will  in- 
clude selections  from  Velleius  Paterculus,  Seneca,  Quintilian, 
Tacitus,  Martial,  Apuleius,  Claudian,  Boethius,  and  other  authors. 

J  Courses  3og  and  310  are  not  given  in  the  same  year. 


1920-21  Mathematics  123 

The  course  includes  also  a  few  lectures  on  various  aspects  of  society 
in  the  time  of  the  Empire. 

Rapid  reading  without  translation  is  one  of  the  features  of  this 
course. 
310t.  History  of  Latin  Poetry.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Part  I,  Poetry  of  the  Republic. 

Part  II,  Post- Augustan  Poetry. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  three  full  courses.     Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hawes. 

In  Part  I  some  study  will  be  given  to  the  beginnings  of  Latin 
poetry  and  the  earlier  poets,  but  the  main  emphasis  will  be  placed 
upon  the  poets  of  the  Ciceronian  Age,  Catullus  and  Lucretius. 
Since  the  Augustan  poets  are  studied  in  the  grade  II  courses,  that 
period  will  be  considered  only  by  way  of  review  and  comparison. 
In  Part  II  the  aim  w^ill  be  to  secure  an  acquaintance  with  repre- 
sentative poets  of  different  periods,  and  to  show  the  interest  and  the 
value  of  the  later  Latin  poetry. 

Rapid  reading  without  translation  is  one  of  the  features  of  this 
course. 
321.  Outline  History  of  Latin  Literature.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Primarily  for  graduates.    Open  to  qualified  seniors  by  permission  of 
the  department. 

Lectures  and  readings,  with  direction  of  the  students'  private 
reading. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  sur\-ey  of  the  subject, 
tracing  the  beginnings  and  development  of  the  various  kinds  of 
prose  and  poetry,  and  considering  the  changes  in  the  political  and 
social  conditions  under  which  Latin  literature  developed. 

MATHEMATICS 

Professors:  Helen  Abbot  Merrill,  Ph.D. 

RoxANA  Hayward  Vivian,  Ph.D., 

director  of  the  department  of  hygiene. 
Associate  Professor:  Clara  Eliza  Smith,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professors:  Mabel  Minerva  Young,  Ph.D. 

Lennie  Phoebe  Copeland,  Ph.D. 
Mary  Florence  Curtis,  Ph.D. 
Instructors:  Helen  Barton,  B.A. 

Marion  Elizabeth  Stark,  M.A. 
lOL  Trigonometry. 

Required  of  freshmen.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Smith,  Miss  Young,  Miss  Copeland, 
Miss  Curtis,  Miss  Barton,  Miss  Stark. 

%  Courses  309  and  310  are  not  given  in  the  same  year. 


124  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Exponential  equations,  trigonometric  equations  and  transforma- 
tions, solution  of  plane  and  spherical  triangles. 

102.  Higher  Algebra. 

Required  of  freshmen  who  do  not  take  course  103.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Smith,  Miss  Young,  Miss  Copeland, 
Miss  Curtis,  Miss  Barton,  Miss  Stark. 

The  elementary  theory  of  determinants,  followed  by  a  study  of 
limits  and  derivatives,  upon  which  the  work  in  series  and  theory  of 
equations  is  based. 

103 f.  The  Elements  of  Analytic  Geometry. 

Open  to  approved  freshmen  as  an  alternative  to  course  102.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Smith,  Miss  Young, 
Miss  Curtis,  Miss  Barton. 

A  brief  course,  covering  the  usual  topics,  and  planned  to  intro- 
duce students  as  early  as  possible  to  advanced  courses  in  mathe- 
matics.    The  necessary  topics  in  higher  algebra  will  be  treated. 

201.  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  loi  and  102  (14  and  i  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Merrill,  Miss  Copeland. 

The  more  elementary  parts  of  Analytic  Geometry  and  Calculus. 
To  be  followed  in  1921-22  by  a  course  in  Calculus  and  its  Applica- 
tions, the  two  covering  the  ground  of  courses  2  and  3  of  1919-20. 

203.  History  of  Elementary  Mathematics. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  2  of  igig-20 
or  course  201,  or  course  301  (j  of  igip-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  second  semester. 

Miss  Copeland. 

The  evolution  of  the  fundamental  concepts  of  mathematics. 
Great  mathematicians  and  their  chief  contributions  to  elementary 
mathematics.  A  brief  survey  of  modem  developments  in  mathe- 
matics and  its  literature.  A  standard  text  is  used,  supplemented  by 
lectures  and  short  reports  chiefly  based  upon  rare  old  books  in  the 
mathematical  library. 

t  Course  103  will  count  one  hour  only  toward  the  B.A.  degree  for  students  who  offer 
course  102  also. 


1920-21  Mathematics  125 

204.  Introduction  to  the  Theory  of  Statistics. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  102  (i  of  igip-20)  and 
either  course  loi  or  10 j  {14  or  15  of  igig-20).  One  hour  a  iveek  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Young. 

Lectures  with  supplementary  reading  on  some  of  the  mathemat- 
ical principles  and  methods  used  in  statistical  work.  Each  student 
will  present  one  or  more  studies  based  upon  data  drawn  from 
economic,  psychological,  scientific  or  other  sources. 

205.  Problem  Work  in  Statistics.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  102  (i  of  iQig-20)  and 
either  course  loi  or  10 j  {14  or  15  of  igig-20).    One  hour  a  week  for 
'     a  year. 

Miss  Vivian. 

The  class  will  meet  two  periods  a  week  for  problem  work  and  ex- 
ercises in  the  collection  and  arrangement  of  material,  and  certain 
methods  will  be  presented  in  addition  to  those  in  course  204. 

Note. — Course  204  is  primarily  for  theory  and  for  those  students 
who  wish  to  use  critically  the  statistics  of  others.  Course  205  is 
primarily  for  problem  work  and  for  those  students  who  wish  prac- 
tice in  collecting  and  arranging  statistical  material.  Students  may 
elect  course  204  without  course  205,  but  not  course  205  without 
course  204. 

206.  Descriptive  Geometry. 

Open  to  students  who  are  taking  a  three-hour  elective  course  in  Math- 
ematics.   One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Merrill. 

The  theory  and  practice  of  the  representation  of  geometric  figures. 
The  use  of  two  or  more  planes  of  projection  in  representing  lines, 
surfaces,  and  solids.  Shades  and  shadows.  One  lecture  a  week  with 
one  laboratory  period. 

301.  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2  of  igig-20  or  course 
103  {is  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith,  Miss  Young,  Miss  Curtis. 
The  applications  include  a  course  in  curve  tracing. 

302.  Higher  Analysis. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  (j  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Merrill. 


126  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Differentiability  and  integrability  of  functions,  continuity,  con- 
vergency  of  series,  representation  of  functions  by  power  series, 
theory  of  integration,  infinite  integrals,  elliptic  integrals,  Fourier 
series,  and  other  allied  subjects. 

303*.  Differential  Equations. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  (j  of  igig-20).     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Curtis. 

An  introductory  course  in  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equa- 
tions. 

304.  Theory   of   Equations,   with   Determinants.      (Not   offered  in 

1920-21.) 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  301  (j  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

The  work  is  based  on  Bumside  and  Panton's  Theory  of  Equations. 

305.  Solid  Analytic  Geometry.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  301  (5  of 
igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

The  straight  line;  the  plane;  surfaces  of  the  second  order.  Brief 
study  of  surfaces  in  general. 

306.  Modern  Synthetic  Geometry. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  3.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Merrill. 

Metrical  and  projective  properties  of  plane  and  sheaf  forms  of 
the  first  and  second  orders;  the  anharmonic  ratio;  harmonic  forms; 
the  method  of  inversion;  involution;  collineation;  the  law  of  dual- 
ity; theory  of  poles  and  polars;  reciprocation;  space  forms  and 
surfaces  of  the  second  order.  Given  by  lectures  and  references, 
with  constant  practice  in  the  solution  of  geometrical  problems. 

307.  Higher  Plane  Curves.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  {3  of  igig-20).     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Young. 

Preliminary  study  of  selected  topics  in  algebra  and  of  homo- 
geneous co-ordinates.     General  properties  of  curves  derived  from 

•  Physics  305,  if  preceded   by  Mathematics  303,  may   be  counted   toward  a  major  in 
Mathematics. 


1920-21  Music  127 

the  homogeneous  equation  of  the  nth  degree,  and  the  principles 
developed  applied  to  a  brief  review  of  the  conic  and  a  detailed  study 
of  curves  of  the  third  order.  A  lecture  course,  with  reading  from 
standard  texts. 

308.  Introduction  to  the  Theory  of  Functions  of  a  Complex  Vari- 
able. 

Opeyi  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  (5  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smith. 

Elementary  treatment  of  analytic  functions.  Infinite  series  and 
products,  with  applications  to  Beta,  Gamma,  and  elliptic  functions. 

MUSIC 

Professors:  Hamilton  Crawford  Macdougall,  Mus.D. 

Clarence  Grant  Hamilton,  M.A. 
Instructors:  Emily  Josephine  Hurd. 

Albert  Thomas  Foster. 

Blanche  Francis  Brocklebank. 

Joseph  Goudreault. 

Raymond  Clark  Robinson. 
Assistant:  Miriam  Louise  Merritt,  Mus.B. 

The  Wellesley  College  Choir  of  forty  members,  founded  in  1900, 
furnishes  the  music  for  the  Sunday  services  in  the  Memorial  Chapel. 
Any  student  with  a  good  natural  voice  is  eligible  for  membership; 
trials  to  fill  vacancies  are  held  at  the  opening  of  each  College  year. 

The  college  Symphony  Orchestra,  consisting  of  about  thirty 
student  and  faculty  members,  was  founded  in  1906.  It  offers  ad- 
vantages of  competent  instruction  in  ensemble  playing  imder  a  pro- 
fessional conductor.  It  gives  one  or  two  concerts  a  year  with  a 
program  of  classical  music.  Any  members  of  the  College  who  have 
suflicient  technique  are  admitted  to  membership. 

A  limited  number  of  tickets  for  reserved  seats  at  the  concerts  of 
the  Boston  Symphony  Orchestra  in  Symphony  Hall,  Boston,  axe 
free  to  students  in  the  department  who  are  able  to  use  them  profit- 
ably. 

I.     Musical  Theory 

The  courses  in  theory  and  history  are  open  to  all  students  without 
regard  to  previous  musical  knowledge,  and  count  toward  the  B.A. 
degree.  The  history  and  theory  courses  are  subject  to  no  separate 
tuition  fee,  with  the  exception  of  courses  202,  205,  303,  and  304, 
where  a  nominal  fee  of  five  dollars  is  charged  for  tuning  and  repairs 
of  instruments.  Courses  102,  206,  305,  306,  307,  and  308  are  de- 
signed especially  for  those  students  desiring  to  gain  an  appreciative 
knowledge  of  musical  literature. 


128  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

101.  Elementary  Harmony. 

Open  only  to  freshmen  who  are  taking  practical  music.     Two  hours  a 
week  for  a  year.    No  prerequisites. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  is  designed  for  freshmen  who  enter  college  with  the 
intention  of  specializing  in  music.  It  may  be  followed  by  course 
20I,  but  not  by  course  102.  This  course  covers  musical  notation,  the 
formation  of  triads  and  chords  of  the  seventh,  the  invention  of 
melodies  and  their  harmonization,  the  simpler  kinds  of  non-har- 
monic tones,  elementary  form,  and  ear  training.  Carefully  kept 
notebooks  are  a  part  of  the  work. 


102.  Introductory  Harmony. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  seniors,  and  advanced  freshmen  {five-year 
music  course).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year.    No  prerequisites. 

Mr.  Robinson. 

This  course  covers  the  ground  necessary  for  admission  to  course 
201  or  305,  and  also  offers  a  substantial  foundation  for  subsequent 
work  in  practical  or  theoretical  music.  It  includes  the  material  of 
the  ordinary  elementary  harmony  course  and  in  addition  emphasizes 
ear  training  and  harmonic  analysis. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  course  loi. 


103.  Interpretation. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  are  at  the  same  time 
taking  lessons  in  practical  music  in  the  department  and  who  have 
acquired  a  satisfactory  degree  of  skill.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall,  Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  is  a  training  in  the  principles  of  interpretation,  de- 
veloped through  the  performance  in  class  of  music  studied  with  the 
private  teacher  and  by  listening  to  and  analyzing  compositions  per- 
formed by  others.  The  course  concerns  itself  with  the  recognition 
of  the  simple  cadences,  harmonic  figuration  as  applied  to  the  accom- 
paniment, the  broader  rhythmical  distinctions,  the  relations  of  mel- 
ody and  accompaniment,  the  school  of  the  composer,  biographical 
data,  and  the  simpler  elements  of  form. 

Note. — Students  wishing  to  elect  the  course  should  apply  directly 
to  the  head  of  the  department. 

Students  may  elect  practical  music  without  electing  the  course 
in  interpretation;  but  no  one  may  elect  the  course  in  interpretation 
without  at  the  same  time  electing  practical  music. 


1920-21  Music  129 

201.  Advanced  Harmony. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  {is  of  igig-20)  or 
course  102  {8  of  igig-20)  or  the  equivalent.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Mr.  Hamilton,  Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  covers  in  extenso  the  various  classes  of  non-harmonic 
tones,  chords  of  the  ninth  modulation,  elementary  orchestration, 
writing  for  the  piano,  organ,  and  for  voices.  The  course  aims  to 
give  facility  in  elementary  composition. 

202.  Applied  Harmony. 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course  201 
(i  of  igig-20).  Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year.  A  laboratory  fei  of 
five  dollars  is  attached  to  this  course. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  pianoforte  the 
principles  taught  in  course  201,  following  what  may  be  termed  a 
laboratory  method. 

Note. — Instruction  will  be  given  in  small  classes  of  not  less  than 
three  students.  The  course  is  in  no  sense  a  substitute  for  piano- 
forte lessons.  Students  must  satisfy  the  head  of  the  department 
that  they  have  a  pianoforte  technique  adequate  for  the  work;  in 
general,  the  ability  to  play  the  easier  Mendelssohn  Songs  without 
Words,  and  to  read  hymn  tunes  accurately  at  sight  will  be  sufficient. 


203.  Musical  Analysis. 

Open  to  students  who  have  co7npleted  course  loi  {15  of  igig-20)  or 
102  {8  of  igjg-20)  or  the  equivalent.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Robinson. 

A  course  both  technical  and  appreciative,  designed  to  furnish 
students  with  a  knowledge  of  harmony  and  musical  form  sufficient 
for  the  intelligent  understanding  of  the  standard  classical  and 
modern  works.  The  course  takes  up  the  study  of  the  principal 
chords,  their  function  in  the  musical  sentence,  the  smaller  forms 
(song  form,  the  small  classical  and  modem  dance  forms)  and  then 
proceeds  to  the  larger  forms  (Suite,  Sonata,  Symphony,  Canon, 
Fugue,  Overture,  Symphonic  Poem).  The  smaller  forms  will  be 
studied  through  individual  and  class  analysis,  individual  reports 
and  short  papers,  while  the  victrola  and  player-piano  will  be  freely 
used  in  the  analysis  of  the  larger  forms.  No  original  work  in  com- 
position is  required. 


130  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

204.  Interpretation. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loj  {2  of  igig-20)  and  who 
are  at  the  same  time  taking  lessons  in  practical  music  in  the  department 
and  have  acquired  a  satisfactory  degree  of  skill;  also  by  special  permis- 
sion to  seniors.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall,  Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  103  (2  of  1919-20).  The 
subject-matter  of  the  course  is  the  thematic  and  polyphonic  melody, 
the  larger  forms,  harmony  in  its  aesthetic  bearings,  the  aesthetic 
effects  of  the  more  complicated  rhythms,  comparative  criticism  and 
the  various  schools  of  composition.  See  note  to  course  103  (2  of 
1919-20). 

206.  History  of  Music. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have  had  one 
course  in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

Lectures  on  the  history  of  music  of  all  nations,  with  assigned 
readings  and  frequent  musical  illustrations,  from  which  the  student 
is  taught  to  compile  analytical  programs  and  critiques. 

The  course  is  non-technical  and  no  previous  knowledge  of  music 
is  required.  It  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or  are 
taking  course  305  (4  of  1919-20). 

301.  Counterpoint. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  (i  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Robinson. 

Counterpoint  in  two,  three,  and  four  voices;  double  counter- 
point; analysis;  the  distinctions  between  strict  (modal)  and  free 
counterpoint;  the  rules  for  the  latter  deduced  from  contempora- 
neous practice;  fugue  for  two  and  three  voices. 

302.  Musical  Form. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  (6  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Robinson. 

This  course  aims  to  cover  the  various  imitative  forms,  the  suite 
and  sonata  forms,  the  large  forms  of  vocal  and  orchestral  music. 

Students  have  the  opportunity  of  doing  practical  work  in  com- 
position (song  form,  sonata  movements,  etc.). 


1920-21  Music  131 

303.  Applied  Counterpoint.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course 

301  (<5  of  igig-20) .  Two  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester.  To  this 
course  a  laboratory  fee  of  two  dollars  and  a  half  is  attached. 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  pianoforte  the 
laws  of  simple  and  double  counterpoint  by  the  constant  playing  and 
analysis  of  the  best  examples  from  the  masters.  See  note  to  course 
202. 

304.  Applied  Form.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course 

302  (7  of  igig-20).  Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester.  To 
this  course  a  laboratory  fee  of  two  dollars  and  a  half  is  attached. 

This  course  aims  to  play  and  to  analyze  a  great  number  of  speci- 
mens of  the  various  forms,  with  careful  analysis  and  classification. 
See  note  to  course  202. 

305.  The  Development  of  the  x\rt  of  Music.     (Not  offered  in  1920- 

21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  102  (8  of  ipig-20),  and 
201  (i  of  igi0-2o)  or  203  (5  of  igig-20).  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

A  course  in  the  appreciation  of  music  designed  to  develop  musi- 
cal perception  and  the  ability  to  hsten  intelligently  to  the  best 
music.  It  includes  the  evolution  of  rhythm,  harmony,  and  melody, 
and  their  powers  and  offices  in  musical  expression;  the  principal 
musical  forms  analytically  considered;  studies  of  the  principal 
composers,  their  lives,  their  strongest  works,  their  relation  to  the 
progress  of  musical  art.  Some  great  work  will  be  selected  for 
study  during  the  year. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or  are  taking 
course  206. 

306.  Beethoven  and  Wagner. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  (i  of  igig-20)  or  its 
equivalent.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

An  intensive  course  devoted  to  the  analyses  of  selected  pianoforte 
sonatas,  chamber  music,  the  symphonies  of  Beethoven,  "Fidelio," 
and  the  operas  of  Wagner.  The  aim  of  the  course  will  be  to  give  an 
intimate  knowledge  of  the  two  composers'  works  and  to  estimate 
their  place  in  musical  history. 


132  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

807.  Schubert  and  Schumann.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  and  to  sophomores  who  have  had  one  course 
in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

An  illustrated  lecture  course,  intensive  in  character,  devoted  to 
the  study  of  the  principal  works  of  the  composers  named.  The 
romantic  movement  in  music,  the  development  of  the  German  Song, 
the  poetical  and  lyric  piano  piece  and  the  birth  of  musical  criticism 
are  among  the  principal  topics  treated. 

The  work  of  the  class  will  be  based  mainly  upon  assigned  read- 
ings and  critical  papers. 

308.  Mendelssohn  and  Chopin.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  and  to  sophomores  who  have  had  one  course 
in  the  department.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester . 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

An  illustrated  lecture  course,  intensive  in  character,  devoted  to 
the  study  of  the  principal  works  of  the  composers  named.  The 
beginnings  of  modernism,  the  culmination  of  sacred  music  in  the 
oratorio,  the  age  of  the  virtuoso,  the  development  of  instruments 
and  individual  and  emotional  treatment  in  music  are  the  principal 
topics  studied. 

The  work  of  the  class  will  be  based  mainly  upon  assigned  readings 
and  critical  papers. 

309.  The  Symphony  prom  Joseph  Haydn  to  the  Present  Time.    (Not 

offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  201  and  305  (i  and  4  of 
igig-20)  or  their  equivalent  and  who  have  some  facility  in  playing 
the  pianoforte.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

A  historical  course,  tracing  the  developing  of  the  Symphony 
in  its  form,  its  instrumentation,  and  its  content. 

310.  Free  Composition.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  by  permission  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  301  and 
302  {6  and  7  of  igig~2o).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

311.  Applied  History.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  those  students  only  who  are  at  the  same  time  taking  course  305 
(4  of  iQig-20).  Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year.  A  laboratory  fee  of 
five  dollars  is  attached  to  this  course. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 


1920-21  Music  133 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  pianoforte  the 
development  of  music  from  the  organum  of  Hucbald  to  the  Wagner 
opera.  Specimens  of  the  music  of  various  schools  and  periods 
will  be  collected,  played,  and  analyzed.     See  note  to  course  202. 

II.     Practical  Music  (Instrumental  and  Vocal  Lessons) 

Attention  is  called  to  the  fact  that  a  student  need  not  necessarily  spend  five  years 
in  college  in  order  to  carry  on  practical  music  at  the  same  time  with  the  academic  course. 
See  (a)  foUowmg. 

It  is  believed  that  students  having  a  command  of  pianoforte  or  organ 
technique  w-ill  be  able  to  profit  by  the  theoretical  instruction  given  in  the 
department  to  a  fuller  degree  than  those  without  such  a  technique.  To 
encourage  students  to  acquire  a  technique,  as  well  as  to  furnish  authori- 
tative instruction,  the  department  undertakes  to  give  lessons  in  piano- 
forte, organ,  violin,  and  violoncello  playing,  and  in  singing.  Practical 
work  is  an  elective,  and  students  should  notify  the  department  of  their 
election  of  the  subject  in  the  usual  manner  and  at  the  proper  time.  At- 
tention is  called  to  the  fact  that  students  who  elect  Musical  Theory  103  and 
204,  are  thereby  obtaining  two  hours'  credit  toward  the  B.A.  degree  in  con- 
nection with  work  done  in  practical  music.  It  is  offered  to  all  students, 
whether  candidates  for  degrees  or  not,  as  stated  below: — 

(a)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  propose  to  spend  hut  four  years  in 
college  may  take  practical  music,  provided  that  they  obtain  each  year  the 
permission  of  the  Dean  of  the  College  as  well  as  of  the  Professor  of  Music; 
they  must  also  take  a  full  course  in  Musical  Theory,  unless  they  have  com- 
pleted two  two-hour  or  three-hour  courses  in  the  subject. 

(6)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  are  willing  to  devote  five  years  to 
the  college  course  will  be  permitted  to  take  practical  music  each  year  of  the 
course,  governed  by  the  restriction  laid  down  in  (a). 

(c)  Candidates  for  the  B.x\.  degree  who  wish  also  the  Certificate  of  the 
Department  of  Music  should  plan  to  devote  five  years  to  the  college  course. 
Such  students  are  required  to  take  practical  music,  two  lessons  a  week, 
throughout  the  five  years.  They  must  complete,  satisfactorily  to  the 
department,  a  course  in  the  literature  of  the  instrument  chosen  or  of  the 
voice;  they  must  apply  for  the  certificate  at  least  three  years  in  advance. 
After  the  first  year  the  study  of  Musical  Theory'  is  required. 

(d)  Students  not  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  desire  to  specialize 
in  music  must  meet  the  requirements  prescribed  for  admission  to  the  fresh- 
man class,  and  must  in  addition  pass  an  examination  on  the  rudiments  of 
music.  This  examination  will  be  based  upon  W.  H.  Cummings'  Rudiments 
of  Music  (No.  2  of  Novello  Company's  Music  Primers),  chapters  6,  9, 
and  10  omitted.  Special  students  must  take  both  Musical  Theory  and 
vocal  or  instrumental  lessons,  two  a  week,  with  not  less  than  twelve  hours 
of  weekly  practice.  They  must  also  take  from  six  to  nine  hours  per  week 
of  academic  work,  including  Musical  Theory,  as  may  be  decided  in  consulta- 
tion with  the  Dean  of  the  College. 


134  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

(e)  Students  not  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  wish  the  Certifi- 
cate of  the  Department  of  Music  must  comply  with  the  conditions  laid  down 
in  {d) ;  moreover,  the  academic  work  taken  must  include  modern  languages. 
Such  students  must  apply  for  the  certificate  on  entering  the  department, 
and  must  have  already  acquired  the  fundamental  technique  of  the  instru- 
ment chosen  or  of  the  voice.  The  time  occupied  in  study  for  the  certificate 
depends  upon  the  talent,  upon  the  proficiency  of  the  student  at  entrance, 
and  upon  her  subsequent  diligence;  but  in  general  four  years  at  least  are 
necessary.  The  various  courses  are  so  arranged  that  the  pupil  on  comple- 
tion will  have  an  acquaintance  with  the  best  musical  literature. 

(0  Graduates  of  Wellesley  College  or  of  other  institutions  may  make 
special  arrangement  for  instrumental  or  vocal  lessons. 

(g)  Permission  to  practice  in  Music  Hall  cannot  be  given  to  students  not 
regularly  registered  in  the  department. 

Qi)  Students  whose  progress  is  not  satisfactory  may  be  required  to 
discontinue  their  lessons. 


PHILOSOPHY   AND   PSYCHOLOGY 

Professors:  Mary  Whiton  Calkins,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D. 
Mary  Sophia  Case,  B.A. 

Eleanor  Acheson  McCulloch  Gamble,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor:  Horace  Bidwell  English,  Ph.D. 
Instructor:  Flora  Isabel  MacKinnon,'  M.A. 
Reader  in  Philosophy:  Grace  Allerton  Andrews,  M.A. 
Graduate  Assistants:  Ruth  Alice  Prouty,  B.A. 

Marjorie  Cornelia  Day,  B.A. 
Florence  Moran  Orndorff,  B.A. 

The  requirement  in  philosophy  for  a  degree  is  met  by  course  loi  (first  semester)  fol- 
lowed in  the  same  year  by  course  102  (second  semester). 

The  department  offers  direction  to  graduate  students  in  independent^  work  in  psy- 
chology and  in  philosophy,  and  conducts  graduate  conferences  with  individual  students. 

I.     Logic 

103.  Logic. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Gamble. 

Training  in  argument  and  in  logical  criticism.  Work  expressly 
designed  to  meet  the  practical  needs  of  the  student.  The  course 
deals  not  only  with  the  principles  of  deductive  logic,  but  also  with 
elementary  questions  of  observation  and  testimony,  and  of  scien- 
tific, statistical,  and  legal  evidence.  Text-book:  Sellars,  Essentials 
of  Logic. 

'  Appointed  for  second  semester  only. 


1920-21  Philosophy  and  Psychology  135 

II.    Psychology 

For  description  of  the  Psychology  Laboratory,  see  pa^e  171. 

101.  Introductory  Course  in  Psychology. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.     Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Lecture  divisions  A  and  B,  Miss  Gamble; 

Division  C,  Mr.  English. 

Laboratory  sections,  Miss  Gamble,  Miss  Calkins, 

Mr.  English,  Miss  Prouty,  Miss  Day. 

This  course  aims  to  secure  to  students  an  acquaintance  with 
primary  mental  facts,  to  give  them  a  definite  notion  of  the  topics 
treated  and  of  the  experimental  and  statistical  methods  employed 
in  psychology,  to  provide  a  psychological  basis  for  the  study  of 
philosophy,  of  sociology,  and  of  education,  and  to  fit  them  for  more 
advanced  psychological  work.  The  course  is  conducted  mainly 
by  lectures,  with  weekly  laboratory  or  conference  appointments. 
The  course  is  at  present  based  largely  upon  an  outline  to  be  obtained 
from  the  instructor.  Supplementary  text-books:  Calkins,  A  First 
Book  in  Psychology;  Titchener,  A  Text-book  of  Psychology;  Breese, 
Psychology;  Warren,  Human  Psychology;  James,  Psychology,  Briefer 
Course. 

202.  Differential  and  Applied  Psychology. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi  (7  of  igig-20)  or  course 
I  of  jgiS-iQ.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gamble,  Miss  Calkins. 

This  course  will  treat  the  following  topics:  the  fundamental 
principles  of  individual  psychology;  social  hygiene  as  based  on 
psychology  with  special  consideration  of  the  causes  and  types  of 
delinquency;  normal  individual  differences  and  mental  tests; 
mental  deficiency;  and  mental  derangement.  Among  the  books 
studied  will  be:  IVIcDougall,  Social  Psychology;  Tredgold,  Mental 
Deficiency;  WTiite,  Outlines  of  Psychiatry;  Healy,  The  Individual 
Delinquent. 

201.  Experimental  Psychology,  Historical. 

Open   to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi   (7  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  English. 

The  historical  development  of  psychological  experiment  will  be 
sketched  in  lectures.  In  the  laboratory,  each  student  will  make 
classical  experiments  in  their  modern  form  and  in  an  order  corre- 
sponding to  the  historical  development,  and  will  thus  gain  insight 
into   the  problems  attacked  and   the  partial  solutions  attained. 


136  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Special  attention  will  be  given  to  present-day  tendencies  in  psy- 
chology. 

Both  this  course  and  course  301  are  designed  to  train  the  student 
in  the  methods  of  psychological  introspection  and  experimentation. 

301.  Experimental  Psychology,  Systematic. 

Open  to  juniors,  seniors,  and  graduate  students  who  have  completed 
course  loi  (7  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  English. 

Each  student  will  perform  one  or  two  typical  experiments  in  each 
of  the  main  fields  of  psychological  investigation.  In  lectures,  the 
relation  of  experimental  results  to  general  psychological  theory  will 
be  traced. 

This  course,  like  course  201,  is  designed  to  train  the  student  in 
psychological  method. 

302.  Experimental  Problems  in  Psychology. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  or  course  301.     Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Gamble. 

This  course  consists  of  investigation  of  special  problems,  experi- 
mental or  statistical,  by  individual  students.  In  1920-21  problems 
in  the  fields  of  memorizing  and  of  mental  tests  will  be  included. 
The  methods  employed  are  wider  than  the  problems  and  are  adapted 
to  training  students  in  the  fundamental  demands  of  research. 

303.  Second  Course  in  Experimental  Problems  in  Psychology. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  302  {14  of  igiQ-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gamble. 

203.  Readlng  Course  in  German  or  in  French  Psychological  Texts. 
(Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  are  taking  elective  work  in  Psychology.    One  hour 
a  week  for  a  year. 

III.     Pliilosophy 
102,  Introduction  to  Philosophy. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  loi 
(7  of  igiQ-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Lecture  divisions  A  and  B,  Tvliss  Calkins; 

Division  C,  Miss  MacKinnon. 

Conferences,  Miss  Calkins,  Miss  MacKinnon, 

Mr.  English,  Miss  Day,  Miss  Orndorff. 

This  course  begins  with  a  brief  study  of  ethics,  treated  from  a 
psychological  starting  point,  as  the  science  of  the  moral  self.     The 


1920-21  Philosophy  and  Psychology  137 

emphasized  topics  of  this  study  are  the  nature  of  goodness  and  of 
duty  and  the  relation  of  virtue  to  instinct  and  to  habit.  The  greater 
part  of  the  course  is  devoted  to  the  discussion  of  the  philosophical 
problems  raised  in  the  study  of  psychology,  the  nature  of  body,  the 
nature  of  mind,  and  the  connection  between  mind  and  body.  The 
relations  of  philosophy  to  physical  science  and  to  religion  are  briefly 
considered.  The  discussion  is  based  upon  Descartes,  Meditations; 
selections  from  La  ^lettrie,  and  from  Haeckel;  Berkeley,  Principles 
of  Human  Knowledge  and  Three  Dialogues  between  Hylas  and  Philo- 
nous. 

204.  Greek  Ethical  Theories  in  their  Relation  to  Twentieth  Cen- 
tury Ethics. 


Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are 
loi  (7  oj  igicr20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Case. 

Primarily  text-study,  (a)  Brief  study  of  pre-Sophistic  philosophy. 
Lectures  and  outlines;  fragments  of  Herakleitos,  Parmenides  and 
Anaxagoras.  (&)  The  rise  of  ethical  inquiry.  Lectures  and  selec- 
tions from  Xenophon's  Memorabilia  and  from  the  dialogues  of 
Plato,  (c)  Plato.  The  chief  ethical  dialogues,  {d)  Aristotle. 
The  Nicomachean  Ethics;  selections  from  the  Metaphysics  and 
from  Dc  Anima.  (e)  The  Stoics  and  Epicureans.  Selections  from 
Epictetus  and  Marcus  Aurelius;  lectures  and  modern  commentaries. 
(/)  Current  and  recent  ethical  writings,  especially  on  social  ethics, 
to  be  distributed  throughout  the  year.  At  all  stages  emphasis  will 
be  laid  upon  the  underlying  metaphysics. 

205.  Social  Ethics.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  seniors.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year  with  an    additional 
appointment  in  alternate  weeks.      To  count  as  one  and  one-half  hours. 

Miss  Case. 
304.  Problems  of  Modern  Philosophy. 

Open  to  juniors  who  are  taking  course  204,  to  seniors,  and  to  gradu- 
ate students.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Calkins. 

This  course  is  conducted  through  discussions,  supplemented  by 
occasional  lectures,  on  problems  of  philosophy,  including  the  prin- 
ciple of  causation,  the  problem  of  knowledge,  the  nature  and  exis- 
tence of  the  self,  the  nature  of  the  physical  world,  the  relation  of 
idealism  to  realism,  and  the  issue  between  pluralism  and  absolutism. 
The  study  of  these  problems  involves  the  critical  reading  of  Hume's 
Inquiry  Concerning  Human  Understanding  and  parts  of  the  Treatise; 
of  portions  of  Kant's  Critique  of  Pure  Reason  and  Metaphysic  of 


138  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

Ethics;  of  Spinoza's  Ethics;  of  Fichte's  Vocation  of  Man;  and  of 
selected  chapters  from  the  writings  of  Pearson,  James,  Royce, 
Ward,  Bradley,  Bergson,  Russell,  and  other  contemporary  writers. 

305.  The  Logic  of  Hegel. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  204  and  have  completed  or 
are  taking  course  J04,  and  by  special  arrangement  to  graduate  students 
who  have  completed  course  J04.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Case. 

Text  study  of  extended  passages  from  the  Logic  of  Hegel's  En- 
cyclopedia. 

306.  Philosophy  or  Religion. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  305.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Case. 

(a)  Critical  study  of  methods  of  examining  reHgious  behefs, 
especially  the  psychological  method  and  the  method  of  Hegel.  The 
relation  of  these  methods  to  pragmatic  tests.  Readings  from  Durk- 
heim,  James,  Coe,  Royce,  Bosanquet,  Hocking,  Dewey,  and  others. 
(&)  Discussion  of  special  problems  selected  by  the  class,  (c)  Con- 
cluding lectures  on  the  significance  of  religious  experience. 

321.  Ethics. 

Open  by  permission  to  graduate  students.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Case. 

Subject  suggested  for  1920-21 :  Current  Tendencies  in  Ethics. 

322.  Constructive  Treatment  or  Problems  in  Metaphysics. 

Open  by  permission  to  graduate  students.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
first  semester. 

Miss  Calkins. 

Subject  in  1920-21:  Problems  of  the  Philosophy  of  Nature. 

323.  Special  Study  of  Philosophical  Systems.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  by  permission  to  graduate  students.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
semester  or  for  a  year. 

Subject  in  1919-20:  The  Cambridge  Platonists. 


1920-21  Physics  139 

PHYSICS 

Professor:  Louise  Sherwood  McDowell,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor:  Grace  Evangeline  Davis,*  M.A. 
Assistant  Professors:  Frances  Lowater,  Ph.D. 
Lucy  Wilson,  Ph.D. 
Assistants:  Hilda  Lydia  Begeman,  B.A. 
Elvie  Lyona  Bishop,  M.A. 
Graduate  Assistant:  Mary  Barrett  Ashbaugh,  B.S. 

101.  Elementary  Physics. 

Open  to  students  who  do  not  ofer  Physics  for  admission.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McDowell,  Miss  Wilson,  Miss  Begeman, 
Miss  Bishop,  Miss  Ashbaugh. 

This  course  is  for  beginners  and  presents  briefly  the  elementary 
principles  of  mechanics,  sound,  heat,  electricity,  and  light,  and 
their  simpler  applications.  The  course  is  conducted  by  means  of 
experimental  lectures  followed  by  laboratory  work. 

102.  General  Physics. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  admission  requirement.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lowater. 

This  course  is  intended  for  students  who  already  have  an  ele- 
mentary knowledge  of  the  phenomena  of  the  physical  world,  and 
presents  more  fully  than  course  loi  the  fimdamental  principles  in 
mechanics,  heat,  magnetism,  electricity,  sound,  and  light,  and  their 
applications.  The  course  is  conducted  by  means  of  experimental 
lectures  and  laboratory  work. 

201.  Electricity. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20)  or  course 
102  {2  of  igig-20)  and  by  special  perinission  to  juniors  and  seniors 
who  have  met  the  admission  requirement.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
first  semester. 

Miss  Davis. 

Magnetic  and  electric  fields  of  force;  the  study  and  use  of  instru- 
ments for  the  measurement  of  current,  potential  difference,  resist- 
ance, and  capacity;  electromagnetic  induction. 

202.  Heat. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  (3  of  igiQ-20)  and  by 
<  Absent  on  leave  for  the  second  semester. 


140  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

special  permission  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course 
loi  (i  of  igig-26).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wilson. 

Thermometry,  calorimetry,  properties  of  vapors  and  gases,  lique- 
faction of  gases,  transmission  of  heat  and  its  application  in  the 
heating  and  ventilation  of  buildings,  kinetic  theory,  elementary 
thermodynamics,  heat  engines. 

203.  Meteorology.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course 
loi  (i  of  igig-20)  or  who  have  met  the  admission  requirement.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

204.  The  Automobile:  Principles  and  Construction. 

Open  by  permission  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course 
loi  (i  of  igi9-2o)  or  who  have  met  the  admission  requirement.  One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wilson. 

The  internal  combustion  engine;  carburetors;  systems  of  igni- 
tion, starting  and  lighting,  and  transmission.  Lectures  with 
demonstrations  to  illustrate  the  physical  principles  involved. 
Individual  laboratory  study  of  various  automobile  mechanisms. 

301.  Light. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  {7  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Lowater. 

The  wave  theory  and  its  application  to  the  phenomena  of  dis- 
persion, interference,  diffraction,  polarization,  propagation  in  crys- 
talline media;  theory  and  use  of  optical  instruments;  modem 
methods  of  illumination. 

302.  Electromagnetic  Waves  and  Radio  Telegraphy. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  201  (7  of  1919- 
20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  McDowell. 

Alternating  currents;  electric  oscillations;  electromagnetic 
waves  and  their  application  to  radio  telegraphy  and  telephony. 

303.  Recent  Developments  in  Electricity.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  201  (7  of  J919- 
20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 


1920-21  Reading  and  Speaking  141 

304.  Theoretical  Electmcity  and  Magnetism. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  201  (7  of 
191Q-20)  and  also  course  301  (5  of  igig-20)  in  Mathematics.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  McDowell. 

The  work  is  based  upon  Starling's  Electricity  and  Magnetism  and 
free  use  is  made  of  the  calculus. 

305.  Mechanics. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  or  102  (i  or  2  of  igig- 
20)  in  Physics,  course  301  (3  of  ig>iQ-2o)  in  Mathematics  and  either 
course  304  {11  of  igiQ-20)  in  Physics  or  course  303  {10  of  1919-20) 
in  Mathematics.  When  combined  with  course  303  (10  of  1919-20) 
in  Mathematics  it  may  he  counted  toward  a  major  in  Mathematics. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Lowater. 

Equations  of  motion;  simple  harmonic  motion;  central  orbits; 
statics  of  rigid  bodies;  work,  energy;  dynamics  of  a  particle; 
motion  of  rigid  bodies. 

306.  Mathematical  Theory  of  Light.     (Not  offered  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  301  (5  of  1919-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

307.  Laboratory  Practice. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  taken  or  are  taking  a  grade  III 
course  in  the  department.    One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McDowell,  Miss  Davis, 
Miss  Lowater,  Miss  Wilson. 

Laboratory  practice  arranged  to  fit  the  needs  of  the  individual 
student.  Opportunity  will  be  given  for  a  series  of  experiments  upon 
related  topics  and  for  training  in  laboratory  technique  such  as  scien- 
tific photography. 

READING  AND  SPEAKING 

Professor:  Malvina  Bennett,  M.A. 
Assistant  Professor:  Elizabeth  Parker  Hunt,  Ph.B. 

INSTRUCTOR:    EdITH    MARGARET    SMAILL. 

Six  hours  in  this  department  may  be  counted  within  the  fifty- 
nine  required  for  the  B.A.  degree. 

101.  Reading  and  Speaking. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bennett,  Mrs.  Hunt,  Miss  Smaill. 


142  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  course  to  develop  the  ability  to  read 
aloud  simply  and  easily  and  to  speak  with  clearness  and  conviction. 

Various  forms  of  literature  studied,  and  exercises  given  to  free  the 
body  and  voice;  phonetics  and  enunciation. 

102.  English  Speech.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  all  ujider graduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

This  course  is  designed  to  teach  foreigners  the  correct  pronuncia- 
tion of  English;  for  students  who  intend  to  teach  English  speech  to 
foreigners  at  home  or  abroad;  and  to  help  all  students  who  need  to 
overcome  serious  defects  in  speech.  Attention  is  given  to  individual 
needs  and  special  exercises  prescribed. 

103.  Public  Speaking, 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.  Three  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Mrs.  Hunt. 

This  course  is  designed  to  develop  the  ability  to  speak  in  public 
effectively.  There  will  be  the  presentation  and  criticism  of  original 
speeches,  and  of  speeches  selected  from  famous  addresses. 

201.  Advanced  Course  in  Interpretative  Reading. 

Open  to  students  who  have  taken  one  course  in  the  department.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Smaill. 

Voice  Training  continued. 

The  study  and  presentation  of  various  forms  of  standard  literature. 

This  course  is  designed  primarily  to  develop  the  imaginative  and 
creative  power  of  the  individual  and  to  arouse  an  appreciation  of 
the  educational  value  of  interpretative  expression. 

Tennyson,  Browning,  Modern  Poetry,  and  Drama. 

301.  Interpretation  of  Shakespeare. 

Open  to  students  who  have  taken  one  course  in  the  depart?netit,  also  to 
those  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  English  Literature  305  or  jog. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bennett. 

Intensive  study  of  the  text  for  expression;    the  giving  under 
student  management  of  all  the  great  scenes  in  a  play. 
Three  plays  studied. 


1920-21  Spanish  143 


SPANISH 

Associate  Professor;  Alice  Huntington  Bushee,  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:  ANGELA  PALOMO,  B.A. 

Ada  May  Coe,   B.A. 

Note. — A  reading  knowledge  of  French  is  required  for  all   grade  III  work  and  desirable 
in  all  courses.     The  language  of  the  class  room  is  Spanish. 

101 1-  Elementary  Course. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee,  Miss  Palomo,  Miss  Coe. 

Grammar,  composition,  dictation,  conversation,  prepared  and 
sight  translation.  Short  lectures  are  given  in  Spanish  on  different 
literary  subjects  to  train  the  ear  and  serve  as  an  introduction  to  later 
study. 

102.  Intermediate  Course. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-zo)  or  an 
equivalent.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Palomo,  Miss  Coe. 

Grammar,  composition,  themes,  lectures,  reading  of  typical  mod- 
em novels  and  selections  from  Don  Quijote. 

201.  Spanish  Literature  in  the  Eighteenth  and  Nineteenth  Cen- 

turies. 
Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  102  {2  of  igig-20).     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  general  idea  of 
Spanish  literature  after  the  Golden  Age:  the  French  influence, 
Romanticism,  and  the  noted  authors  of  the  latter  part  of  the  nine- 
teenth century.  This  includes  the  rapid  reading  of  both  prose  and 
poetry. 

202.  Modern  Spanish  American  Literature. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  102  {2  of  igig-20).     Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Coe. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  show  the  influences  at  work  in  the 
making  of  Spanish  American  Literature  with  the  reaction,  especially 

%  Spanish  loi  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after  the  junior  year. 


144  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

in  poetry,  on  the  literature  of  Spain.  Lectures  will  be  given  on 
the  political  and  social  conditions  of  the  leading  countries. 

203.  Advanced  Conversation  and  Composition. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  102  {2  of  igi^2o).  One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Palomo. 

Three  or  four  twentieth  century  plays  will  form  the  basis  for  this 
course  and  will  give  opportunity  for  oral  discussion  and  written 
reports  on  life  in  contemporary  Spain. 

301.  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  {4  of  igig-26)  or  with 
the  permission  of  the  instructor  to  those  who  have  cojnpleted  course  202 
{6  of  igig-20).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee. 

This  course  will  be  introduced  by  a  short  general  outline  of  the 
historical  and  literary  influences  at  work  during  the  period.  Char- 
acteristic dramas  of  Lope  de  Vega,  Alarcon,  Tirso  de  Molina,  and 
Calderon  will  be  studied  as  representative  of  the  nation's  thought 
and  ideals  at  the  time. 

302.  The  Spanish  Novel. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  201  {4  of  igig-20)  or  with 
the  permission  of  the  instructor  to  those  who  have  completed  course  202 
{6  of  jgic^2o).     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bushee. 

The  first  semester  will  be  devoted  to  a  general  study  of  the  novel 
before  1650  (especially  the  caballeresca,  picaresca,  and  pastoral) 
and  its  relation  to  other  countries.  During  the  second  semester 
Don  Quijote  will  be  studied. 

303.  Old  Spanish   Literature   from    1150   to    1400.     (Not   given   in 

1920-21.) 

Open  to  graduates  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have  had  at  least  one 
course  of  grade  III.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Study  of  "El  Poema  del  Cid"  and  other  characteristic  works  of 
the  period. 


\ 


1920-21  Zoology  and  Physiology  145 


ZOOLOGY  AND    PHYSIOLOGY 

professors:  marian  elizabeth  hubbard,  b.s. 

Caroline  Burling  Thompson,  Ph.D. 
Associate  Professor:  Julia  Eleanor  Moody,  Ph.D. 
Assistant  Professor:  Alice  Middleton  Boring,  Ph.D. 

INSTRUCTOR:    MARGARET    ALGER    HAYDEN,    M.A. 

Assistants:  Margaret  Esther  Elliott,  B.S. 
Harriet  Vose,  M.A. 
Eleanor  Dewey  Mason,  B.A. 
Curator:  Albert  Pitts  Morse, 

lecturer  in  entomology. 
Laboratory  Assistants:  Mary  Lellah  Austin,  B.A. 

Helen   Blanche  Jacobs,  B.A. 
Alice  Rupp,   B.A. 

101.  The  Biology  of  Animals. 

Open  to  freshmen,  sophomores ^  and  juniors.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Hubbard,  Miss  Hayden, 
Miss  Elliott,  Miss  Vose,  Miss  Mason. 

This  course  is  designed  to  furnish  an  introduction  to  the  funda- 
mental principles  of  Zoology.  It  aims  to  furnish  a  clear  conception 
of  what  an  animal  is,  and  to  build  up,  on  a  concrete  basis,  an  under- 
standing of  the  process  of  evolution.  This  is  done  through  a  study 
of  a  number  of  representative  forms, — the  crayfish,  unicellular 
animals,  the  hydra,  and  a  mammal. 

Lectures,  laboratory,  field  work. 

201.  Invertebrate  Zoology. 

Open  to  students  who  have  taken  course  loi  (i  of  igi^2o).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hayden. 

A  study  of  invertebrate  types,  except  the  Arthropoda,  with  ref- 
erence to  their  structure,  life-history,  habits,  and  distribution; 
emphasis  is  given  to  the  general  principles  of  evolution.  Lectures, 
laboratory,  field  and  museum  trips. 

202.  Invertebrate  Zoology. 

Opeji  to  students  who  have  taken  course  201,  or,  by  permission  of  the 
department,  to  students  who  have  completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20). 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Thompson. 


146  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

A  study  of  the  Arthropoda  with  special  reference  to  the  group  of 
insects;  their  structure,  life-history  and  habits.  Attention  will  be 
given  to  insects  of  economic  importance,  such  as  the  silk-worm, 
the  disease  carriers,  household  insects  and  those  injurious  to  vege- 
tables, fruit  and  trees.  Lectures,  laboratory,  field  and  museum 
trips. 

203.  Vertebrate  Zoology. 

Open  to  seniors  without  prerequisites,  and  to  other  students  who  have 
completed  course  loi  (i  of  igig-20) .     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moody. 

Evidences  of  evolution  from  the  study  of  comparative  anatomy 
and  the  development  of  the  vertebrates,  based  upon  a  careful 
dissection  of  dogfish,  necturus,  reptile,  and  cat.  The  aim  through- 
out is  to  trace  the  evolution  of  the  vertebrate  type  with  particular 
reference  to  the  history  of  the  human  body.  Lectures,  laboratory 
and  museum  work. 


204.  Elementary  Physiology.     (Not  given  in  1920-21.) 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  taken  Zoology  loi 
(i  of  igig-20)  and  Chemistry  loi  or  102  (i  or  4  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Boring. 

The  normal  functions  of  mammalian  organisms  are  considered 
with  special  reference  to  the  human  organism.  The  different  systems 
of  the  body  are  studied  as  to  the  microscopic  structure  of  the  organs 
involved,  and  their  functions.  A  brief  survey  of  foods  is  made, 
together  with  a  consideration  of  the  problems  of  nutrition  and 
metabolism.     Lectures,  laboratory  work,  demonstrations. 

SOL  Mammalian  Anatomy  AND  Histology.     (Hygiene  301.) 

Open  to  first-year  students  in  the  Department  of  Hygiene,  also  to 
juniors  and  seniors  who  are  registered  as  five-year  Hygiene  students. 
If  counted  as  part  of  a  major  in  Zoology,  course  301  must  he  pre- 
ceded by  course  loi.    One  and  one-half  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moody. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  on  the  gross  and  microscopic 
anatomy  of  bones  and  muscles;  digestive,  respiratory,  excretory, 
reproductive,  circulatory  and  nervous  systems.  Special  emphasis 
is  given  to  the  study  of  the  human  skeleton  and  muscles. 


1920-21  Zoology  and  Physiology  147 

302.  General  Physiology.     (Hygiene  302.) 

Open  to  first-year  students  in  the  Department  of  Hygiene,  also  to 
juniors  and  seniors  registered  as  five-year  Hygiene  students;  and  to 
juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  203 
(2  of  igi^2o)  and  Chemistry  loi  or  102  (i  or  4  of  igig-20).  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Boring. 

The  course  aims  to  present  the  fundamental  facts  and  theories 
which  underiie  the  normal  functions  of  mammalian  organisms.  It 
includes  a  brief  survey  of  foods,  a  consideration  of  the  problems  of 
nutrition  and  metabolism,  and  a  study  of  the  different  systems  of 
the  body.  The  role  of  physiology  in  the  present  day  investigations 
of  industrial  efficiency  and  fatigue  will  be  pointed  out,  and  the 
problems  and  application  of  modem  research  discussed. 

303.  Histology. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course 
20 J  (2  of  igig-20),  or  201  and  202,  or  204  or  302.  Three  hours  a 
week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Thompson. 

A  study  of  animal  cells,  tissues  and  organs,  with  discussions  of 
related  problems.  Practical  work  in  technique,  or  the  making  of 
microscopic  preparations,  is  required  of  each  student. 

304.  Embryology. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  203,  or  201  and  202,  or 
204  or  302.     Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Thompson. 

A|^general  study  of  the  processes  and  principles  of  animal  develop- 
ment and  the  related  problems.  The  illustrative  material  includes 
some  invertebrates  for  early  stages,  and  for  later  stages  the  chick 
and  the  pig.  Microscopic  preparations  of  a  series  of  stages  of  the 
chick  are  made  by  each  student. 

305.  Theories  and  Problems  of  Zoology. 

Open  with  the  advice  of  the  department  to  students  who  have  completed 
or  are  completing  three  years'  work  in  Zoology.  Three  hours  a  week  for 
the  first  semester. 

Miss  Thompson. 

A  critical  study  of  theories  of  the  origin  of  life,  development, 
evolution  and  heredity. 


148  Courses  of  Instruction  1920-21 

306.  Genetics. 

Open  with  the  advice  of  the  department  to  students  who  have  com- 
pleted or  are  completing  three  years'  work  in  Zoology;  to  five-year 
Hygiene  students  who  are  completing  a  major  in  Zoology.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Boring. 

Problems  in  experimental  evolution,  Mendelian  heredity,  modern 
cytological  questions,  and  eugenics.  Reading  and  discussions  of 
current  journals,  following  out  the  various  lines  of  present  day 
research. 

307.  Undergraduate  Research. 

Open  with  the  advice  of  the  department  to  students  who  have  completed 
a  nine-hour  major  in  Zoology.  One  and  one-half  or  three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Elementary  problems  in  Histology,  Embryology,  Invertebrate  or 
Vertebrate  Zoology.  Independent  work  will  be  required  of  the  stu- 
dent under  the  direction  of  the  instructor  in  the  field  chosen. 


1920-21  Examinations  149 


COLLEGE  EXAMINATIONS 

An  examination  period  occurs  at  the  end  of  each  semester. 
At  these  periods,  and  also  during  the  days  of  the  admission 
examinations  in  September,  examinations  for  the  removal  of 
conditions  and  deficiencies  and  for  advanced  standing  may 
be  taken. 

A  student  who  wishes  to  take  an  examination  upon  a  course  which  is 
not  a  part  of  her  approved  schedule  for  the  year,  must  apply  to  the  Dean 
for  the  requisite  card  of  admission  to  the  examination.  The  last  day  for 
receiving  appHcations  for  such  cards  is  jor  the  September  examinations, 
September  first;  for  the  mid-year  examinations,  January  first;  for  the  June 
examinations,  May  fifteenth. 

N.  B.  Examinations  for  the  removal  of  conditions  and  deficiencies 
excepted,  no  student  can  be  admitted  to  examination  upon  a  course  which 
is  not  a  part  of  her  approved  schedule  for  the  year  without  permission 
both  from  the  Head  of  the  Department  concerned  and  the  Dean  of  the 
College.  No  student,  therefore,  should  enter  upon  preparation  for  such  an 
examination  until  her  plan  has  been  approved  by  both  of  the  above  named 
officers. 

S^^The  College  reserves  the  right  to  require  the  with- 
drawal of  students  whose  scholarship  is  not  satisfactory, 
and  of  those  who  for  any  other  reason  are  regarded  as  not 
in  accord  with  the  ideals  and  standards  which  the  College 
seeks  to  maintain. 

DEGREES 

The  following  degrees  are  conferred  by  the  Trustees  upon 
recommendation  of  the  Academic  Council: — 
Bachelor  of  Arts. 
Master  of  Arts. 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  B.A.  DEGREE 

Every  candidate  for  the  B.A.  degree  must  complete  before 
graduation  the  equivalent  of  fifty-nine  hours.  Since  1896, 
two  grades  in  work  which  reaches  the  passing  mark  have 
been  distinguished:  one  "Passed'^;  the  other,  "Passed  with 
Credit.^'  In  order  to  be  recommended  for  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts  a  student  must  have  ''passed  with  credit" 
in  not  less  than  six  hours  in  the  first  semester  of  the  freshman 


150  Degrees  1920-21 

year  and  in  not  less  than  nine  hours  in  each  succeeding  semester. 
Deficiency  of  such  work  in  any  semester  may  be  made  good  in 
accordance  with  regulations  adopted  by  the  Faculty.  First-year 
French  and  first-year  German  may  not  both  be  counted  among 
the  fifty-nine  hours.  Neither  first-year  French  nor  first-year 
German  may  be  so  counted  if  taken  after  the  sophomore 
year.  Second-year  French,  second-year  German,  first-year 
Itahan  and  first-year  Spanish  may  not  be  counted  among  the 
fifty-nine  hours,  "if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  Of  the  fifty- 
nine  hours  required  for  the  B.A.  degree,  a  certain  number  is 
prescribed,  the  rest  elective. 

I.  Prescribed.  The  following  subjects  are  required  as 
specified: — 

BibHcal  History 4>^  hours 

English  Composition 3  or  ^}i* 

Mathematics 3 

Language  (unless  a  third  language  has  been 

presented  for  admission)     ....  3 
Natural  Science  (if  not  presented  for  admis- 
sion)         3        " 

A  Second  Natural  Science      ....  3 

Philosophy 3        " 

Hygiene ^t 

245^  or  26  hours 

Of  the  required  subjects,  ]Mathematics  must  be  taken  in  the  freshman 
year;  Hygiene  one  and  one-half  hours  in  the  freshman  year,  and  one-half 
hour  in  the  sophomore  year;  BibUcal  History,  three  three-hour  semester 
courses  in  the  sophomore  and  the  junior  years;  EngUsh  Composition  three 
hours  per  week  in  the  freshman  year.*  Of  the  natural  sciences,  one  must 
be  taken  before  the  junior  j^ear;  either  a  language  or  a  science  must  be  taken 
in  the  freshman  year  and  both  if  neither  a  third  language  nor  a  science 
is  offered  for  admission.  Philosophy  should  ordinarily  be  taken  before  the 
senior  year. 

II.  Elective.  All  courses  are  classified  in  Grades  I,  II, 
III;  Grade  I  including  elementary  courses  and  Grade  III 
the  most  advanced  courses.  All  of  the  fifty-nine  hours  not 
indicated  in  the  above  are  elective,  subject  to  the  approval 
of  the  Faculty. 

♦  If  a  student  fails  to  pass  with  credit  in  the  second  semester  of  English  Composition 
1 01,  she  will  be  required  to  take  an  additional  semester  course  in  the  sophomore  year. 

t  One  hour  of  this  requirement  is  met  by  a  one-hour  course  in  Hygiene  in  the  freshman 
year;  the  second  hour  is  met  by  four  periods  in  practical  work,  two  periods  per  week  m  the 
freshman  year  and  two  in  the  sophomore  year. 


1920-21  Degrees  151 

Moreover  every  candidate  for  the  B.A.  degree  must  shov/  before  gradua- 
tion that  she  has  completed  either 

(i)  nine  hours  in  each  of  two  departments, 

or 
(2)  twelve  hours  in  one  department  and  six  hours  in  a  second  de- 
partment. 

Of  the  courses  offered  to  fulfill  this  requirement,  at  least  one  full  course 
of  Grade  III  must  be  taken  in  the  senior  year.  The  nine-hour  group  must 
consist  of  at  least  six  hours  above  Grade  I,  three  hours  of  which  must  be  of 
Grade  III.  The  twelve-hour  group  must  consist  of  at  least  nine  hours 
above  Grade  I,  six  hours  of  which  must  be  of  Grade  III.  The  six-hour  group 
must  include  at  least  three  hours  above  Grade  I. 

These  requirements  are  met  in  the  freshman  year  as  fol- 
lows:— 

Mathematics  loi  with   102  or  103       .       .         3      hours 
English  Composition  loi        ....         3         ** 

Hygiene   120  and  121 i}4    " 

Electives 9        ** 

Total  i6>^  hours 

These  electives  must  be  chosen  in  accordance  with  the  prerequisites  given 

in  the  department  statements  from  the  list  of  courses  named  below,  subject 

to  the  following  restrictions: — 

(i)  One  elective  must  be  a  science  (if  no  science  is  offered  for  admission),  and  the  second 
a  language  (if  only  two  foreign  languages  are  offered  for  admission). 

(2)  One  elective  must  be  chosen  from  courses  in  classics,  history,  or  science. 

(3)  Only  one  of  the  following  subjects  may  be  elected:  Art,  Musical  Theory,  English 
Literature,  Reading  and  Speaking. 

(4)  French  loi  and  German  loi  may  not  both  be  elected. 

Language  Sciences  Other  Subjects 

Greek  loi,  201,  202  Astronomy  loi  Art  loi,  102 

Latin  1 01,  102  Botany  1 01  English  Literature  1 01, 102  and  103 
German  loi,  102,  103  and  104  Chemistry  loi,  102  and  201  History  loi  and  102,  103,  104 

French  loi,  102,  103  Geology  loi  Musical  Theory  loi 

Italian  loi  Physics  loi,  102  Reading  and  Speaking  loi,  102 

Spanish  loi,  102  Zoology  loi 

If  16^  hours  are  satisfactorily  completed  in  the  freshman  year,  the  normal 
program  for  the  remaining  years  would  be  as  follows: — 

Sophomore  year 15/^  hours 

Junior  year 15        " 

Senior  year 12        " 

If  163^  hours  are  not  completed  in  the  freshman  year,  a  student  may  by 
special  permission  carry  extra  hours  in  the  remaining  years. 

Elective  courses  must  be  choseti  idth  great  care  so  that  changes  will  not  be 
necessary.  Students  are  held  responsible  for  observing  the  requirements  for  the 
degree  and  the  proper  sequence  of  courses. 

All  requests  for  changes  of  elective  courses  should  be  sent  to  the  Dean  of 
the  College  before  September  15th.  In  general,  no  changes  may  be  made 
after  the  beginning  of  the  year. 


152  Expenses  1920-21 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  M.A.   DEGREE 

The  work  required  of  a  candidate  for  the  M.A.  degree  is 
expected  to  occupy  her  entire  time  for  a  college  year  and  is  the 
equivalent  of  fifteen  hours  of  college  work.  It  includes,  in  gen- 
eral, no  fewer  than  two  full  courses  of  Grade  III  or  their  equiva- 
lents, in  addition  to  a  thesis  or  a  report  or  reports  based  on  some 
piece  or  pieces  of  independent  work.  The  student  should  choose 
one  major  subject  and  not  more  than  one  minor  subject,  which 
should  be  related  to  the  major;  or  she  may,  if  she  prefers,  do  all 
her  work  in  one  subject.  A  candidate  for  the  M.A.  degree 
is  ordinarily  required  to  have  a  reading  knowledge  of  French 
and  of  German,  although  another  language  may  sometimes  be 
substituted  for  one  of  these  languages. 

One  year  of  graduate  work  is  required  of  all  candidates  for 
the  M.A.  degree,  but  more  time  may  be  needed  for  the  comple- 
tion of  the  work. 

Graduates  of  Wellesley  College  may  do  all  the  work  in 
non-residence,  under  conditions  defined  in  the  Graduate 
Circular. 

One  year  in  residence  is  required  of  all  other  candidates  for 
the  degree. 

Information  regarding  thesis,  final  examinations,  etc.,  will 
be  found  in  the  Graduate  Circular  which  will  be  sent  on  ap- 
plication to  the  College  Recorder. 

EXPENSES 
TUITION 

The  charge  for  tuition  to  all  students,  whether  living  in 
college  buildings  or  not,  is  $300  a  year.  Tuition  is  payable 
in  advance  and  is  not  subject  to  return  or  deduction. 

Students  who  are  permitted  to  take  seven  hours  or  less  of 
class-room  work  a  week,  and  wlw  do  not  live  in  college  buildings^ 
pay  tuition  by  the  course  as  follows:  for  a  one-hour  course, 
$35;  a  two-hour  course,  $70;  a  three-hour  course,  $100.  Pay- 
ment is  due  at  the  beginning  of  the  year.  No  charge  is  made 
for  tuition  in  Biblical  History. 

TUITION  AND  OTHER   CHARGES  IN  DEPARTMENT 
OF  MUSIC 

For  instruction  for  the  college  year  in  Pianoforte,  Organ, 

Violin,  or  Vocal  Music,  two  lessons  a  week    .       .       .         $120 

One  lesson  a  week 60 

(Lessons  thirty  minutes  in  length.) 


1920-21  Expenses  153 

For  use  of  the  Pianoforte,  one  period  daily  for  the  college  year  .  $15 

For  two  and  three  periods  daily,  in  proportion. 

For  use  of  the  Pipe  Organ  in  Music  Hall,  one  period  daily,  for 

the  college  year 20 

For  two  or  three  periods  daily,  in  proportion. 

Special  arrangements  may  be  made  for  lessons  on  instruments  not  men- 
tioned above. 

Tuition  in  music  must  always  be  paid  in  advance  and  is  not  subject  to 
return  or  deduction. 

FIXED  TIMES  AND  AMOUNTS  OF  PAYMENTS 

7.  For  students  who  room  in  college  buildings. 

Application  fee  payable  in  advance S  lo 

September  (at  the  opening  of  college) 

On  account  of  tuition $190 

On  account  of  board  and  room 250      440 

February  (before  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester) 

Balance  on  tuition $100 

Balance  on  board  and  room 250      350 

Total  for  the  year $800 

The  regular  charge  for  board  begins  at  the  opening  of  dormitories. 

//.  For  students  who  do  not  room  in  college  buildings. 

a.  Students  who  take  their  meals  in  college  buildings,  but 
room  in  private  houses. 

Application  fee  payable  in  advance S  10 

September  (at  the  opening  of  college) 

On  account  of  tuition S190 

On  account  of  board 165       355 

February  (before  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester) 

Balance  on  tuition $100 

Balance  on  board 160      260 

Total  for  the  year S625 

Such  students  make  payments  for  rooms  directly  to  the  householder 
at  such  rates  and  times  as  the  parties  to  the  arrangement  may  agree  upon. 
Information  regarding  boarding  places  may  be  obtained  by  addressing  the 
Dean  of  Residence. 

b.  Students  who  neither  board  nor  room  in  college  buildings 
pay  tuition  as  follows: — 

Application  fee  payable  in  advance $  10 

September  (at  the  opening  of  college) 190 

February  (before  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester)    .       .  100 

Total  for  the  year $300 


154  Fees  1920-21 

Such  students  make  payment  for  room  and  board  directly  to  the  man- 
agement of  the  private  houses  in  which  they  have  secured  lodging  and 
meals,  at  such  rates  and  times  as  the  parties  to  the  arrangement  may 
agree  upon.  Information  regarding  boarding  places  may  be  obtained 
by  addressing  the  Dean  of  Residence. 


Payments  must  he  mode  before  the  student  can  take  her 
place  in  the  class  room.  No  exception  will  he  made  to  this  rule 
without  a  written  permission  from  the  Treasurer, 

W^Checks  or  money  orders  should  he  made  payahle  to  Welles- 
ley  College, 

FEES 

/.     Undergraduate. 

An  application  fee  of  $io  is  required  from  all  candidates 
for  admission,  and  no  application  is  recorded  until  the  fee  is 
received.  The  same  fee  is  required  from  all  students  in 
college  who  are  intending  to  return  for  the  following  year, 
and  from  all  former  students  who  apply  for  readmission.  If 
the  student  enters  college,  the  amount  of  the  application  fee 
is  deducted  from  the  first  tuition  bill  after  entrance.  If 
formal  notice  of  withdrawal  is  received  at  the  College  before 
August  15th  of  the  year  for  which  the  application  is  made, 
the  fee  will  be  refunded.  In  all  other  cases  it  is  forfeited 
to  the  College.  A  student  who  postpones  entrance  until  the 
year  following  the  one  for  which  she  first  appHed  may 
transfer  her  application  fee.  But  a  fee  so  transferred  will  not 
be  refunded  if  the  student  later  decides  to  withdraw,  unless 
the  request  for  the  transfer  was  received  within  the  specified 
time.  Requests  for  second  transfers  are  sometimes  granted, 
but  a  fee  transferred  a  second  time  will  not  be  refunded  under 
any  circumstances. 

An  additional  charge  is  made  for  materials  and  the  use  of 
apparatus  in  the  following  laboratory  courses:  $5  for  each 
laboratory  course  in  Astronomy,  Botany,  Chemistry,  Geol- 
ogy, Physics,  Zoology;  $5  each  for  course  321  in  Hygiene  and 
for  courses  202  and  205  in  Musical  Theory;  $2.50  each  for  the 
half  courses  303  and  304  in  Musical  Theory,  and  for  course 
210  in  Hygiene;  $2  each  for  the  studio  courses  in  Art,  and 
$1  each  for  other  Art  courses,  $2  being  the  maximum  charge 
for  Art  fees  to  any  student.  These  fees  are  not  subject  to 
refund.     Every  student  should  also  reckon  on  the  expenditure 


1920-21  Residence  155 

of  $15  to  $30  annually  for  the  purchase  of  books.  At  the  tune 
of  taking  the  B.A.  degree  or  the  certificate  in  Hygiene  a  diploma 
fee  of  $10  is  charged. 

//.     Graduate. 

A  matriculation  fee  of  $5  is  payable  when  a  student  is  ac- 
cepted as  a  candidate  for  the  Master's  degree.  The  amount 
of  this  fee  will  be  deducted  from  the  diploma  fee  of  $25  pay- 
able when  the  degree  is  received. 

RESIDENCE 

The  residence  halls  belonging  to  the  College  and  situated 
within  the  hmits  of  the  campus  are  Stone,  Norumbega, 
Freeman,  Wood,  Fiske,  Wilder,  Pomeroy,  Cazenove,  Beebe, 
Shafer,  Tower  Court,  Claflin,  and  The  Homestead.  Eliot, 
Washington,  Noanett,  Crofton  and  Little  Houses,  also  the 
property  of  the  College,  and  eight  houses  leased  to  the  College 
for  dormitory  purposes  in  order  to  meet  temporary  needs,  are 
situated  outside  and  immediately  adjoining  the  college  grounds. 
All  these  houses  are  under  the  direction  of  officers  appointed 
by  the  College.  All  the  rooms  are  furnished,  and  supphed  with 
electric  lights. 

^I^^  A  student  vacating  a  room  before  the  dose  of  the  year, 
or  relinquishing  a  room  reserved  for  her  at  the  beginning  of 
the  year,  will  be  charged  for  board  until  the  vacancy  has  been 
filled  by  an  incoming  student.  Therefore,  notice  of  inten- 
tion to  withdraw  should  be  given  at  the  earhest  possible  mo- 
ment.    No  deduction  is  made  for  absences  during  the  year. 

Apphcations  for  rooms  in  college  buildings  take  the  date  at 
which  the  application  fee  is  received.     (See  pages  24  and  1 54.) 

Until  May  first,  but  not  after  that  date,  applications  from 
former  students  will  take  precedence  of  those  of  new  students 
in  the  matter  of  rooms. 

^^^^  No  student  can  receive  a  diploma  until  a  satisfactory 
settlement  of  all  her  college  dues  has  been  made. 

HEALTH 

The  resident  physician,  Katharine  P.  Raymond,  B.S., 
M.D.,  together  with  the  Director  of  the  Department  of  Hygiene, 
the  Dean  of  Residence,  and  the  President  and  the  Dean  of  the 


156  Fellowships  and  Scholarshlps  1920-21 

College,  ex  officio^  constitute  a  board  of  health  to  which  all 
matters  affecting  the  health  of  students  are  referred.  Simp- 
son Cottage  is  maintained  as  an  infirmary  under  the  charge 
of  Dr.  Raymond.  A  neighboring  cottage  has  recently  been 
fitted  up  as  an  annex.  Two  trained  nurses  are  in  constant 
attendance.  The  services  of  the  Resident  Physician  for  con- 
sultation and  treatment  are  free  to  all  students. 

FELLOWSHIPS  AND  SCHOLARSHIPS 

A.    FOR  GRADUATES 

The  Alice  Freeman  Palmer  Fellowship,  yielding  an 
income  of  about  $i,ooo,  was  founded  in  1903,  by  Mrs.  David 
P.  Kimball. 

The  holder  of  this  Fellowship  must  be  a  graduate  of  Wellesley  College  or 
some  other  American  College  of  approved  standing,  a  young  woman  of  good 
health,  not  more  than  twenty-six  years  of  age  at  the  time  of  her  appoint- 
ment, unmarried  throughout  the  whole  of  her  tenure,  and  as  free  as  possible 
from  other  responsibilides.  The  same  person  will  not  be  eligible  to  the 
Fellowship  for  more  than  two  years. 

The  Fellowship  may  be  used  for  study  abroad,  for  study  at  any  American 
college  or  university,  or  privately  for  independent  research.  Several  times 
during  the  period  of  tenure  the  holder  of  the  Fellowship  must  furnish  evi- 
dence that  it  is  used  for  purposes  of  serious  study  and  not  for  general  cul- 
ture; and  within  three  years  from  entrance  on  the  Fellowship  she  must  pre- 
sent to  the  faculty  a  thesis  embodying  the  results  of  the  research  carried  on 
during  the  period  of  tenure. 

Applications  for  this  Fellowship  should  be  received  by  the  President  of 
Wellesley  College  not  later  than  February  first  of  the  academic  year  pre- 
ceding that  for  which  the  Fellowship  is  asked. 

Holders  of  this  Fellowship 

1904-190S — Lehmann,  Harriet  (I>lrs.  Kitchin),  ^       ^  Biology. 

B.A.  Ripoa  College,  1902;  M.A.  Northwestern  University,  1903;  Graduate 
Student  Radcliffe  College,  1904-1905. 

1905-1906 — Andrus,  Grace  Mead  (Mrs.  de  Laguna),  Philosophy. 

B.A.  Cornell  University,  1903;  Graduate  Student  Cornell  University,  1903-1905. 
Declined  the  Fellowship,  which  was  awarded  to 

Gardiner,  Elizabeth  Manning  (Mrs.  Whitmore),  Art. 

B.A.  Radcliffe  College,  1901;  M.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  Student  American 
School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Rome,  1905-1907;  American  School  of  Classical 
Studies  in  Athens,  1907-1908;  Instructor  in  Art,  Wellesley  College,  1908-1910; 
Assistant  to  Director,  Worcester  Art  Museum,  1909-1913. 

1906-1907 — Johnson,  Anna  (Mrs.  Pell),  Mathematics. 

B.A.  University  of  South  Dakota,  1903;  M.S.  University  of  Iowa,  1904;  M.A. 
Radchffe  College,  1905;  Graduate  Student  Radcliffe  College,  1905-1906;  Student 
University  of  Gottingen,  1906-1907,  1908;  Instructor  in  Mathematics,  University 
of  South  Dakota,  1907;  Ph.D.  University  of  Chicago,  1910;  Instructor  in  Mathe- 
matics, 1911-1914,  and  Associate  Professor,  1914-1918,  Mt.  Holyoke  College; 
Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics,  Bryn  Mawr   College,    1918 . 


1920-21  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  157 

1907-1908 — Cook,  Helen  Dodd  (Mrs.  Vincent),  Philosophy. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  M.A.  1907;  Fellow  in  Philosophy  and  Psychology, 
Wellesley  College,  1906-1907;  Student  at  University  of  Wurzburg,  IQ07-1909; 
Ph.D.  University  of  WUrzburg,  1909;  Instructor  in  Psychology,  Wellesley  College, 
1909-1913;  Instructor  in  Psychology,  Montclair  Normal  School,  1913-1916. 

1908-1909 — Stone,  Isabelle.  Greek. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  Graduate  Student  Cornell  University,  1905-1908; 
Ph.D.  Cornell  University,  1908;  Student  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in 
Athens,  1908-1909;  Reader  in  Greek,  Bryn  Mawr  College,  second  semester,  190^ 
1910;  Head  of  Greek  and  Latin  Departments,  Woman's  College  of  Alabama,  first 
semester,  1910-1911. 

1909-1910 — Shepperxe,  Gertrude  (Mrs.  Loomis),  Comparative  Literature. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1903;  M.A,  1905;  Graduate  Student  Radciiffe  Colloge, 
1905-1907;  Student  Lfniversity  of  Munich,  1907-1908;  University  of  Paris,  1908- 
1911;  Ph.D.  Radciiffe  College,  1909;  Instructor  in  English,  University  of  Illinois, 
1911-1912;  Instructor  in  German,  New  York  University,  1912-1913;  Instructor 
in  English,  1913-1914,  and  Associate  in  English,  1914-1919,  University  of  Illinois; 
Assistant  Professor  of  French,  Vassal  College,  1919 . 

1910-1911 — HiBBARD,  Laura  Alandis,  English  Literature. 

B.A.  Wellesley  College,  1905;  M.A.  1908;  Graduate  Student  University  of  Chi- 
cago, 1909-1911;  Ph.D.  University  of  Chicago,  1916;  Instructor  in  English  Liter- 
ature, Mt.  Holyoke  College,  i9o8-i9i6;Instructor  in  English  Literature,  1916-1917, 
and  Associate  Professor,  1917 ,  Wellesley  College. 

1911-1912 — Barbour,  Violet,  History. 

B.A.  Cornell  University,  1906;  M.A.  1909;  Graduate  Scholar  in  History,  Cornell 
University,  1908-1909;  carrying  on  historical  research  in  England,  France,  and  Hol- 
land, 1911-1913;  Ph.D.  Cornell  University,  1914;  Instructor  in  History,  1914- 
1919  and  Assistant  Professor  1919 ,  Vassar  College. 

1912-1913 — Coats,  Bessie  Marion,  Philosophy. 

B.A.  Vassar  College,  1907;  Mary  E.  Ives  Fellow,  Yale  University,  1910-1911; 
Graduate  Student  Radciiffe  College,  1911-1915;  M.A.  Radciiffe  College,  19x2; 
Principal  of  Ferry  Hall,  Lake  Forest,  111.,  1915-1918;  Principal  of  Bradford 
Academy,  Bradford,  Mass.,  1918 . 

19 13-19 14— Stocking,  Ruth,  Zoology. 
B.A.  Goucher  College,  1910;  Graduate  Student  Goucher  College  and  Johns  Hop- 
kins University,  1910-1911;  Graduate  Student  Bryn  Mawr  College,  1911-1912; 
University  Fellow  in  Zoology,  Johns  Hopkins  University,  1912-1913;  Johns  Hopkins 
University,  1913-1914;  Ph.D.  Johns  Hopkins  Univer»ity,  1915;  Professor  of  Biology, 
Agnes  Scott  College,  1915-1916;  Professor  of  Biology,  Wells  College,  1916 . 

19 14-19 IS — H olden,  Ruth,  Botany. 

B.A.  Radciiffe  College,  1911;  M.A.  Radciiffe  College,  1912;  Graduate  Student 
Radciiffe  College,  191 2-1913;  Student  in  Botany  School,  Cambridge  University, 
England,  1913.    Died  April  23,  1917. 

1915-1916 — Hazlett,  Olive  Cuo,  Mathematics. 

i  B.A.  Radciiffe  College,  1912;  M.S.  University  of  Chicago,  1913;  Graduate  Student 
and  Fellow,  University  of  Chicago,  1912-1015;  Holder  of  Fellowship  of  the  Boston 
Branch  of  the  Association  of  Collegiate  Alumnae,  1914-1915;  Ph.D.  University  of 
Chicago,  1915;  Student  at  Radciiffe  College,  1915-1916;  Associate  in  Mathematics, 
Bryn  Mawr  College,  1916-1918;  Instructor  in  Mathematics,  Mt.  Holyoke  College 
1918 , 

1916-1917— Hazlett,  Olive  Clio,  Mathematics. 

Declined  the  Fellowship,  which  was  awarded  to 

Dunn,  Grace  Adelaide,  .  Botany. 

Ph.B.  Hamline  University,  1909;  M.A.  Johns  Hopkins  University,  1914;  Ph.D. 
Johns  Hopkins  University,  igiS- 

1917-1918—HEMPL,  Hilda  (Mrs.  Heller),  Bacteriology. 

B.A.  Leland  Stanford,  Jr.,  University,  1914;  M.S.  University  of  Michigan,  1915. 
Holder  of  the  Scandinavian-American  Fellowship,  1915-1916;  Holder  of  the  Eu- 
ropean Fellowship  of  the  Association  of  Collegiate  Alumnae,  1916-1917.  Student 
at  University  of  California,  1917-1918. 

1918-1919— Cohen,  Teresa,  Mathematics. 

B.A.  Goucher  College,  1912;  M.A.  Johns  Hopkins  University,  1915;  Ph.D.  Johns 
Hopkins  University,  1918. 


158  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  1920-21 

1919-1920 — Allard,  Beatrice  (Mrs.  Brooks),                                _  Semitic  Literature. 

B.A.  Mt.  Holyoke  College.  1915;  Scholar  in  Semitic  Lantcuages,  Bryn  Mawr 
College,  1915-1916;  Fellow,  Brj^n  Mawr  College,  1916-1918;  Holder  of  the  Mary 
E.  Woolley  Fellowship  of  Mt.  Holyoke  College,  Brya  Mawr  College,  1918-1919. 
Instructor  in  Biblical  History,  Wellesley  College,  1920 . 

1920-1921 — Whitaker,  Edith  Susan,  Botany. 

BA.  Radcliffe  College,  1916;  MA.  Radcliffe  College,  1917;  Graduate  Student  at 
Radcliffe  College,  1917-1918. 

Eighteen  Graduate  Scholarships  to  the  value  of  $300 
A  YEAR,  the  equivalent  of  one  year's  tuition,  have  been  estab- 
lished for  the  benefit  of  approved  candidates  for  the  M.A. 
degree  in  residence  at  Wellesley.  Apphcations  for  these 
scholarships  should  be  addressed  to  the  College  Recorder, 
Wellesley  College,  Wellesley,  Mass. 

Scholarships  in  Schools  of  Classical  Study. — Student- 
ships in  the  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Athens, 
and  the  American  Academy  in  Rome,  are  open  to  graduates 
and  graduate  students  of  Wellesley  College  who  have  done 
sufl5cient  work  in  the  classics  to  meet  the  admission  require- 
ments. The  object  of  these  schools  is  to  afford  opportunity 
for  the  study  of  classical  literature,  art,  and  antiquities,  to 
aid  in  original  research  in  these  subjects,  and  to  conduct  the 
exploration  and  excavation  of  classical  sites. 

The  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Athens. — The  school  year 
extends  from  October  first  to  June  first.  The  regulations  for  admission  are 
as  follows:  "Bachelors  of  Arts  of  co-operating  colleges,  and  all  Bachelors 
of  Arts  who  have  studied  at  one  of  these  colleges  as  candidates  for  a  higher 
degree,  shall  be  admitted  to  membership  in  the  School  on  presenting  to  the 
Committee  a  certificate  from  the  classical  department  of  the  college  at  which 
they  have  last  studied,  stating  that  they  are  competent  to  pursue  an  inde- 
pendent course  of  study  at  Athens  under  the  advice  of  the  Director.  Mem- 
bers of  the  school  are  subject  to  no  charge  for  tuition,"  *  Further  informa- 
tion can  be  had  by  appHcation  to  Professor  Walton,  who  represents 
Wellesley  College  upon  the  Managing  Committee  of  the  School. 

The  American  Academy  in  Rome,  School  of  Classical  Studies. — The  Amer- 
ican School  of  Classical  Studies  is  now  one  of  the  consolidated  schools  of 
the  American  Academy  in  Rome.  The  school  year  extends  from  the  fif- 
teenth of  October  to  the  fifteenth  of  June.  It  is  hoped  that  a  summer  ses- 
sion also  for  teachers  of  the  classics  may  be  arranged.  For  information  in 
regard  to  the  work  of  the  School  and  the  requirements  for  admission,  applica- 
tion may  be  made  to  Professor  Hawes. 

Scholarships  in  the  Marine  Biological  Laboratory 
at  Wood's  HoLEf. — Wellesley   College  offers  annually  two 

*  A  few  Fellowships  are  awarded  on  competitive  examination. 

t  On  the  approval  of  the  Department,  the  scholarship  in  Botany  may  be  assigned,  under 
special  conditions,  for  study  in  other  summer  laboratories. 


1920-21  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  159 

scholarships  for  study  at  this  laboratory.  The  laboratory 
is  open  to  investigators  for  the  whole  year.  During  the  sum- 
mer three  courses  in  Zoology  and  two  in  Botany  are  offered 
to  those  needing  instruction.  AppHcants  desiring  to  take 
any  of  these  courses  must  have  completed  a  college  course 
in  the  subject  in  which  they  wish  to  work. 

Students  in  either  Botany  or  Zoology  who  desire  to  undertake  original 
work  will  receive  suitable  direction.  In  addition  to  these  opportunities 
there  are  courses  of  lectures  on  special  topics  and  on  subjects  of  general 
biological  interest.  AppUcations  for  appointment  should  state  the  char- 
acter of  the  work  to  be  done, — i.e.^  whether  botanical  or  zoological,  whether 
general  work,  investigation  under  direction,  or  independent  investigation, — 
and  should  be  forwarded  to  Professor  Hubbard  or  Professor  Ferguson  in 
time  to  reach  Wellesley  College  before  April  first. 

The  Ruth  Ingersoll  Goldmark  Memorial  Fund  was  es- 
tabhshed  by  Mr.  C.  J.  Goldmark  in  191 7,  at  present  affording 
an  income  of  $250,  to  be  appHed  to  the  aid  of  deserving  stu- 
dents doing  graduate  work  at  Wellesley  College  or  elsewhere  in 
EngHsh  Literature  or  EngHsh  Composition  or  in  the  Classics, 
Enghsh  Literature  being  given  the  preference. 

The  Loretto  Fish  Carney  Memorial  Fund,  founded  in 
1920  by  the  alumnae  and  staff  of  the  Boston  Normal  School  of 
Gymnastics  and  the  Department  of  Hygiene  of  Wellesley 
College,  the  income  to  be  awarded  to  a  senior  in  the  department 
at  the  discretion  of  the  teaching  staff  of  the  department  and 
the  President  of  the  College.     (Accumulating.) 

B.    FOR  UNDERGRADUATES 

The  income  of  these  scholarships  is  applied  to  the  aid  of  meritorious  under- 
graduate students  whose  personal  means  are  insufficient  for  their  main- 
tenance in  college. 

The  Wood  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 
1878  by  CaroHne  A.  Wood,  in  memory  of  her  husband. 

The  Grover  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1878  by 
WilHam  O.  Grover. 

The  Weston  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1878  by 
David  M.  Weston. 

The  Northfield  Seminary  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded 
in  1878. 

The  Pauline  A.  Durant  Scholarship  of  $7,315,  founded  in 
1880  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Henry  F.  Durant,  and  raised  to  its 
present  amount  by  bequest  of  Mrs.  Durant  in  1919. 


160  Scholarships  1920-21 

The  Sweatman  Scholarship  of   $5,000,  founded  in  1880  by 

V.  Clement  Sweatman. 
The  Walter  Baker  Memorial  Scholarship,   founded  in 

1880    by  Eleanor  J.  W.  Baker;   raised  to  $7,000  by  will 

of  Mrs.  Baker  in  1892. 

The  Annie  M.  Wood  Scholarship,  founded  in  1880  by 
Frank  Wood,  who  maintained  it  by  annual  payments; 
capitalized  at  $10,000  in  19 15  by  bequest  of  Mr.  Wood. 

Two  Frost  Scholarships,  founded  in  1880  by  Rufus  S. 
Frost,  as  follows: — 

One  of  $1,000,  the  income  to  be  given  annually  to  some 
member  of  the  graduating  class  designated  by  the 
Faculty. 

One  of  $5,000,  the  income  to  be  devoted  annually  to  the 
aid  of  students. 

The  Union  Church  Scholarship,  founded  in  1880  by  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  A.  W.  Stetson. 

The  Florence  N.  Brown  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000, 
founded  in  1880  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Samuel  N.  Brown,  Jr. 

The  Augustus  R.  Clark  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000, 
founded  in  1880  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  A.  N.  Clark. 

Four  Harriet  Fowle  Smith  Scholarships,  founded  in  1881 
by  Henry  Fowle  Durant,  in  memory  of  his  mother. 

The  Durant  Memorla.l  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 
1883  by  the  oflScers  and  students  of  Wellesley  College, 
in  honor  of  Henry  F.  Durant,  the  income  to  be  appropri- 
ated annually  to  some  student  selected  by  the  Faculty. 

The  Jane  Topliff  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded 
in  1883  by  Mrs.  William  S.  Houghton,  in  memory  of 
her  mother. 

The  Income  of  a  Fund  of  $25,000,  known  as  the  Stone  Edu- 
cational (Scholarship)  Fund,  founded  in  1884  by  Valeria 
G.  Stone. 

The  Jeannie  L.  White  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 
1886  by  herself. 

The  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Solomon  F.  Smith  Memorial  Scholar- 
ship of  $200  annually,  founded  in  1888  by  George  Smith, 
for  the  tuition  of  students  from  the  town  of  Wellesley. 


1920-21  Scholarships  161 

The  Margaret  McClung  Cowan  Fund  of  $i,ooo,  founded 
in  1888  by  Rev.  and  Mrs.  P.  D.  Cowan,  in  memory  of 
their  daughter. 

The  Emmelar  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1889  by 
the  class  of  1891,  the  income  to  be  appropriated  annu- 
ally to  some  student  selected  by  the  Faculty. 

The  Sarah  J.  Houghton  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded 
in  1889  by  William   S.  Houghton,  in  memory  of  his  wife. 

The  Edith  Baker  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $7,000,  founded 
by  bequest  of  Eleanor  J.  W.  Baker  in  1892, 

The  Joseph  N.  Fiske  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $8,000, 
founded  in  1892  by  Mrs.  J.  N.  Fiske. 

The  Abbie  A.  Coburn  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $2,000, 
founded  in  1892. 

The  Eliza  C.  jE\\rETT  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded  in 
1894;  the  income  to  be  appropriated  to  the  daughter  of 
a  clergyman,  or  of  a  home  or  foreign  missionary,  selected 
by  the  Faculty  of  the  College. 

The  Ada  L.  Howard  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded  in 
1895. 

The  Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship,  founded  in  1896  by 
Helen  Miller  Gould  (Shepard),  in  memory  of  her  mother; 
raised  to  $10,000  by  the  donor  in  1901. 

The  Goodwin  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1897  by 
Hannah  B.  Goodwin. 

The  Hyde  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in  i8q8  by  Sarah 
B.  Hyde. 

The  Bill  Scholarship  of  $7,000,  founded  in  1898  by  Charles 
Bill. 

The  Holbrook  Scholarship  of  $3,000,  founded  in  1898  by 

Sarah  J.  Holbrook. 
The  (second)  Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship,  founded  in 

1899  by  Helen  Miller  Gould  (Shepard);  raised  to  $10,000 

by  the  donor  in  1901. 
The  Mary  Elizabeth  Gere  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded 

in  1899  by  Mary  EHzabeth  Gere. 
The  Ann  Morton  Towle   Memorial  Scholarship  Fund 

of    $5,000,    estabhshed   in    1901   by   bequest   of   George 

Francis  Towle. 


162  Scholarships  1920-21 

The  Dana  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1901  through 
the  gift  of  Charles  B.  Dana. 

The  (third)  Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship  of  $10,000, 
founded  in  1901  by  Helen  Miller  Gould  (Shepard). 

The  George  William  Towle  Memorial  Scholarship 
Fund  of  $6,750,  founded  in  1901  by  bequest  of  George 
Francis  Towle, 

The  Anna  Palen  Scholarship  of  $10,000,  founded  in  1902. 

The  Rollins  Scholarship  of  $8,000,  founded  in  1903  by 
Augusta  and  Hannah  H.  Rollins,  in  memory  of  their 
parents. 

The  Class  of  1889  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000,  founded 
in  1904  by  the  class,  in  memory  of  classmates  who  have 
died. 

The  Elizabeth  S.  Fiske  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 
1904  by  bequest  of  Miss  Fiske. 

The  Mae  McElwain  Rice  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000, 
founded  in  1905  by  the  class  of  1902. 

The  Sanborn  Alumnae  Scholarship,  founded  in  1905  by 
Helen  J.  Sanborn  of  the  class  of  1884  for  the  benefit  of 
daughters  of  alumnse:  capitalized  at  $10,000  in  1919  by 
bequest  of  Miss  Sanborn. 

The  Julia  Ball  Thayer  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded 
in  1907  by  bequest  of  Mrs.  Julia  Beatrice  Ball  Thayer 
of  Keene,  N.H. 

The  Adams  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in  1907  by  be- 
quest of  Adoniram  J.  Adams  of  Boston. 

The  McDonald-Ellis  Fund  of  $500,  estabHshed  in  1908 
by  former  students  of  the  McDonald-Ellis  School  of 
Washington,  D.C.,  in  memory  of  the  late  principals  of 
the  school. 

The  Ransom  Scholarship  of  $1,000,  founded  in  1908  by 
bequest  of  Catherine  Ayer  Ransom. 

The  Emily  P.  Hidden  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in 
1909  by  bequest  of  Mary  E.  Hidden. 

The  Ethel  Howland  Folger  Williams  Memorial  Fund, 
established  in  191 1  from  the  estate  of  the  late  Ethel  How- 
land  Folger  Williams  of  the  class  of  1905,  the  income 
to  be  given  to  a  sophomore  at  the  end  of  the  first  semester 
at  the  discretion  of  the  head  of  the  German  department. 


1920-21  SCHOL.A.RSHIPS  163 

The  Sophie  Jewtett  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $i,ooo, 
founded  in  191 1  by  Elsa  D.  James. 

The  Mildred  Keim  Fund  of  $10,000,  founded  in  191 2  by 
Newton  and  Frances  S.  Keim,  in  memory  of  their  daugh- 
ter, Mildred  Keim. 

The  Connecticut  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1912 
by  the  will  of  Louise  Frisbie. 

The  Anna  S.  New^lan  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000, 
estabhshed  in  1913  through  the  gift  of  former  students. 

The  Mary  G.  Hillman  Mathematical  (Prize)  Scholarship 
of  Si,ooo,  established  in  1913  by  Elizabeth  A.  Hillman,  in 
memory  of  her  sister. 

The  Class  or  1893  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  es- 
tablished by  the  class  in  19 13. 

The  M.  Elizabeth  Gray  Scholarship  of  $10,000,  estab- 
lished in  1914  by  bequest  of  William  J,  Gray. 

The  Cora  Stickney  Harper  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  estab- 
lished in  191 5  by  bequest  of  Mrs.  Cora  Stickney  Harper. 

The  Oliver  N.,  Mary  C,  and  Mary  Shannon  Scholarship 
Fund  of  $15,000,  estabhshed  in  1916  by  bequest  of  Mary 
Shannon,  as  a  permanent  fund  for  free  scholarships. 

The  Dr.  Alma  Emerson  Beale  Scholarship  Fund  of  $3,000, 
founded  in  191 7  by  bequest  of  Dr.  Alma  E.  Beale  of  the 
class  of  1891;  the  income  to  be  appHed  annually  to  a 
student  of  the  College  who  intends  to  become  either  a 
foreign  or  a  home  missionary,  or,  second,  to  a  student 
of  the  College  who  is  the  daughter  of  a  clergyman. 

The  Stimson  Mathematical  Scholarship  of  $100  annually, 
founded  in  191 9  by  Candace  C.  Stimson  in  memory  of 
her  father,  Dr.  Lewis  A.  Stimson. 

The  Marie  Louise  Tuck  Scholarship  Fund  of  $9,500,  founded 
in  1 91 9  by  bequest  of  AHce  C.  Tuck. 

The  Class  oe  1884  Memorial  Scholarship,  founded  by  the 
Class  in  191 9  (accumulating). 

The  Charles  B.  Botseord  Scholarship  Fund  of  $5,000, 
founded  in  1920  by  bequest  of  Lucy  A.  Botsford. 

The  Katharine  Knapp  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 
1920  by  bequest  of  Miss  Knapp. 

These  scholarships  are  in  general  not  competitive.     They  are 
awarded  in  recognition  of  genuine  pecuniary  need  and  of  satis- 


164  Scholarships  1920-21 

factory  character,  college  citizenship,  health,  and  intellectual 
and  practical  ability  as  tested  by  a  year  or  more  of  life  and  study 
at  Wellesley.  The  foundations  are  of  varying  amounts,  and 
the  income  is  apportioned  according  to  need  and  merit  as  justly 
as  possible.  No  scholarship  yields  the  full  amount  required 
for  both  tuition  and  residence  on  the  ordinary  plan. 

Students  who  are  looking  forward  to  a  course  at  Wellesley 
but  are  anxious  about  ways  and  means  are  advised  to  secure 
money  from  friends,  or  from  persons  of  means  apart  from  the 
College,  for  maintenance  during  the  first  year  or  two.  Although 
there  is  no  provision  for  scholarship  aid  during  the  freshman 
year,  any  school  principal  or  teacher  having  in  view  a  candidate, 
thoroughly  prepared  for  the  College  and  desirable  in  every 
respect,  yet  unable  to  enter  on  account  of  lack  of  means  after 
every  effort  to  secure  funds  has  been  made,  is  advised  to  let 
the  case  be  known  to  the  Administration  of  the  College,  since  it 
is  often  possible  to  make  some  suggestion  which  proves  to  be  of 
advantage. 

A  co-operative  house  is  open  to  self-helping  students  but  is 
not  of  sufficient  capacity  to  provide  for  freshman  applicants  as 
well.  A  system  of  student  waitresses  is  also  in  operation,  and 
freshmen  can  often  avail  themselves  of  the  opportunity  of  self- 
help  thus  afforded.  A  descriptive  circular  will  be  mailed  on 
application. 

The  Christian  Association  of  the  College  is  actively  engaged 
in  bringing  students  into  connection  with  work  to  be  done  for 
compensation  within  the  College  and  in  the  neighborhood,  but 
such  employment,  since  it  makes  a  distinct  draft  upon  strength 
and  time,  is  hardly  to  be  advised  for  the  freshman  year. 

Another  source  of  pecuniary  aid  is  in  the  work  of  the 
Students'  Aid  Society  established  by  the  founders  of  Welles- 
ley and  revived  and  incorporated  by  the  alumnae  of 
the  College  in  April,  1916.  The  Wellesley  College  Loan 
Fund,  estabHshed  in  1908  through  contributions  from  alum- 
nae and  other  friends  of  the  College,  is  included  in  the  re- 
sources of  the  Students'  Aid  Society.  Small  amounts  are 
loaned  to  students  without  interest  in  expectation  that  these 
students  will  repay  whenever  they  are  able.  Assistance  is 
often  given  partly  in  gifts  and  partly  in  loans.  The  existing 
funds  are  not  sufficient  to  meet  the  wants  of  deserving  ap- 
plicants,  and  contributions    of   any  amount  will  be  gladly 


1920-21  Equipment  ,         165 

received    by    the    treasurer,   Miss   Mary   Caswell,    Wellesley 
College. 

FOUNDERS  HALL 

Founders  Hall,  a  building  for  lecture  rooms  and  department 
offices  pertaining  to  instruction  in  the  Liberal  Arts,  was  opened 
for  use  in  September,  1919.  The  hall  was  built  from  the  Res- 
toration Fund,  secured  for  the  College  through  trustees, 
faculty,  alumnse,  and  other  friends,  and  replaces  in  some  part 
College  Hall,  the  first  and  main  building  of  the  College,  de- 
stroyed by  fire,  March  17,  19 14.  The  building  is  dedicated  as 
a  memorial  to  the  Founders  of  the  College,  Henry  Fowde  Durant 
and  his  wiie,  Pauline  Adeline  Durant. 

Founders  Hall  is  the  first  achieved  member  of  a  group  of 
academic  buildings  designed  by  Messrs.  Day  and  Klauder  of 
Philadelphia,  and  to  be  completed  as  soon  as  funds  allow. 


LIBRARY 

The  Library  of  the  College,  endowed  by  Eben  Norton 
Horsford,  now  numbers  91,338  bound  volumes,  including  the 
departmental  and  special  Hbraries  enumerated  below.  The 
General  Library  is  open  on  week  days  from  8.10  a.  m.  to  9.30 
p.  M.,  and  on  Sundays  from  2.30  to  5.30  p.  m.  Students  have 
direct  access  to  the  shelves.  The  library  is  catalogued  by 
author  and  subject  entries,  and  the  most  recent  and  useful 
bibliographical  aids  are  provided;  special  effort  is  made  by 
the  librarians  to  train  students  in  methods  of  research. 

The  Library  subscribes  for  seven  daily  papers  and  for  three 
hundred  and  seventy  American  and  foreign  periodicals.  The  hst 
includes  the  most  important  representatives  of  the  branches  of 
instruction  comprised  in  the  college  curriculum. 

The  Gertrude  Memorial  Library,  estabhshed  by  Mr. 
A.  A.  Sweet,  the  Missionary  Library,  and  other  collections 
in  the  General  Library,  furnish  7,985  volumes  for  Biblical 
study  and  rehgious  reading. 

The  Plimpton  Library,  established  by  Mr.  George  A. 
Plimpton,  in  memory  of  his  wdfe,  Frances  Pearsons  Plimpton, 


166  Equipment  1920-21 

of  the  class  of  1884,  comprises  940  volumes  of  early  Italian 
literature,  including  both  manuscripts  and  printed  books  of 
the  fifteenth  century. 

The  following  collections  are  placed  in  the  buildings  of  the 
respective  departments: — 

Art  Library,  2,728  volumes. 
Botany  Library,  932  volumes. 
Chemistry  Library,  852  volumes. 
Astronomy  Library,  1,139  volumes. 
Hygiene  Library,  2,701  volumes. 
Music  Library,  1,200  volumes. 

GYMNASIUM  ) 

The  department  of  Hygiene  occupies  Mary  Hemenway 
Hall  on  the  western  border  of  the  college  grounds.  It  is 
designed  to  meet  the  requirements  of  the  course  for  the 
training  of  teachers  of  hygiene,  and  to  provide  practical  in- 
struction for  the  entire  College.  The  equipment  includes 
large,  well-hghted  gymnasiums  with  ample  bathing  faciUties, 
administrative  ofiices,  class  rooms,  and  laboratories  for  anat- 
omy, physiology,  bacteriology,  hygiene,  anthropometry,  cor- 
rective gymnastics,  and  research.  The  department  hbrary 
contains  2,701  volumes,  a  collection  of  valuable  pamphlets,  and 
regularly  receives  fifteen  journals  dealing  with  matters  related 
to  hygiene.  Immediately  adjoining  Mary  Hemenway  Hall 
are  tennis  and  archery  courts,  basket  ball,  baseball,  volley 
ball,  and  hockey  fields,  an  oval  for  horse  back  riding  and  a 
riding  hall,  with  room  for  further  expansion.  Lake  Waban 
furnishes  facihties  for  rowing  and  skating,  and  there  is  also  a 
golf  course  with  a  clubhouse.  The  equipment  of  the  depart- 
ment is  designed  solely  to  aid  in  the  application  of  modern 
principles  of  science  to  the  maintenance  and  promotion  of 
health. 

THE   FARNSWORTH  ART  BUILDING 
AND  ART  COLLECTIONS 

The  Farnsworth  Art  Building,  the  gift  of  the  late  Isaac  D. 
Farnsworth,  was  opened  in  September,  1889.  Besides  lecture 
rooms,  galleries  for  collections,  and  studios  for  drawing  and 


1920-21  Equipment  167 

painting,  a  special  feature  is  the  arrangement  of  laboratories 
and  libraries,  so  that  the  books  and  art  material  relating  to 
particular  subjects  and  periods  can  be  made  immediately 
available  to  general  students. 

The  Art  Collection  consists  of  a  large  number  of  photo- 
graphs and  other  material,  including  the  James  Jackson  Jarves 
collection  of  laces  and  vestments;  the  M.  Day  Kimball  Me- 
morial, consisting  of  original  pieces  of  antique  sculpture;  a  few 
examples  of  early  Italian  painting;  a  collection  of  Indian 
baskets,  the  gift 'of  Mrs.  Rufus  S.  Frost;  various  Egyptian 
antiquities  obtained  through  the  kindness  of  the  late  Mrs. 
John  C.  Whitin,  including  certain  interesting  papyri;  and 
scarabs  and  seals  from  the  collection  of  Dr.  Chauncey  Murch, 
the  gift  of  Mrs.  Helen  M.  Gould  Shepard;  two  Renaissance 
sculptured  columns,  the  gift  of  Mr.  WilKam  C.  Safiord;  the 
Stetson  collection  of  modern  paintings,  and  a  few  other  examples. 

The  collection  of  photographs  and  other  reproductions 
numbers  over  fourteen  thousand. 


EQUIPMENT  IN  MUSIC 

Music  Hall  and  Billings  Hall  are  large  brick  buildings, 
devoted  to  the  department  of  Music.  Music  Hall  con- 
tains offices,  studios,  and  practice  rooms  equipped  with 
thhty-seven  new  pianos  of  standard  makes,  a  victrola  and 
three  player-pianos;  also  a  large  room,  containing  a_  two- 
manual  pipe  organ  for  the  use  of  the  organ  pupils.  Billmgs 
Hall,  opened  in  1904,  contains  the  office  of  the  Professor  of 
Music,  the  library  and  class  rooms  for  instruction  in  Musical 
Theory;  also  a  concert  room,  seating  four  hundred  and  ten 
people,  and  containing  the  Grover  organ,— a  large  three-manual 
organ,  rebuilt  and  modernized. 

The  Music  Library  includes  a  collection  of  manuscripts, 
about  two  hundred  scores  (Symphony,  Opera,  Oratorio,  and 
Cantata),  two  hundred  songs,  three  hundred  piano  arrange- 
ments (two,  four,  and  eight  hands),  besides  seven  hundred  and 
fifty  reference  books  on  musical  subjects.  The  department 
owns  one  hundred  records  for  the  \ictrola  and  three  hundred 
records  for  the  player-pianos. 


168  Equipment  1920-21 

LABORATORIES  AND   SCIENTIFIC 
COLLECTIONS 

ASTRONOMY 

The  Whitin  Observatory  is  a  one-story  building  of  white 
marble,  situated  on  a  small  hill  on  the  college  grounds,  and 
devoted  entirely  to  the  use  of  the  department  of  Astronomy. 
It  contains  two  rooms  surmounted  by  rotating  domes,  twenty- 
five  feet  and  twelve  and  one-half  feet  in  diameter  respectively; 
two  transit  rooms;  a  spectroscopic  laboratory;  a  large,  well- 
lighted  room  for  elementary  laboratory  work;  and  another  large 
room  in  which  is  kept  the  department  library.  In  the  larger 
dome  room  is  mounted  a  twelve-inch  Clark  equatorial  refract- 
ing telescope,  which  is  provided  with  a  filar  micrometer,  a  polar- 
izing photometer,  and  a  sLx-prism  spectroscope.  The  twenty- 
five  foot  dome  is  rotated  by  an  electric  motor.  The  smaller 
dome  contains  a  sLx-inch  Clark  equatorial  refractor.  There  are 
two  transit  instruments,  the  larger  a  Bamberg  prismatic  transit 
of  three  inches  aperture.  A  four-inch  telescope  with  objective 
by  Browning  is  mounted  in  a  south  wall  of  the  building,  with 
the  eye  end  inside  and  the  optic  axis  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the 
Earth;  a  plane  mirror  beneath  the  objective  reflects  into  the 
latter  the  Hght  of  the  object  observed.  In  the  spectroscopic 
laboratory  is  a  Rowland  concave  grating  spectroscope  of  six 
feet  focal  length. 

The  Observatory  is  supphed  with  two  Howard  sidereal  clocks, 
a  Bond  mean-time  chronometer,  and  two  chronographs,  any  of 
which  may  be  connected  electrically  through  a  switchboard 
with  keys  near  the  various  telescopes;  a  Berger  surveyor's  tran- 
sit; an  Evershed  protuberance  spectroscope;  a  Gaertner  com- 
parator for  measuring  spectrograms;  a  projecting  lantern  and 
about  400  astronomical  lantern  slides;  and  a  large  collection  of 
illustrative  apparatus  and  photographs. 

The  Observatory  House,  the  residence  of  the  Observatory 
staff,  is  near  by.  Both  the  Observatory  and  the  house,  and  also 
the  greater  part  of  the  astronomical  equipment,  are  the  gift  of 
the  late  Mrs.  John  C.  Whitin. 

BOTANY 

The  department  of  Botany  has  well-equipped  laboratories 
and  a  range  of  greenhouses. 


1920-21  Equipment  169 

The  illustrative  collections  comprise  an  herbarium  of  over 
twenty  thousand  phanerogams  and  twenty-one  thousand 
cr}^togams,  including  the  lichen  collection  of  the  late  Prof. 
Clara  E.  Cummings;  also  a  collection  of  woods,  fruits,  and 
economic  vegetable  products;  three  hundred  charts  by  Hens- 
low,  Kny,  Dodel,  Tschirch,  and  others;  a  collection  of  Auzoux's 
botanical  models;  Brendel's  glass  models  of  cryptogams; 
seventeen  hundred  water  color  paintings  of  North  American 
plants  by  Helen  Frances  Ayres;  lantern  sUdes  and  micro- 
scopic mounts.  In  addition  collections  for  a  permanent 
museum  nov/  number  more  than  five  thousand  specimens. 

The  department  has  an  "Outdoor  Laboratory"  for  the  use 
of  certain  courses.  The  greenhouses  contribute  to  all  the 
courses  in  the  department;  but  are  of  especial  importance 
in  connection  with  the  work  in  landscape  gardening,  in  plant 
physiology  and  ecology. 

The  native  flora  about  Wellesley  is  easily  accessible,  furnish- 
ing a  convenient  field  for  both  the  taxonomist  and  ecologist. 
The  library  ranks  with  the  best  botanical  libraries  in  the  coun- 
try  and  is  well  suppUed  with  reference  works  and  with  current 
periodicals. 

CHEMISTRY 

The  department  of  Chemistry  occupies  a  separate  build- 
ing, which  contains  two  lecture  rooms  and  the  chemical  li- 
brary, in  addition  to  the  rooms  fitted  up  for  laboratory  work. 
Separate  rooms  are  provided  for  work  in  General  Chemistry, 
Organic  Chemistry,  Quahtative  and  Quantitative  Analysis,  and 
Food  Analysis.  The  building  is  conveniently  arranged  and 
well  equipped  with  necessary  apparatus  and  appHances. 

During  the  summer  of  1918,  a  large  well-lighted  room,  with 
all-modern  laboratory  equipment,  was  added  for  the  use  of  the 
courses  in  Organic  Chemistry. 

GEOLOGY   AND   GEOGRAPHY 

The  department  of  Geology  and  Geography  has  a  large 
and  well-equipped  lecture  hall  provided  with  a  Leitz  epidia- 
scope for  lantern  sUde  and  opaque  projection,  a  good  sized 
class  room,  and  two  laboratories  furnished  with  students'  desks, 
one  for  the  use  of  Geography  classes,  the  other  for  work  in 
Geology. 


170  Equipment  1920-21 

The  Geology  Museum  contains  a  typical  college  collection 
of  dynamical,  structural,  and  historical  geology  specimens,— 
a  systematic  collection  of  minerals  arranged  according  to 
Dana,  and  a  systematic  collection  of  rocks.  There  are  three 
collections  arranged  for  class-room  use, — one  each  in  miner- 
alogy, petrology  and  structural  and  historical  geology.  These 
collections  are  all  the  generous  gifts  of  colleges,  museums, 
and  friends.  The  department  has  two  noteworthy  collec- 
tions. The  first  is  the  Horace  I.  Johnson  Mineral  Collection, 
which  consists  of  five  thousand  valuable  and  beautiful  mineral 
specimens,  including  many  precious  metals  and  stones.  This 
collection  is  the  gift  of  Mr.  John  Merton  of  Calumet,  Michigan, 
and  was  presented  through  the  Class  of  191 5  by  the  courtesy 
of  Miss  M.  Helen  Merton.  The  second  is  the  Reverend 
David  F.  Pierce  Collection,  which  includes  a  complete  and 
rare  collection  of  building  and  ornamental  stones  and  many 
precious  and  semi-precious  minerals.  This  collection  is  the 
gift  of  Professor  Frederick  E.  Pierce  of  Yale,  Miss  Anna  H. 
Pierce,  and  Miss  Mary  E.  Pierce  of  the  Class  of  1898. 

The  maps  of  the  department  include  wall  maps  of  different 
countries  and  sections  of  countries;  all  the  United  States 
Geologic  FoUos,  and  ten  thousand  topographic  maps  of  the 
United  States  Geologic  Survey.  Six  thousand  of^  these  latter 
maps  are  arranged  in  groups  to  illustrate  geographic  types. 

The  department  has  four  thousand  lantern  sUdes  which 
illustrate  all  phases  of  geology  and  geography. 

MATHEMATICS 

The  fine  collection  of  Mathematical  Models  was  destroyed 
by  fire  in  March,  19 14.  At  present  there  is  only  a  small  num- 
ber of  models  for  use  in  the  elementary  work. 


PHYSICS 

The  department  of  Physics  occupies  temporary  quarters 
consisting  of  two  conveniently  arranged  lecture  rooms,  fitted 
with  direct  and  alternatmg  current  and  gas,  and  laboratories 
for  general  physics,  electricity  and  heat,  and  light. 

The  equipment,  destroyed  by  fire  in  March,  1914,  is  being 
replaced  as  rapidly  as  funds  permit.  The  lecture  apparatus 
is  sufiicient  to  permit  a  wide  range  of  experimental  lectures. 


1920-21  EQxnPMENT  171 

In  the  elementary  laboratory  duplication  of  apparatus  permits 
a  close  co-ordination  between  lectures  and  laboratory  exercises. 
The  advanced  laboratory  equipment  is  especially  strong  in 
electrical  and  optical  apparatus. 


PSYCHOLOGY 

The  laboratory  is  housed  in  ten  rooms,  eight  in  the  south 
wing  of  the  Administration  Building,  and  two  in  Founders 
Hall.  Of  the  latter,  one  is  a  dark  room  and  one  is  a  quiet  room 
for  sound  experiments.  The  equipment,  entirely  destroyed 
by  fire  in  March,  19 14,  is  being  replaced  as  fast  as  conditions 
permit  or  as  need  arises.  It  is  now  quite  adequate  for  dem- 
onstration, for  general  experimental  work,  and  for  many  lines 
of  research. 

ZOOLOGY 

The  department  of  Zoology  is  housed  in  a  temporary  building, 
to  which,  in  the  summer  of  1919,  a  large  wing  was  added.  This 
building  contains  laboratories  for  the  elementary  course  in 
Zoology,  for  Histology  and  Embryology  and  for  Physiology. 
Two  courses  in  Anatomy  are  conducted  in  the  laboratories  in 
Mary  Hemenway  Hall. 

The  equipment  lost  in  the  fire  of  March,  19 14,  is  being  re- 
placed as  rapidly  as  conditions  permit.  The  fundamental  needs 
of  the  various  courses  have  been  met,  and  the  physiology  lab- 
oratory in  the  new  wing  is  fully  equipped  with  modern  appa- 
ratus. 

The  nucleus  of  a  new  museum  has  been  formed,  and  addi- 
tions are  being  made  as  fast  as  funds  and  the  lack  of  adequate 
fire-proof  space  allow.  A  new  collection  of  New  England  bhds, 
and  a  valuable  collection  of  shells,  the  gift  of  Mrs.  Rebecca  S. 
Beaman,  of  Cambridge,  are  housed  this  year  in  a  basement 
room  of  the  library. 


FORMS   OF  BEQUEST 


I  give  and  bequeath  to  Wellesley  College,  a  corporation  estab- 
lished by  law,  ifi  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk,  and 

Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  safely  invested  by  it,  ajid  called  the Endow- 
ment Fund.  The  rnterest  shall  be  applied  to  the  payment  of 
the  salaries  of  teachers  in  Wellesley  College,  as  the  Trustees  shall 
deem  expedient. 


I  give  and  bequeath  to  Wellesley  College,  a  corporation  estab- 
lished by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk,  and 

Commonwealth  of  Massachiisefts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  appropriated  by  the  Trustees  for  the  benefit  of  the 
College  in  such  ?nanner  as  they  shall  think  will  be  most  useful. 


I  give  and  bequeath  to  Wellesley  College,  a  corporation  estab- 
lished by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk,  and 

Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  safely  invested  by  it,  arid  called  the Scholar- 
ship Fund.  T!.e  interest  of  this  fund  shall  be  applied  to  aid 
deserving  students  in  Wellesley  College. 


DEGREES   CONFERRED   IN   1920 
MASTER    OF  ARTS 

Gabrielle  Felicite  Marthe  GurLLAUME  (B.A.,  Grinnell  College,  1919),  English  Literature; 
Latin. 

Grace  Wandell  Nelson  (B.A.,  Wellesley  College.  1917),  Greek  Archeology  and  Literature. 

Eleanor  Butler  Newton  (B.A.,  Wellesley  College,  1917),  Chemistry. 

Edith  Owen  Wallace  (B.A.,  New  York  ^State  College  for  Teachers,  1917),  English  Lit- 
erature. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS 


Doris  Christine  .Adams 

Katharine  Adams 

Margaret  Leighton  Alcock 

Margaret  Ellen  Alder 

Nellie  Barntngham  Alexander 

E\TMA  Anderson 

Mary  Aline  Atkinson 

Olive  Atterbury 

Dorothy  Wentworth  Atwell 

Mary  Lell.ah  Austin 

Edith  Averill 

Helen  Adams  Babbitt 

Ruby  Edna  Bacon 

Anna  ISIedora  Baetjer 

Ruth  Baetjer 

Gladys  Leonae  Bagg 

Helen  Livingston  B .alley 

R\RRiET  Carlisle  B.aker 

Josephine  Dorothy  Baker 

Adelaide  Ballinger 

Edith  Stone  Bancroft 

Lucia  Pierce  Barber 

Mab  Norton  Barber 

Helen  Covington  Barnard 

Mary  Catherine  Barnett 

Mavis  Clare  Barnett 

Ellen  Elizabeth  Barrett 

Marion  Bastedo 

Mildred  Alma  Batchelder 

JeANNETTE   LAilBERT   BeALL 

Edith  Dorothy  Bell 

Virginla  Ridley  B  err  yuan 

Anna  French  Bigelow 

Marjory  McKee  Billow 

Dorothy  Powell  Black 

Elizabeth  Blake 

Marion  Irene  Blanchard 

Gladys  Louise  Bode 

Ruth  Ault  Bolglano 

Mary  Louise  Boomer 

Margery  Borg 

Edna  Helen  Bowen 

Harriet  Virginia  Bradley 

Gladys  Mae  Brainerd 

Helen  Georgine  Welfobo)  Brecher 

Olive  Barton  Bremner 

Eleanor  Waters  Brooks 

Frances  Estelle  Brooks 

Mary  Atwater  Brooks 

Lydia  Margaret  Brown 

Camilla  Elizabeth  Bryan 

Elizabeth  deforest  Bull 


Helen  Elizabeth  Burgner 
Mildred  Wheeler  Burnett 
Constance  Olds  Burnham 
Pauline  Louise  Burnham 
Marjorie  Burtis 
Mabelle  Sherilan  Busteed 
Marjorie  Butterfield 
Dorothy  Wilcox  Calvert 
B  rend  A  Perot  Cameron 
Emlly  Ingersoll  Case 
Mary  Alois e  Cashman 
Elzura  Harris  Chandler 
LoLHSE  Gibson  Chase 
Eleanor  Cook  Clark 
Josephine  Phyllis  Clark 
Beatrice  Adaline  Clephane 
Theresa  Veronica  Coleman 
KA.THRYN  Collins 
Dorothy  Compton 
Bernice  Eleanor  Conant 
Jessie  Marjorie  Cook 
Marjory  Bertha  Cook 
Cora  Louise  Cooke 
IVlARGARET  Howard  Cooke 
Edna  Florence  Corney 
Elizabeth  Horsey  Cox 
Gertrutje  Howe  Cramton 
Sar.a  Andrews  Curtis 
Katharine  Adelaide  Cutler 
Hazel  Milliken  Dalton 
Ele-anor  Baxster  Davidson 
Gertrude  Carolyn  Davidson 
Ethel  Ann  Davis 
LucLA  Eaton  Dearborn 
Frances  Gorham  Dennett 
Mary  :\L\rjorie  DeVenne 
Roberta  Dey 

Christine  Elizabeth  Dickson 
Dorothea  Douglass 
Ruth  Ellen  Dow 
Harriet  King  Doyle 
Henrietta  Arey  Driscoll 
Dorothy  Cartwright  Dunlap 
Kathryn  Mildred  Ebberts 
Emily  Strong  Edwards 
Dorothy  Therese  Ellin 
Katherine  Elizabeth  Elsing 
Ruth  Engles 
Mary  Elmyra  Evens 
Laura  Ewe 

GWENLLYAN  MaRY   EyNON 

Ruth  Farnhau 


174 


Degrees  Conferred 


1920-21 


Kathryn  Royal  Farsar 
Edith  Ferre 

Hannah  Bartlett  Fisher 
Marion  Flagg 
Jane  Skidmore  Fleet 
Mildred  Floyd 

Kathleen  Elizabeth  Freeman 
Estelle  Gallup  Frink 
Muriel  Estelle  Fritz 
Margaret  Alexandria  Funk 
Frances  Edwards  Galpin 
Marion  Grosvenor  Gaston 
Margaret  Haeseler  Gay 
Miriam  Goodspeed 
Catherine  Sweetser  Gordon 
Harriet  Phoebe  Gordon 
Margaret  Gr.'VY 
Helen  Margaretta  Greeley 
Elizabeth  Missimer  Green 
Ruth  Carlotta  Greene 
Constance  Hall  Gregory 
Margaret  Teague  Hagler 
Gladys  Hale 
Dorothy  Elizabeth  Hall 
Jeanne  Burnett  Halsted 
Margaret  Louise  Hamm 
DoRRis  Aline  Harrison 
Mildred  Bartlett  IUrrison 
Grace  Hartman 
Charlotte  Sellers  Hassett 
Loretta  Margaret  Hassett 
Madeline  Potter  Hathaway 
Ruth  Elliott  Hav.^kins 
Kai-harine  Heath 
Mary  Virginia  Heiston 
Mary  Truesdell  Hering 
Marion  Frances  Hersey 
Katharine  Churchill  Hildreth 
Marie  Stewart  Hill 
Emily  Tyler  Holmes 
Florence  Cooper  Hope 
Margaret  Hornbrook 
Jessie  Elinor  Horne 
Louisa  Howard 
Flora  Louise  Hubner 
MiRL\M  Lees  FIuget 
Catherine  Hughes 
Helen  Humphrey 
Margaret  Hunter 
Mary  Fredna  Jackson 
Helen  Blanche  Jacobs 
Eleanor  Brooks  Jenckes 
Louise  Jenckes 
Anna  Wharton  Johnson 
Annice  Kay  Johnson 
Margorft  Johnson 
Ruth  Eliza  Johnson 
Ethel  Holt  Jones 
Gladys  Terry  Jones 
Margaret  Penfield  Jones 
Rachel  Conrad  Jones 
Josephine  Junkin 
Mabel  Cook  Kase 
Gwendoline  Elizabeth  Keene 
Hortense  Castlio  Keithly 
Sertha  Russell  Kelley 
IFlorence  Brown  Kellogg 
Julia  Adams  Kellogg 
Emily  Kent 
Bernice  Lesbia  Kenyon 


Alison  Mason  Kingsbury 
Elizabeth  Raynolds  Kingsley 
Frances  Garnar  Kinnear 
Ethel  Kinney 
I    Margaret  Elizabeth  Kinkier 
Florence  Lauer  Kite 
Viola  Beatrice  Kneeland 
Helena  Mitchell  Knight 
Jessie  Eleanor  Knorr 
Helene  Kornfeld 
Eva  Margaret  Kreiser 
Leona  Clara  Kurth 
Agnes  Priscilla  Lawyer 
Alice  Louise  LeFevre 
Sophl\  Leventhal 
Netta  Levi 
Dorothy  LE\\^s 
Minnie  Ruth  Liberman 
Della  Elizabeth  Liggett 
Dorothy  Colville  Lindsay 
Katharine  Lindsay 
Eleanor  Linton 
Mabelle  Pishon  Little 
Eleanor  Livingston 
Bertha  Cecelia  London 
Dorothy  Deshler  Lovatt 
Ruth  Loveland 
Edith  Elizabeth  Lowry 
Elisabeth  Louise  Lustig 
Gertrude  Rose  Lutke 
Ragni  Angell  Lysholm 
Ruth  Elizabeth  McClive 
Rachel  McCormick 
Alice  Miller  MacCornack 
Mary  Elizabeth  McCoy 
Mary  Shiras  McCullough 
Helen  Marie  McDonald 
Marion  Fenwick  Macduef 
Sarah  Graham  McLeod 
Agnes  Stuart  McLouth 
Margaret  Beatrice  MacNaughten 
Margaret  Main 
Elizabeth  Kerry  Manchester 
Helen  Sawyer  Marr 
Janet  Caroline  Marshuetz 
Maxine  Mayer 
Phoebe  Gertrude  Mayo 
Dorothea  Augusta  Mepham 
Helen  Burnet  Mertz 
Josephine  Williams  Middleton 
Margaret  Miller 
Catherine  Lyman  Mills 
Bertha  Anna  Mittenm.\ier 
Elizabeth  Catherine  Mock 
Esther  Frances  Moody 
Claire  Morris 
Ethel  Glenn  Morris 
Ethelyn  Ernestine  Morse 
Marjorie  Moses 
Margaret  Augusta  Murphey 
Lois  Carl  Nash 
Ruth  Webster  Nash 
Evelyn  Nellie  Neiman 
Margaret  Wayland  Nettleship 
Martha  Josephine  Newbro 
Marion  Louise  Ober 
Cecille  ICatherrine  Ogren 
Harriet  Helen  Ogsbury 
Florence  Moran  Orndorff 
Margaret  Owen 


1920-21 


Degrees  Cokferred 


175 


Doras  Catherine  Palmer 
Helen  Marion  Palmer 
Mary  Eunice  Parmenter 
Frances  Parsons 
Dorothy  Partridge 
Louise  Mary  Paul 
Caroline  Elizabeth  Peale 
Dorothy  Carita  Peck 
Dorothy  Elizabeth  Peck 
Marjorie  Linder  Perkins 
Pauline  Perkins 
Emily  Gladys  Peterson 
Bertha  Katrina  Pilgard 
Ruby  Annetta  Ponsford 
Marion  Porter 
Elizabeth  Lillian  Powers 
RA.CHEL  May  Pratt 
Ruth  Punshon 
Rachel  Harris  Rathbun 
Eleanor  Houston  Ray 
Dorothy  Margaret  Read 
Marion  Theresa  Reckford 
Doris  Margaret  Reed 
Marthe  Herminie  Regnault 
Margaret  Elizabeth  Reinhart 
Isamay  Turnbull  Richardson 
Martha  Hubbard  Richardson 
Martha  Elizabeth  Robbins 
Evelyn  Robinson 
Ruth  Deborah  Roche 
Marl^^n  Dorothy  Rundle 
Alice  Rut?p 
Anna  Alison  Russell 
Jean  Edwina  Russell 
Phyllis  Wilson  S.\dler 
Jane  S.^tford 

Margaret  Huston  St.  Clair 
Harriet  Gordon  S.\mpson 
Jane  Lee  S.antmyer 
Sidney  Estelle  Sayre 
Vivian  Alberta  Sc.adden 
Ethel  Emily  Sceaeffer 
Helen  Hastings  Scott 
Katharine  Bishop  Scott 
Helen  Gertrude  Senseny 
Eleanor  Sharp 
Helen  Gertrude  Shaw 
Margaret  Sumner  Shedd 
Florence  Josephine  Sheeler 
Mildred  Shepard 
Frances  Dorothy  Shoff 
Mary  Deane  Shuman 
Hildegarde  Bussier  Shumway 
Marjorie  Clark  Shurtleff 


Eleanor  Skerry 

Helen  Parker  Smith 

Olga  Leora  Snyder 

Ell?abeth  Fillebrown  Spaulding 

Muriel  Starret 

Louise  Steefel 

Mary  Elisabeth  Stevens 

Mary  Winona  Stevens 

Margaret  Munroe  Stevenson 

Annie  Maude  Stewart 

Catharine  Louise  Stillwell 

Helen  Strain 

Sara  Louise  Strauss 

Marian  Agnes  Stuart 

Erni  Stulz 

Fr.\nces  Mildred  Sullivan 

Florence  Tucker  Swan 

Helen  Elizabeth  Swartz 

Elinor  Taylor 

Katharine  Taylor 

Genevieve  Maut)  Thomas 

Helen  Jane  Thomas 

Mary  Dorothea  Thomas 

Anna  Catharine  Thun 

Marjorie  Carolyn  Tinkham 

Bernice  Arvilla  Tirrell 

Elizabeth  Torrence  Tone 

Mary  Frances  Trunkey 

GR.A.CE  Johnston  Twyman 

Sibyl  Wachter 

Myrilla  Walcutt 

Margaret  Elizabeth  Waldron 

Winnifred  Washburn 

Maida  Watkins 

Edith  Dana  Weigle 

Frances  Ford  Weimer 

Fanchon  Regina  Weitzenkorn 

Cynthia  Westcott 

Margaret  Langley  Wiedenbach 

Elizabeth  Austin  Wight 

Edith  Marjorie  Wilkey 

Edith  Williams 

Gertrude  Williams 

Marion  Adalin-e  Williams 

Carolyn  Willyoung 

Barbara  Freelove  Wilson 

Genevieve  Penfield  Wilson 

Florence  Winner 

Alta  Grace  Winspear 

Lydia  Ruth  Wish  art 

Charlotte  Amelia  Wood 

Virginia  Allison  Wyant 

Louise  Frances  Young 


CERTIFICATES  IN  HYGIENE  AWARDED  IN   1920 


Ruth  Harriett  Atwell, 

Ph.B.,  Denison  University 
Abby  Snow  B  eld  en, 

B.A.,  Smith  College 
Katharine  Bradley, 

B.A.,  Smith  College 
Margaret  Bram.\n  Dewey, 

B.A.,  Smith  College 
Amy  Phillips  Gilbert, 

B.A.,  Wellesley  College 
Myrtle  Viola  Jordan, 

B.A.,  WTieaton  College 


Katharine  Robb  R\wles, 

B.A.,  Indiana  University 
Grace  Muriel  Rockwood, 

B.A.,  Wheaton  College 
Mary  Effie  Shambaugh, 

B.A.,  University  of  Chicago 
Elizabeth  Ward  Stephens, 

ScB.,  Bucknell  University 
Henrietta  Str-\ngfeld, 

B. A.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University 
Katharine  Webster, 

B.A..  Smith  College 


176 


Honor  Scholarships 


1920-21 


HONOR  SCHOLARSHIPS 

Honor  Scholarships  (without  stipend)  have  been  estab- 
lished by  the  College  for  the  purpose  of  giving  recognition 
to  a  high  degree  of  excellence  in  academic  work.  These 
honors  fall  into  two  classes:  students  in  the  first,  or  higher 
class,  are  termed  Durant  Scholars;  students  in  the  second 
class  are  termed  Wellesley  College  Scholars. 

These  honors  are  awarded  to  seniors  on  the  basis  of  two 
and  one-half  years'  work,  to  juniors  on  the  basis  of  one  and 
one-half  years'  work.  The  standard  in  each  case  is  absolute, 
not  competitive. 

DURANT  SCHOLARS 


APPOINTED   IN    1920 


Josephine  Carter  Abbott,  '21 
Mary  Lellah  Austin,  '20 
Mab  Norton  Barber,  '20 
Mavis  Clare  Barnett,  '20 
Babette  Minnie  Becker,  '21 
Anna  French  Bigelow,  '20 
Dorothy  Powell  Black,  '20 
Margery  Borg,  '20 
Eleanor  Stuart  Burch,  '21 
Brenda  Perot  Cameron,  '20 
Edith  Carroll,  '21 
Eleanor  Marshall  Case,  '21 
Elzura  Harris  Chandler,  '20 
Eleanor  Cook  Clark,  '20 
Vivian  Dunbar  Collins,  '21 
Jessie  Marjorie  Cook,  '20 
Elizabeth  Horsey  Cox,  '20 
Lucia  Eaton  Dearborn,  '20 
Mary  Munger  Dudley,  '21 
Mary  Elmyra  Evens,  '20 
Margaret  Beam  Freeman,  '21 
Mary  Virginia  French,  '21 
Katharine  Haynes  Gatch,  '21 
Margaret  Haeseler  Gay,  '20 
Ruth  Carlotta  Greene,  '20 
Margaret  Williams  Haddock,  '2 
Ada  Heilner  Haeseler,  '21 
Mildred  Bartlett  Harrison,  '20 
Alida  Wilhelmina  Herling,  '21 
Katharine  Churchill  Hildreth, 
Shirley  Louise  Himes,  '21 
Elizabeth  Warner  Hubbard,  '21 
Flora  Louise  Hubner,  '20 
Catherine  Hughes,  '20 
Marguerite  Helen  Jackson,  '21 
Margaret  Stella  Jacoby,  '21 
Annice  Kay  Johnson,  '20 
Rachel  Conrad  Jones,  '20 
Bernice  Lesbia  Kenyon,  '20 
Alison  Mason  Kingsbury,  '20 
Florence  Lauer  Kite,  '20 
Netta  Levi,  '20 


Katharine  Lindsay,  '20 
Clara  Olds  Loveland,  '21 
Jeannette  Louise  Luther,  '21 
Gertrude  Rose  Lutke,  '20 
Alice  McCullough,  '21 
Mary  Shiras  McCullough,  '20 
Helen  Annette  McKearin,  '21 
Sarah  Graham  McLeod,  '20 
Mildred  Vannoie  Masters,  '21 
Hope  Mathewson,  '21 
Edith  Rittenhouse  Mayne,  '21 
Adela  Merrell,  '21 
Ethel  Glen  Morris,  '20 
Helen    Marion  Palmer,  '20 
Emily  Gladys  Peterson,  '20 
Elizabeth  Prentiss  R'\nd,  '21 
Louise  Davis  Reynolds,  '21 
Phebe  Ann  Richmond,  '21 
Mary  Elizabeth  Ritchey,  '21 
Anna  Alison  Russell,  '20 
Eleanor  Saneord,  '21 
Elizabeth  Knight  Sayre,  '21 
Helen  Hastings  Scott,  '20 

K-ATHARINE    BiSHOP    ScOTT,  '2O 

Hildegarde  Bussier  Shumway, 
Helen  Parker  Smith,  '20 
Elinor  Bruce  Snow,  '21 
Esther  Reese  Stevens,  '21 
Annie  Maude  Stewart,  '20 
Marian  Agnes  Stuart,  '20 
Florence  Tucker  Swan,  '20 
Katharine  Slocum  Temple,  '21 
Virginia  Macqueen  Travell,  '2 
Frances  May  Turrentine,  '21 
Myrilla  Walcutt,  '20 
Cynthia  Westcott,  '20 
Margaret  Anna  White,  '21 
Evelyn  Prescott  Wiggin,  '21 
Edith  Williams,  '20 
Esther  Wolcott,  '21 
Sze  Tsong  Yuan,  '21 


1920-21 


Honor  Scholarships 


177 


WELLESLEY  COLLEGE  SCHOLARS 


APPOINTED    IN    1920 


Doris  Christine  Adams,  '20 
Dorothy  Wentworth  Atwell,  '20 
Ruth  Baetjer,  '20 
Gladys  Leonae  Bagg,  '20 
Josephine  Dorothy  Baker,  '20 
Lucia  Pierce  Barber,  '20 
Edith  Dorothy  Bell,  '20 
ViRGiNLA.  Ridley  Berryman,  '20 
Edith  Bdcby,  '21 
Edna  Helen  Bowen,  '20 
Frances  Estelle  Brooks,  '20 
Lydia  Margaret  Brown,  '20 
Henrietta  Browning.  '21 
Elizabeth  deForest  Bull,  '20 
Constance  Olds  Burvham,  '20 
Marjorie  Butterpield,  '20 
Dorothy  Wilcox  Calvert,  '20 
Bernice  Eleanor  Conant,  '20 
Elizabeth  Fairs  roth  er  Cornell,  '21 
Mary  Virginia  Crane,  '21 
Gertrude  Carolyn  Da\tdson,  '20 
Ethel  Ann  DA\as,  '20 
Amelia  Jocelyn  DeWolf,  '21 
Mary  Catharine  Dooly,  '21 
K.\thryn  Mildred  Ebberts,  '20 
Ruth  Engles,  '20 
Laura  Ewe,  '20 
Edith  Ferre,  '20 
Muriel  Estelle  Fritz,  '20 
Helen  Alma  Gary,  '21 
Miriam  Goodspeed,  '20 
Harriet  Phoebe  Gordon,  '20 
Margaret  Gray,  '20 
Mary  Orrea  Gray,  '21 
Elizabeth  Missimer  Green,  '20 
Dorothy  Elizabeth  Hall,  '20 
Ruth  Hampson,  '21 
Charlotte  Sellers  Hassett,  '20 
Mildred  Clara  Hesse,  '21 
Rebecca  Stoughton  Hill,  '21 


Florence  Wood  Holmes,  '21 

Margaret  Hornbrook,  '20 

Gladys  Terry  Jones,  '20 

Ethel  Kinney,  '20 

Viola  Beatrice  Kneelant),  '20 

Edna  Browning  Lipping ott,  '21 

Marion  Lockwood,  '21 

Helen  Grace  McM\hon,  '21 

Maxine  Mayer,  '20 

Lois  Meier,  '21 

Marian  Huddleston  Miller,  '21 

Esther  Frances  Moody,  '20 

Anna  Hooker  Morse,  '21 

Mary  Virginl\  Oldham,  '21 

Florence  Moran  Orndorff,  '20 

Nancy  Pearl  Oxnard,  '21 

Helen  Darling  Parker,  '21 

Helen  Lucille  Phillips,  '21 

Rachel  May  Pratt,  '20 

Josephine  Langworthy  Rathbone,  '2 

Margaret  Elizabeth  Reinhart,  '20 

Helen  Barrett  Robertson,  '21 

Alice  Rupp,  '20 

Harriet  Gordon  Sampson,  '20 

Jane  Shields  Sams,  '21 

Helen  Gertrltde  Shaw,  '20 

Elizabeth  Gordon  Shedd,  '21 

Marion  Calvert  Smith,  '21 

Olive  Snow,  '21 

Helen  Grover  Stone,  '21 

Katherine  Mildred  Strasmer,  '21 

Nana  Anne  Taylor,  '21 

Genevieve  Maud  Thomas,  '20 

Mary  Dorothea  Thomas,  '20 

Sibyl  Wachter.  '20 

Edith  Dana  Weigle,  '20 

Constance  Whittemore,  '21 

Elizabeth  Austin  Wight,  '20 

Genevieve  Penfield  Wilson,  '20 

Nathalie  Lois  Wilson,  '21 


SUMMARY  OF  STUDENTS 


Resident  candidates  for  the  M.A.  degree 

Resident  candidates  for  the  Certificate  in  Hygiene  . 

Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree: — 

Seniors 308 

Juniors 428 

Sophomores 321 

Freshmen 426 

Unclassified 5 


1,488 


on-canaiaates  lor  aegrees    . 

Total  registration,  November,  1920 

. 

.       .                       4 
.       .                1,551 

nited  States: — 

Alabama 

6 

New  Jersey    .       .       .       .161 

Arizona 

I 

New  York      . 

.     236 

Arkansas 

2 

North  Carolina 

2 

California 

13 

Ohio 

86 

Colorado 

7 

Oklahoma 

3 

Connecticut  . 

.       65 

Oregon    . 

Delaware 

I 

Pennsylvania 

171 

District  of  Columbia 

24 

Philippines     . 

Florida    . 

5 

Rhode  Island 

31 

Georgia 

8 

South  Carolina 

Hawaii 

4 

South  Dakota 

Idaho 

5 

Tennessee 

Illinois 

.       87 

Texas      . 

25 

Indiana 

II 

Utah       . 

Iowa 

17 

Vermont 

Kansas 

9 

Virginia  . 

II 

Kentucky 

12 

Washington 

Louisiana 

3 

West  Virginia 

Maine     . 

.       37 

Wisconsin 

19 

Maryland 

17 

Wyoming 

Massachusetts 

•     299 

Canada 

Michigan 

•       34 

China 

Minnesota      . 

14 

France 

Mississippi     . 

2 

Japan 

Missouri 

27 

Norway 

Montana 

2 

Serbia 

Nebraska       .       . 

15 

Spain  . 

New  Har 

npshire    . 

.        24 

OFFICERS   OF  THE  ALUMNA  ASSOCIATION 
1920-1922 


Mrs.  Helen  Knowles  Bonnell  (Mrs.  H.  H.),  Presidrnt,  ^,  .,    ,  ,  ,  .     t^ 

III  Moreland  Ave.,  Chestnut  Hill,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
Mrs.  Helen  Fobs  Wood  (Mrs.  G.  B.),  Vice-President,  1830  Spruce  St.,  PhUadelphia,  Pa. 
IiIrs.  Ethel  Doak  Camp  (Mrs.  G.  R.),  Corresponding  Secretary,  ....,,.     ^ 

513  South  45th  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
Mrs.  Stella  Wrenn  Parsly  (Mrs.  E.  G.),  Director,  6426  Sherwood  Rd.,  Overbrook,  Pa. 
Miss  Jeannette  Keim,  Treasurer,  Cynwyd,  Pa. 

Miss  Laura  M.  Dwight,  Alumna  General  Secretary  and  Secretary  of  the  Graduate  Council, 

Wellesley,  Mass. 

LOCAL    ASSOCIATIONS 

In  the  following,  an  arrangement  by  states  has  been  adopted.  The  name  standing  after 
that  of  the  club  refers  to  the  secretary-treasurer  unless  otherwise  specified.  In  the  address 
of  this  officer,  the  name  of  the  city  (or  town)  and  state  are  omitted  if  these  have  already 
been  expressly  stated  in  the  heading.  Corrections  or  additions  will  be  gratefully  received. 
Brackets  indicate  information  not  recent. 

California. 

Central,  Elizabeth  S.  Adams,  1770  Pacific  Ave.,  San  Francisco. 
Southern,  Elizabeth  Connor,  526  LaLoma  Rd.,  Pasadena. 

China. 

Katherine  Williams,  Y.  W.  C.  A.,  Peking. 

COLOR.ADO.  ^  ,  ,      ^  T^ 

State,  Myra  Camp  Bostwick  (Mrs.  E.  L.),  1045  Gaylord  St.,  Denver. 
Deliver,  Jane  Lennox  Capen  (Mrs.  B.  C),  2137  Gaylord  St.,  Denver. 
Southern,  Emma  Bixby  Jordan  (Mrs.  A.  H.),  President,  1419  North  Tejon  St.,  Colorado 
Springs. 
Columbia,  District  of. 

Edna  Spaulding,  3021  Q  St.,  N.  W.,  Washington. 

Connecticut. 

Bridgeport,  Elizabeth  Carter,  480  Wood  Ave. 
Hartford,  Dorothy  Larrabee,  27  Summer  St. 
New  Haven,  Lillian  C.  Armstrong,  150  Edgehill  Ave. 

Hawah.  ^      ,  , 

Juliette  May  Fraser,  1804  College  St.,  Honolulu. 

Illinois.  ,      .        ^    .      „    , 

Chicago,  Ruth  Watson,  3832  North  Keeler  Ave.,  Irving  Park. 

Indiana. 

Florence  Venn,  1927  North  Illinois  St.,  Indianapolis. 

bes  Moines,  Dorothy  Deemer  Houghton  (Mrs.  H.  C),  Red  Oak. 

Gertrude  WiUcox  Weakley  (Mrs.  Wm.  R.),  14  Kawaguchi,  Osaka. 

Kentucky.  _     ^     . 

Edith  Bain,  516  West  3d  St.,  Lexington. 

Eastern,  Bemice  B.  Dunning,  156  Cedar  St.,  Bangor.      ,      ,  .         ^      ,      , 
Western,  Mabel  Wood  Little  (Mrs.  Albion),  473  Cumberland  Ave.,  Portland. 

Maryland. 

Baltimore,  Virginia  Alcock,  2742  St.  Paul  St. 

Massachusetts. 

Berkshire,  Grace  Van  Deusan  Hall  (Mrs.  George),  Great  Barrmgton. 

Boston,  Elizabeth  Smart  Judkins  (Mrs.  J.  B.),4  Newport  Rd.,  Cambridge. 

Fitchburg,  Louise  Stratton  Vaughan  (Mrs.  Wm.  R.),  16  Cherry  St. 

Haverhill,  Lucasta  Boynton,  140  Pleasant  St.,  Bradford. 

Lowell,  Hannah  E.  Moors,  104  Moore  St. 

S  E.  Mass.,  Mae  A.  Perkins,  57  Berkeley  St.,  Taunton. 

Springfield,  Lucy  Besse  Mitchell  (Mrs.  John),  90  Westminster  St.  » 

Worcester,  Marjory  Boynton  Rugg  (Mrs.  C.  B.),  53  Institute  Rd. 


180  Alumna  Association   '  1920-21 

Michigan. 

Detroit,  Ruth  Houghton,  130  Longfellow  Ave. 
Minnesota. 

Minneapolis,  Dorothy  Stacy,  2307  Colfax  Ave.,  S. 

St.  Paul,  Elsa  Chapin,  Summit  School. 
Missouri. 

Kansas  City,  Lucy  A.  Holmes,  4144  Warwick  Blv'd. 

S'^  Louis,  Mrs.  Marion  Whitehouse  Thomas,  Buckingham  Hotel. 
Nebraska. 

Omaha,  Jeannette  Mayer  Armstein  (Mrs.  Herbert),  3810  Davenport  St. 
New  Hampshire. 

Anna  Cross,  Nashua. 
New  Mexico. 

Lillian  Spitz  Bigler  (Mrs.  Earle),  Box  125,  Artesia. 
New  York. 

Buffalo,  Laura  Barton,  118  Summit  Ave. 

Eastern  N.Y.,  Cornelia  Mills,  155  South  Lake  Ave.,  Albany. 

Ithaca,  AHce  fVork  Willcox  (Mrs.  Walter  F.),  3  South  Ave. 

New  York  City,  Muriel  Windram  Sichel  (Mrs.  Harold),  424  West  20th  St. 

Rochester,  Marion  Thing  Sunderlin  (Mrs.  E.  L.),  30  Faraday  St. 

Syracuse,  Mary  Lovelace,  738  South  Crouse  Ave. 

Utica,  Ruth  Turner  Mandeville  (Mrs.  E.  W.),  831  Genesee  St. 
Ohio. 

Jkron,  Margaret  S.  Wright,  384  West  Market  St. 

Cincinnati,  Louise  DomhoS,  Hotel  Gibson. 

Cleveland,  Frances  Dunham,  2281  Tudor  Drive. 

Columbus,  Hattie  Weiler  Lazarus  (Mrs.  Robt.),  43  Preston  Rd.,  Bexley,  R.  F.  D.,  Colum- 
bus. 

Toledo,  Marie  Schmidt,  719  Michigan  St. 

Youngstown,  Frances  Mason  Lynn  (Mrs.  D.  J.),  929  Belmont  Ave. 
Oregon. 

Portland,  Mary  Atkinson  Tracy  (Mrs.  R.  S.),  715  Hancock  St. 
Pennsylvania. 

Eastern  Hill,   Grace   Richman  McMath   (Mrs.  R.  E.),  President,  612   Prospect   St., 
Bethlehem. 

Northeastern,  Mary  James,  1744  Capouse  Ave.,  Scranton. 

Philadelphia,  Constance  Gill,  6427  Sherwood  Rd.,  Overbrook. 

Pittsburgh,  Rachel  Donovan,  1633  Shady  Ave. 

Southeastern,  Lucy  H.  Ellmaker,  342  East  Orange  St.,  Lancaster. 

Williamsport,  Mary  Brown  Taggart  (Mrs.  H.  W.),  317  Campbell  St. 
Rhode  Island. 

Providence,  Celia  Tourtellot,  15  Burnett  St.,  Providence. 
South  Dakota. 

Harriet  Deane  Tufts  (Mrs.  Arthur  H.),  Sioux  Falls. 
Tennessee. 

Memphis,  Mary  V.  Little,  576  Linden  Ave. 
Utah. 

Salt  Lake  City,  Dorothy  Day,  2480  5th  St. 
Vermont. 

State,  Ellen  Cramton,  iii  Park  Ave.,  Rutland. 
Virginia. 

State,  Helen  Coale  Worthington  (Mrs.  Hugh),  Sweet  Briar. 
Washington. 

Western,  Anne  Mobley  Sutton  (Mrs.  W.  H.),  East  Seattle. 
Wisconsin. 

Madison,  Florence  Hastings  Stebbins  (Mrs.  B.  W.),  1032  Sherman  Ave. 

Milwaukee,  Ruth  Strong,  619  Shepard  St. 


INDEX 


Page 

Academic  Year       ....  s 

Administration       ....  19 
Admission: — 

Requirements  for           ...  24 

To  Advanced  Standing         .        .  47 

Examinations         ....  42 

To  Freshman  Class       .        .        .  24 

To  Department  01  Music     .         49,  133 

To  Department  of  Hvgieue    48,  49,  loS 

Of  Graduate  Students  ...  48 

Of  Special  Students       ...  49 

Alumna  Association,  Officers  of  179 

American  Academy  in  Rome      .  158 

American   School  of   Classical 

Studies  in  Athens  .        .       .  158 

Anglo-Saxon 85 

Archeology 50 

Architecture 52,  53 

Art 51 

Art  Collections     ....  166 

Asironomy 55 

Bequest,  Forms  of        .       .       .  172 
Biblical    History,    Literature, 

and  Interpretation      .       .  57 

Billings  Hall         ....  167 

Board 153 

Botany 59 

Calendar  5 

Certificates  in  Hygiene    .       .  i75 

Chemistry 66 

Christian  Association  ...  23 
College  Entrance  Examination 

Board 42 

Committees  of  Trustees     .       .  7 

Committees  of  Faculty       .       .  22 

Correspondence      ....  2 

Courses  of  Instruction      .       .  50 

Dante  Prize 117 

Degrees: — 

B.A.,  Requirements  for        .        .  149 

M. A.,  Requirements  for       .  152 

Degrees  Conferred  in  1920       .  173 

Economics 68 

Education 73 

English  Composition     ...  83 

Engush  Language         ...  85 

English  Literature      ...  76 
Examinations: — 

Admission 42 

College 149 

Expenses 152 

Faculty      9 

Farnsworth  Art  Building  .       .  166 

Fees 154 

Fellows iS 

Fellowships 156 


Page 

Foundation  and  Purpose    .       .  23 

Founders  Hall  .            ...  165 

French 86 

Geology 90 

German 94 

Gothic 99 

Graduate  Instruction         .        .  152 

Greek 99 

Gymnasium 166 

Harmony  AND  Musical  Theory  .  127 

Health  Provisions        .       .       .  155 

Hebrew 58,  59 

History 102 

Hygiene loS 

Italian 117 

Laboratories 168 

Latin 119 

Libraries 165 

Logic 134 

Marine  Biological  Laboratory 

at  Wood's  Hole             .       .  158 

Mathematics 123 

Meteorology 140 

Mineralogy 91 

Music: — 

Theory  of 127 

Instrument,;!  and  V^ocal        .        .  133 

Equipment  in         ....  167 

Music  Hall 167 

Observatory 168 

Pedagogy 73 

Philosophy        ....      134,  136 

Physics 139 

Physiology        .       .       .      114,  146,  147 

Poutical  Science  ....  107 
Psychology       ....      134, 135 

Reading  and  Speaking         .       .  141 

Residence 155 

Scholarships 156 

With  Stipend:— 

For  Graduates    .        .        .        .  158 

For  Undergraduates          .        .  159 

Without  Stipend    .        .        .        .  176 

Scientific  Collections        .       .  168 

Sociology 68 

Spanish 143 

Special  Students    ....  49 
Studio  Lessons        .        .       .        .  51,  S3 

Students'  Aid  Society         .       .  164 

Summary  of  Students  .       .       .  178 

Trustees,  Board  of      .       .       .  6 

Tuition 152 

Vacations 5 

Wellesley  Clubs    .       .       .       .  179 

Zoology 145